M.

MACHINES.

Cylindrical printing, or, as it is generally termed, Machine printing, is a new mode of obtaining impressions from types, the introduction of which took place in the year 1814. It has caused a great revolution in the art, from the facilities which it affords for printing sheets of paper of a size of which no press worked by manual labour is capable, nor, were it capable, is the strength of one man equal to the exertion requisite for the pressure necessary to produce a respectable impression. In addition to this advantage of printing sheets of such larger dimensions, it possesses the power of multiplying impressions so rapidly as to appear like the work of magic. This may seem hyperbolical; but the average rate of working at a press for common work, that is the general run of book work, with two men, one to ink the types, and the other to work the press, is but 250 copies an hour, while a machine will produce 1,250 copies in the same time; and considerably more might be obtained, were not its powers restrained by the limited human means of feeding it with paper, it being found by experience that the number stated is the extent to which one person could supply it, he having regard to laying on the sheets evenly, so as to preserve a regular margin: but this speed was not deemed sufficient to meet the wants that were felt, and the Times newspaper is now printed at a machine where the paper is laid on at four places, one form of which, consisting of four pages, is printed at the astonishing rate of 4,320 an hour at its ordinary rate of working, a fact which I have seen and ascertained myself, by counting its motions with a seconds watch in my hand. Mr. Richard Taylor has also a similar Machine at which the Weekly Dispatch is printed. Considering what has been done, I cannot see a reason why the paper should not be supplied at six or eight places, if found necessary, so as to increase the number printed to 6,000 or 8,000 in an hour; as the wonder ceases when we remember that steam is the moving power. Of the comparative merits of the Machine and the Press I shall speak subsequently.

As the details of the invention are not generally known, I will give some account of them, letting the parties speak for themselves, so far as I have been able to procure their own statements. The first is the Specification of the Patent granted to Mr. William Nicholson; the next, Observations on the Art of Printing Books, &c., written by him, and published in his own Journal, which clearly describe the present machines and inking apparatus. This specification, and the other details, with the engravings, will render it unnecessary for me to enter into a lengthened description of these machines, or do more than merely state that the form is imposed in the usual manner, laid upon a horizontal table, which travels under a cylinder covered with woollen cloth, adjusted so as to have a proper bearing upon the types in order to produce an impression, and that the inking apparatus is at one end, consisting of small rollers, which take and distribute ink upon another table, for each impression, when the form in travelling passes under one of them to receive its coating of ink.

“Specification of the Patent granted to Mr. William Nicholson, of New North-Street, Red Lion-Square; for a Machine or Instrument for printing on Paper, Linen, Cotton, Woollen, and other Articles, in a more neat, cheap, and accurate Manner, than is effected by the Machines now in use. Dated April 29, 1790.

“To all to whom these presents shall come, &c. Now know ye that, in compliance with the said proviso, I the said William Nicholson do hereby declare, that my said invention is described in the plan hereunto annexed, and the description thereof hereunder written, and in manner following; that is to say, my invention consists in three parts or particulars; namely, first, the manner or method of making, preparing, or placing, the original model, models, casts, types, engravings, carvings, or sculptures from which the impression is to be made. Secondly, in applying the ink, or colouring-matter, to such models, casts, types, engravings, carvings, or sculptures. And, thirdly, in taking off the impression, or transferring the ink, or colouring-matter, from such models, casts, types, engravings, carvings, or sculptures, to the paper, cloth, or other material upon which it is intended it should remain.

“I. In the first place then, I not only avail myself of all the methods of making, preparing, and placing, the original models, casts, types, engravings, carvings, or sculptures which have hitherto been known or used in printing, and do myself make use of them in conjunction with my newly-invented method of applying the ink, or colouring-matter, to such original models, casts, types, engravings, carvings, or sculptures, and also with my newly-invented method of taking off the impressions, but I do likewise make, put together, and arrange them in a new manner, as occasion may require; that is to say,

“II. I make my moulds, punches, and matrices, for casting letters, in the same manner, and with the same materials, as other letter-founders do, excepting that, instead of leaving a space in the mould for the stem of one letter only, I leave spaces for two, three, or more letters, to be cast at one pouring of the metal; and at the lower extremity of each of those spaces (which communicate by a common groove at top) I place a matrix, or piece of copper with the letter punched upon its face in the usual way. And moreover, I bring the stem of my letters to a due form and finish, not only by rubbing it on a stone, and scraping it when arranged in the finishing-stick, but likewise by scraping it on one or more sides, in a finishing-stick whose hollowed part is less deep at the inner than the outer side. I call that side of the groove which is nearest the face of the disposed letter, the outer side; and the purpose accomplished by this method of scraping is, that of rendering the tail of the letter gradually smaller the more remote it is, or farther from the face. Such letter may be firmly imposed upon a cylindrical surface, in the same manner as common letter is imposed upon a flat stone. I specify and affirm that the above described methods of casting two or more letters at once, and of chamfering or sloping their tails, are parts of my new invention.

“III. I impose or dispose my letter for printing in the common manner, to be used in conjunction with my newly-invented improvements. And I likewise impose it in frames or chases adapted to the surface of a cylinder of wood, or metal, and fasten it to the said surface by screws, or wedges, or in grooves, or by other methods well known to workmen; and this imposing letter upon a cylinder I state and affirm to be part of my new invention.

“IV. I cut, carve, engrave, chase, cast, model or make, (in the usual manner of performing those operations,) blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals, to be used for printing, either of wood, metal, or other materials; and these I use in conjunction with my other newly-invented improvements. I likewise, for other kinds of work, do fasten with glue, cement, screws, wedges, or by other known methods, such blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals, as aforesaid, to the surface of a cylinder. I likewise, for other kinds of work, do cut, carve, engrave, chase, cast, model or make, blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals, as aforesaid, of a cylindrical form, of wood, metal, or other materials. And I state and affirm that this disposition of blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals, upon a cylinder, and also that the cutting, carving, engraving, chasing and casting, modelling or making, blocks, plates, types, or originals, of a cylindrical form, as aforesaid, are parts of my new invention.

“V. In the second place, I distribute or apply the ink, or colouring-matter, upon the surface, or in the interstices, of the blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals aforesaid, by causing the surface of a cylinder, smeared or wetted with the colouring-matter, to roll over, or successively apply itself to, the surfaces of the said blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals, of whatever figure or construction such blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals, may be. Or else I cause the said blocks, forms, plates, types, or originals, successively to apply themselves to the said cylinder. I call the said smeared or wetted cylinder, the colouring-cylinder. Its surface is covered with leather, or the dressed skins which printers call pelts, or else it is covered with woollen, or linen, or cotton cloth. When the colour to be used is thin, as in calico-printing, and in almost every case, the covering is supported by a firm elastic stuffing, consisting of hair, or wool, or woollen cloth wrapped one or more folds round the cylinder. When the covering consists of woollen cloth, the stuffing must be defended by leather, or oilskin, to prevent its imbibing too much colour, and by that means losing its elasticity. It is absolutely necessary that the colouring-matter be evenly distributed over the surface of the cylinder; for this purpose, when the colour is thick and stiff, as in letter-press printing, I apply two, three, or more small cylinders, called distributing-rollers, longitudinally against the colouring-cylinders, so that they may be turned by the motion of the latter; and the effect of this application is, that every lump or mass of colour which may be redundant, or irregularly placed upon the face of the colouring-cylinder, will be pressed, spread, and partly taken up, and carried by the small rollers to the other parts of the colouring-cylinder; so that this last will very speedily acquire and preserve an even face of colour. But if the colouring-matter be thinner, I do not apply more than one or two of these distributing rollers; and, if it be very thin, I apply an even blunt edge of metal, or wood, or other material, or a straight brush, or both of these last, against the colouring-cylinder, for the purpose of rendering its colour uniform.

“VI. When I apply colour to an engraved plate, or cylinder, or apply the colour through the interstices of a perforated pattern, or cylinder, as in the manufacturing of some kinds of paper-hangings and floor-cloths, I use a cylinder entirely covered with hair or bristles, in the manner of a brush.

“VII. The whole of the manipulations or practices described in the two preceding paragraphs (numbers V. and VI.) are parts of my invention.

“VIII. In the third place, I perform all my impressions by the action of a cylinder or cylindrical surface; that is to say, I cause the paper, or cloth, or other material intended to be printed upon, (and previously damped if necessary,) to pass between two cylinders, or segments of cylinders, in equal motion; one of which has the block, form, plate, assemblage of types, or originals, attached to, or forming part of, its surface, and the other is faced with cloth or leather, and serves to press the paper, cloth, or other material, as aforesaid, so as to take off an impression of the colour previously applied. Or otherwise, I cause the block, form, plate, assemblage of types, or originals, previously coloured, to pass in close and successive pressure or contact with the paper, or cloth, or other material, wrapped round a cylinder with woollen. Or otherwise, I cause the last mentioned cylinder, with the paper, or cloth, or other material wrapped round it, to roll along the face of the block, form, plate, assemblage of types, or originals, previously coloured. Or otherwise, I cause a cylinder having the block, form, plate, assemblage of types, or originals, attached to, or forming part of, its surface, to roll along the surface of the paper, cloth, or other material intended to be printed, and previously spread out upon an even plane covered with cloth or leather; the said cylinder being supplied with colour by means of a colouring-cylinder herein before described, and herein after more particularly to be noticed.

“IX. The foregoing description shews the nature of my invention; which may be applied to a great variety of uses, and constructed or put together in a great variety of forms. Its uses consist in the printing of books in general, the printing of paper-hangings, floor-cloths, cottons, linens, woollens, silks, ribands, laces, leather, skin, and every other flexible material whatever. And its form or construction, being no essential part of the invention, may without difficulty be obtained and carried into effect, by any workman possessed of common skill and ability. Nevertheless, as there may be some artists of such a moderate capacity as to find the foregoing instructions not sufficient to enable them to construct my machines, I shall proceed to exhibit drawings, and describe several methods of constructing them. But, at the same time, I think it pertinent to take notice, that as the following constructions cannot be exclusively claimed by me by virtue of his Majesty’s letters patent granted unto me, excepting so far as the same include or contain my new improvements and inventions, so, on the other hand, I do not exhibit the same as the only practical methods of carrying my invention into effect, but I claim the general and universal application of the principles discovered and brought into practice by me, as before described; and do here proceed to exhibit and describe certain specific applications of those principles, chiefly from a conviction that it is my duty to render this present specification clear and intelligible by every means in my power. And moreover, since in the following applications or particular methods there are, and may be found, several contrivances resulting from a considerable degree of deliberation, labour, and expence, and tending to facilitate the practice of my said inventions, I do not by any means hereby exclude the following descriptions and drawings from my present specification; for I do not consider them as being merely illustrative of the general principles herein before described and explained, but do hereby assert and maintain, that all and every parts and part of the machines herein after described, which have not hitherto been used as parts of some other machine, or in combination directed to the accomplishment of the like purpose of printing, are stated and claimed by me as parts of my said invention; for the exclusive enjoyment of which, as well as of every other part of the said invention hereby specified by me, I claim all protection and every advantage which, by his Majesty’s letters patent, I may lawfully be entitled to.

“EXPLANATION OR THE ANNEXED DRAWINGS.

“Fig. 1. represents a printing-press, more especially applicable to the printing of sheets of paper, or books. A. and E. represent two cylinders running or turning in a strong frame of wood, of metal, or both. The cylinder A. is faced with woollen cloth, and is capable of being pressed with more or less force upon HI, by means of the lever M. HI is a long table, which is capable of moving endways, backwards and forwards, upon the rollers E and K. The roller A acts upon this table by means of a cog-wheel, or by straps, so as to draw it backwards and forwards by the motion of its handle L. The table is kept in the same line by grooves on its sides, which contain the cylinder A. D is a chase, containing letter set up and imposed. B is a box, containing a colouring-roller, with its distributing-rollers CC; it is supported by the arm N. O is a cylinder faced with leather, and lying across an ink-block; this cylinder is fixed by the middle to a bended lever movable on the joint Q.

[Illustration: _Fig. 1._]

“_The action._ When D, or the letter, is drawn beneath the cylinder B, it receives ink; and when it has passed into the position R, a workman places or turns down a tympan with paper upon it; (this tympan differs in no respect from the usual one, except that its hinge opens sideways;) it then proceeds to pass under the cylinder A, which presses it successively through its whole surface. On the other side, at S, the workman takes off the paper, and leaves the tympan up. This motion causes the cylinder B to revolve continually, and consequently renders its inked surface very uniform, by the action of its distributing-rollers CC; and, when the table has passed to its extreme distance in the direction now spoken of, the arm G touches the lever P, and raises the cylinder O off the ink-block, by which means it dabs against one of the distributing-rollers, and gives it a small quantity of ink. The returning motion of the table carries the letter again under the roller B, which again inks it, and the process of printing another sheet goes on as before. N.B. The table in this drawing is not quite long enough in its dimensions, compared with the inking-roller.

[Illustration: _Fig. 2._]

“Fig. 2. is another printing-press: in this, B is the inking-roller; A is a cylinder, having the letter imposed upon its surface; and E is a cylinder, having its uniform surface covered with woollen cloth: these three cylinders are connected, either by cogs or straps at the edges of each. The machine is uniformly turned in one direction by the handle L. The workman applies a sheet of paper to the surface of E, where it is retained, either by points in the usual manner, or by the apparatus to be described in treating of Fig. 4. The paper passes between E and A, and receives an impression; after which the workman takes it off, and applies another sheet; and in the mean time the letter on the surface of A passes round against the surface of B, and receives ink during the rotation of B. The distributing-rollers CC do their office as in the machine Fig. 1.; and once in every revolution the tail F, affixed to B, raises the inking-piece G, so as to cause it to touch one of the distributing-rollers, and supply it with ink. In this way therefore the repeated printing of sheet after sheet goes on.

“Fig. 3. is a printing-press, more particularly adapted to print cottons, silks, paper-hangings, or other articles which run of a considerable length.

“Fig. 4. is a printing-press, chiefly of use for books and papers. 1 2 3 4 represents a long table, with ledges on each side; so that the two cylinders A and B can run backwards and forwards without any side shake. In one of these ledges is placed a strip or plate of metal cut into teeth which lock into correspondent teeth in each cylinder; by which means the two cylinders roll along, without the possibility of changing the relative positions of their surfaces at any determinate part of the table. This may also be effected by straps, and may indeed be accomplished, with tolerable accuracy, by the mere rolling of the cylinders on the smooth or flat ledges without any provision. A is the printing-cylinder, covered with woollen cloth, and B is the inking-cylinder, with its distributing-rollers. The table may be divided into four compartments, marked with a thicker bounding-line than the rest, and numbered 1 2 3 4. At 1 is placed a sheet of paper; at 2 is the form or chase, containing letter set and imposed; at 3 is an apparatus for receiving the printed sheet; and 4 is employed in no other use than as a place of standing for the carriage E, after it has passed through one operation, and when it takes ink at F. Its action is as follows: the carriage is thrust forward by the workman, and as the roller A passes over the space numbered 1, it takes up the sheet of paper previously laid there, while the roller B runs over the form and inks the letter. The sheet of paper, being wrapped round the cylinder A, is pressed against the form as that cylinder proceeds, and consequently it receives an impression. When A arrives at the space numbered 3, it lets go the sheet of paper, while the prominent part of the carriage, G, strikes the lever P, and raises the inking-piece, which applies itself against one of the distributing-rollers. In this manner therefore the cylinder A returns empty, and the cylinder B inked, and in the mean time the workman places another sheet of paper ready in the space numbered 1. Thus it is that the operation proceeds in the printing of one sheet after another.

[Illustration: _Fig. 4._]

“The preceding description is not incumbered with an account of the apparatus by which the paper is taken up and laid down. This may be done in several ways: Figs. 9 and 10 represent one of the methods. D E is a lever, moving on the centre pin C, and having its end D pressed upwards by the action of the spring G. The shoulder which contains the pin C is fixed in another piece F, which is inserted in a groove in the surface of the cylinder A; (Fig. 4;) so that it is capable of moving in and out, in a direction parallel to the axis of that cylinder. As that cylinder proceeds, it meets a pin in the table; which, (letter P, Fig. 9,) acting on the inclined plane at the other end of the lever, throws the whole inwards, in the position represented in Fig. 10; in which case the extremity D shoots inwards, and applies itself against the side of the cylinder.

[Illustration: _Fig. 9._ _Fig. 10._]

“In Fig. 11 is a representation of part of the table; the dotted square represents a sheet of paper, and the four small shaded squares denote holes in the board, with pins standing beside them. When the lever DE (Fig. 10) shoots forward, it is situated in one of these holes, and advances under the edge of the paper, which consequently it presses and retains against the cylinder with its extremity D. Nothing more remains to be said respecting the taking up, but that the cylinder is provided with two pair of these clasps or levers, which are so fixed as to correspond with the four holes represented in Fig. 11. It will be easy to understand how the paper is deposited in the compartment No. 3. (Fig. 4.) A pin P, (Fig. 10,) rising out of the platform or table, acts against a pin E, projecting sideways out of the lever, and must of course draw the slider and its lever to the original position; the paper consequently will be let go, and its disengagement is rendered certain by an apparatus fixed in the compartment numbered 3, (Fig. 4,) of exactly the same kind as that upon the cylinder, and which by the action of a pin duly placed in the surface of the cylinder A, takes the paper from the cylinder in precisely the same manner as that cylinder originally took it up in the compartment numbered 1. (Fig. 4.)

[Illustration: _Fig. 11._]

“Figs. 5, 6, and 7, represent a simpler apparatus for accomplishing the same purpose. If A_a_ B_b_ (Fig. 7) be supposed to represent a thick plate of metal of a circular form, with two pins A and B proceeding sideways or perpendicularly out of its plane, and diametrically opposite to each other, and G another pin proceeding in the direction of that plane, then it is obvious that any force applied to the pin A, so as to press it into the position _a_, (by turning the plate on its axis or centre X,) will at the same time cause the pin G to acquire the position _g_; and, on the other hand, when B is at _b_, or the dotted representation of the side-pin, if any pressure be applied to restore its original position at B, the pin _g_ will return back to G. Now the figures 5 and 6 exhibit an apparatus of this kind, applied to the cylinder A; and that cylinder, by rolling over the pins P and _p_, properly fixed in the table to re-act upon the apparatus, will cause its prominent part G, either to apply to the cylinder and clasp the paper, or to rise up and let it go. The compartment numbered 3 (Fig. 4) must of course have an apparatus of the same kind, to be acted upon by pins from A, in order that it may take the paper from that cylinder.

[Illustration: _Fig. 5._ _Fig. 6._ _Fig. 7._]

“There is one other circumstance belonging to this machine which remains to be explained. When the carriage E (Fig. 4) goes out in the direction of the numbers 1 2 3 4, both rollers, A and B, press the form of letter in their passage; but in their return back again the roller A, having no paper upon it, would itself become soiled, by taking a faint impression from the letter, if it were not prevented from touching it: the manner of effecting this may be understood from Fig. 12. The apparatus there represented is fixed upon the outside of the carriage E, near the lower corner, in the vicinity of the roller A; the whole of this projects sideways beyond the ledge of the table, except the small truck or wheel B. The irregularly triangular piece, which is shaded by the stroke of the pen, carries this wheel, and also a catch movable on the axis or pin E. The whole piece is movable on the pin A, which connects it to the carriage. C D, or the part which is shaded by dotting, is a detent which serves to hold the piece down in a certain position. It may be observed, that both the detent and the triangular piece are furnished each with a claw, which holds in one direction, but trips or yields in the other, like the jacks of a harpsicord, or resembling certain pieces used in clock and watch making, as is clearly represented in the drawing. These claws over-hang the side of the table, and their effect is as follows. There is a pin C (Fig. 4) between the compartments of the table numbered 2 and 3, but which is marked F in Fig. 12, where G H represents the table. In the outward run of the carriage these claws strike that pin, but with no other effect than that they yield for an instant, and as instantly resume their original position by the action of their respective slender back-springs. When the carriage returns, the claw of the detent indeed strikes the pin, but with as little effect as before, because its derangement is instantly removed by the action of the back-spring of the detent itself; but, when the claw of the triangular piece takes the pin, the whole piece is made to revolve on its axis or pin A, the wheel B is forced down, so as to lift that end of the carriage, and the detent, catching on the piece at C, prevents the former position from being recovered. The consequence of this is, that the carriage runs upon the truck B, (and its correspondent truck on the opposite side,) instead of the cylinder A, which is too much raised to take the letter, and soil itself; but, as soon as the end of the carriage has passed clear of the letter, another pin R (Fig. 4) takes the claw of the detent, and draws it off the triangular piece; at which instant the cylinder A subsides to its usual place, and performs its functions as before. This last pin R does not affect the claw of the triangular piece, because it is placed too low; and the claw of the detent is made the longest, on purpose that it may strike this pin.

[Illustration: _Fig. 12._]

“Fig. 8 represents an instrument for printing floor-cloths, paper-hangings, and the like, with stiff paint and a brush.”

“Lastly, I must take notice, that in these and every other of my machines, as well as in every machine whatever, the power may be wind, water, steam, animal strength, or any other natural change capable of producing motion; and that the mechanism by which such powers may be applied to produce a regular unceasing, or an intermitting, motion, as circumstances may require, may be used with these machines, though I have held it totally unnecessary either to specify or annex those methods. The materials, the adjustments, the fittings, and that degree of accuracy necessary to the perfection of every machine, have likewise made no part of my specification, because every workman must know that no mechanism can be completed without a due attention to these well-known particulars. In witness whereof, &c.”--_Repertory of Arts, &c. vol._ v. 1796.

_“Observations on the Art of Printing Books and Piece Goods by the Action of Cylinders._”----Experto credite.

“We may conceive three ways of delineating figures, or writing. The first and most ancient consists in making the traces successively by a brush, a pen, or other instrument. This is design, painting, or writing. In the latter methods, either the whole or the greater part of the figures are made by the action or pressure of an original pattern against the material intended to be written or painted upon. It is the art of printing. The colouring is either deposited from the face of prominent parts of the original form, which is usually called a block or type; or else it is pressed from cavities cut in the face of the original, which in this case is called an engraved plate. Most books are printed from original patterns, in relief; and most of the imitations of paintings are performed by means of engravings. These arts are most frequently distinguished by the names of letter-press and copper-plate printing.

“It can scarcely be matter of new information to those who are but moderately acquainted with the state of the Arts, to be told that letter-press or book-printing is performed by an assemblage of single metallic letters, called types, made of lead hardened by an addition of antimony in the metallic state; that these letters are composed in the form of book pages, and wedged together in iron frames called chases; that the ink is a composition of linseed oil and lamp black, of so singular a nature, that it will adhere to a ball covered with a pelt or sheep’s skin soaked in water, and kneaded to extreme softness under the feet, but quits this skin with great readiness to apply to the face of the letter when dabbed with the ball; and still more, that it almost totally quits the letter to adhere to paper rendered semitransparent by soaking in water; or lastly, that the paper is applied and pressed against the form of composed letter by means of a flat piece of wood urged downwards by a screw. These and numerous early discovered principles of this most useful art are generally known, and require no more than mere recapitulation in this place.

“The genius of the Chinese language not permitting that people to analyse its sounds into an alphabet, as has been done by most other nations, has induced them to retain those signs of things, and of their correspondent words, which probably constituted the first picture or hieroglyphic writings of every rude society. Changed and complicated as these may have become by the rapidity of transcription, the corruption of ignorance, or whatever other causes may have operated through a long succession of ages, they still for the most part use words that properly denote things, and not sounds. Such words cannot, therefore, be subdivided; and it has accordingly been found most convenient, by these first possessors of the art, to print from entire blocks, as was also done by the first printers in Europe. But our artists soon discovered that a few of the simplest characters, namely, the letters of the alphabet, would be in many respects more useful, as the elements for composing blocks for printers, than a number of blocks originally cut for every page of every individual book.

“Book-printing, therefore, though in fact of the same nature as block-printing, has been carried into effect by very different machinery from that made use of in the arts which still retain the latter method. In book-printing, the heavy metallic form lies on a kind of table, and the colour and the paper are successively applied to its face: but in block-printing, the block is carried and applied to the colour, and afterwards to the work intended to be printed. Thus, for example, in the printing of paper-hangings, the colour is spread with a brush upon a woollen cloth stretched over a surface of parchment or skin evenly supported by a half fluid mass of water and mashed paper. To this the block is carefully applied by a slight perpendicular stroke or two; after which it is applied to the dry paper on a table, and pressed against it either by one or more blows with a mallet, or by the regular action of a lever. The mechanical part of callico-printing is effected nearly in the same manner; but with smaller blocks, because of the greater difficulty of making the successive fittings on so flexible a material. And in both these arts, as well as in book-printing, in red and black, the variety of colours are produced by repeated applications of forms or blocks, of which the prominent parts are made to fit each other according to the nature of the design.

“In the art of printing from copper-plates, a colour somewhat more fluid than for book-printing is made use of. It is pressed into the cavities of the plate by smearing it over the surface; and by subsequent careful wiping the redundant colour is cleared away. In this state, if soaked paper, for which purpose the most spongy texture is the best, be strongly pressed against the plate, by passing both together between two cylinders of metal or hard wood, properly defended by woollen cloth, the greatest part of the colour adheres to the paper, and forms what is called a print.

“In all these processes, it is easily seen, that in the successive applications of colour, the accurate filling of the form or original with the material intended to receive the impression, and in various other parts of the manipulation, there is much room for the display of skill, or for injury from the want of it. It may moreover be collected, that the motions attendant on the various steps of manufacture, are in many instances difficult to be performed with rapidity and ease, until by long continued habit the workman himself is converted as it were into a machine. A very slight degree of attention to this subject must also shew that, if the originals were of a cylindric form, with a contrivance for regularly applying the colour and performing the subsequent operations, it would be easy to print books and piece goods with a degree of rapidity and uniformity, of which the usual method of successive applications seems scarcely capable without uncommon care and skill. This obvious conclusion has no doubt led to numerous experiments; none of which, so far as I can gather, whatever may have been their particular utility, have given much promise to supersede the ordinary methods. But as the increased demand for the manufacture of printed goods has rendered such an improvement an interesting object to manufacturers, as well as to those indefatigable artists who have directed their efforts towards improvements; and as the latter generally take up a new object under a strong persuasion that it has not before been pursued by others, it will certainly be of advantage to these deserving classes of men, to relate a few of the difficulties of this new art.

“The difficulties attendant on any improvement in the arts may be considered either as moral or physical. Under the moral, I would class every thing that relates to the prejudices of men in favour of the old methods, and their fears of risk, together with the œconomical and commercial inconveniencies attending the new processes. The physical difficulties are such as attend the actual performance of any project after the same has been carefully arranged in the mind of the inventor. It happens unfortunately here also that the inventor is seldom aware of the moral impediments; but almost always concludes, that if he can succeed in accomplishing the purpose that he has in view, his cares and labour will then be at an end; and that the manufacturer, in particular, instead of pointing out new impediments discernible only from long continued experience, will more readily embrace and approve of the new processes, in consequence of his superior knowledge of their intrinsic value.

“Every good invention appears simple in the prospect, but it scarcely ever happens in the execution that the most direct road is taken; and in every case there will infallibly be many things unknown or unforeseen, which practice only can point out as necessary to be done for the complete accomplishment of the object in view. Hence, and likewise because few men possessed of independent fortune are likely to engage or persevere in a labour of this kind, it almost invariably happens that the expences exceed the ability of the inventor himself. For these and other reasons, new undertakings are generally brought forward by the inventor, a man strongly prejudiced in favour of his leading pursuit, together with a moneyed friend, who hopes speedily to increase his capital from the abilities of the other. It is not necessary in this place to describe the usual consequences of a partnership, where the minds, the views, and the circumstances of both individuals are so very different, and which may be modified still more essentially if either of the parties be deficient in the common principles required to bind men to each other. It is certainly of the highest importance to both, that the circumstances of such connections should be very maturely weighed before they are entered into.

“The commercial difficulties or facilities attending any invention, are also of great consequence. Every inventor ought to enquire not only what has been done before, but likewise into the present state of the manufacture he means to improve. In this way it is ascertained how small a part the mere press-work constitutes in the price of a book. He will find that twelve yards of paper-hangings are printed for one penny, in a single colour, by hand, which afterwards, by the accumulation of price, in paper, colour, duty, and ordinary profit, are sold for three shillings; none of which the inventor can pretend to diminish; and if he could annihilate the whole labour, his advantage would therefore be less than three per cent. without reckoning the cost and operation of his machinery. In the callico-printing, with a more expensive material, dyeing and field-processes, duty and profits of manufacture and vender, the price of laying the block will turn out to be an object still less considerable. Again: it will be seen that small flat blocks cost but little money in comparison with cylinders of sufficient diameter to retain their figure, and long enough to apply to the whole breadth of the cloth.

“Under these and other similar points of view, the inventor, who may consider the subject in a superficial manner, would be ready to abandon his undertaking. But this again ought not to be rashly done. It is true, that where the great force of capital is employed on objects not comprehended within his project, the saving, however large in its absolute amount, or desirable to a manufacturer, will scarcely come within the reach of the inventor by any bargain he can make short of an actual partnership. But it may be possible to separate the respective departments of a manufactory. A spinner is not necessarily a weaver; nor a printer a linen-draper or a dealer in paper-hangings. The several departments of manufacture and commerce are, generally speaking, in the hands of acute men, who seldom reason ill with regard to the advancement of their peculiar interests; and these departments are continually fluctuating in their arrangement, as convenience, profit, or the accumulation of capital may lead. Experiments are for ever on foot, from day-work to piece-work, and from piece-work to the employ of master-workmen with others under them, all supported by the capital of the large manufacturer, who himself in many instances is the mere instrument maintained by the advances or acceptances of the warehouseman, the factor, or the merchant. An inventor, who has not capital, may seek for employ on the goods or the capital of others; and if he has skill to maintain his ground against the numerous enterprises which the activity of opposite interests will raise against him, he will find that the old order of things will readily alter, as soon as an evident interest in favour of the new is shewn by actual and continued proofs in the market.

“Most of the physical difficulties attendant on any new process are such as experience only can shew. Thus, in the forging of iron by the pressure of rollers instead of hammers, a scheme upon which many thousands of pounds have been expended in this country, it was apprehended that the more impure parts, which are also the most fluid, might be pressed out by the action of cylinders, with equal or perhaps more advantage than by that of hammers; at the same time that the determinate figure of bars of any required size might be given without skill in the operator. Experience nevertheless has shewn, that the more fluid part is driven out much more effectually by the sudden action of a blow, than by the slower compression of a cylinder, which allows time for much of the fluid matter to extend itself within the mass. Various similar effects present themselves when cylinders for printing are substituted instead of planes. Instead of the action of dabbing, the colour is usually applied by simple and gradual contact, to much less effect; and the impression, though not essentially different from that of the block, is performed by a gradual action, which affords time for the cloth or paper to fold itself in a minute degree into the cavities of the sculpture. Hence it is found that the length of paper or cloth printed from a cylinder by a definite number of revolutions, will be greater or less than another piece manufactured precisely in the same way, but with a less or greater degree of pressure. In a block this defect is much less, not only from the considerable hold it takes upon the surface of the material, but also because the error is rectified at every successive application. One of the chief difficulties of cylinder printing consists, therefore, in the difficulty of laying one colour after another; and this would continue to be so even if the materials were not susceptible of change, the contrary to which is the fact. There are two projects for obviating this. The one consists in confining the whole piece to a long table, or to the circumference of a large cylinder; and causing the printing cylinder to move, not by the successive apposition of its carved surface, but of a bearing face regulated by a toothed wheel. The other method consists in the use of a frame to confine two or more cylinders, each provided with its own toothed wheel, and revolving against a large clothed cylinder provided with a suitable wheel to drive the others. The piece is caused to pass between the large cylinder and the others, in order to receive the impression. With regard to the first of these methods, it does not appear easy to confine paper, and still less cloth, in such a manner that its parts may continue without shift or wrinkle during the action of a cylinder, which not being allowed to roll without the check of a wheel, must draw the surface either the one way or the other. The difficulty of confinement will be very much increased by the indispensable requisite that the paper should be afterwards hung up to dry, and the callico be carried to the dye-house and the bleach-field, between the successive impressions, by which means the dimensions of both will be greatly altered. In the second method, it is observable that no colours can be printed but such as fall clear of each other. In this way, moreover, the gathering action of the cylinders may prove very mischievous. For, if we suppose the paper or cloth to pass between the great cylinder and the first printing roller by an action of the latter which tends to make it slip forward on the face of the great cylinder, and that when it arrives at the second printing roller it there experiences an action of a contrary nature, the consequence will be, that the material will become slack between the two rollers, and the fittings will be false. Not to dwell on that experience which brings forward this obstacle among others, its great probability may be deduced from the allowable supposition, that the circumference of the first printing cylinder should be one thousandth part of an inch too large, and that of the second the same quantity too small. For, in this case, the material will be shifted one-twentieth of an inch in fifty turns by the first cylinder, and the same quantity in the contrary direction by the second; a quantity upon the whole quite sufficient to destroy the effect of the colours in the progress of one single piece. Such minute differences can hardly be avoided in the first instance; in addition to which, we may place the varying dimensions of the printing cylinder, if not made of metal; and of the great clothed cylinder, which in effect has a larger or smaller diameter in proportion to the pressure which operates to render its elastic covering either thicker or thinner. The only method of diminishing these evils seems to be, that all the printing cylinders should, by dimension or pressure, or both, be made to draw the same way, the outer cylinder most, and the others gradually less and less, so that the material should have a tendency to apply itself more tightly during its passage through the apparatus.

“The application of the colour to the surface of a cylinder block, is attended with some difficulty. An ingenious mechanic may contrive various means to produce the action of dabbing, if required. When a stuffed cylinder covered with cloth is made to revolve in the colour, and thence, after passing a scraper, to apply itself to the block cylinder, it is found to be no inconsiderable difficulty that its dimensions change, and its covering becomes wrinkled by the action of the scraper as well as that of the block. A better method, therefore, consists in a revolving web of woollen cloth, like a jack towel, stretched over three horizontal cylinders parallel to each other, two of which support the elastic surface of the web, which in its revolution accompanies the block cylinder; and the other serves to guide the same web to the colour, or a cylinder revolving in it. This method would be very easy and pleasant in its operation, if it were not for a property common to all straps which revolve on the surface of two or more wheels. These are observed always to seek the highest place; so that if a cutler’s wheel were made with a groove to carry a strap, instead of a round edge, the strap would infallibly mount the ledge, instead of remaining in the groove. On this principle, the web would very speedily shift itself to one end of the cylinders, if it were not confined sideways, or the lower roller were not made considerably thickest in the middle, and gradually tapering towards its extremities. This last simple expedient is not without its difficulties; but, as I have not actually tried it, I shall defer entering into any discussion on that head.

“The running of the paper or piece-goods towards one end of the leading cylinder is also one of the greatest difficulties attending this method of printing. It is not perfectly removed by tapering the leading cylinders.

“The nature of the trade of paper-staining in this country, which requires a large sum to be immediately vested in the payment of the excise duty, and consequently prevents any considerable stock from being manufactured until orders are actually received, and the varying fashions in printed callicoes, which render the expence of cutting the block by for the heaviest part of the disbursement for printing, are probably the chief reasons why manufacturers in this country have been less solicitous for the construction of machines calculated to afford profit only in the case of very numerous impressions. The physical difficulties of this art have likewise conspired, in no small degree, to prevent its having been applied in the large way to any but a few simple designs of the sort called running patterns in one colour.”--_Nicholson’s Journal_, vol. i. 1797.

The following is the statement respecting König’s machine, which was the first that was made; it appeared in the Literary Gazette, with an engraving; and as that Gazette was at the time printed by Mr. Benjamin Bensley, at a machine, as well as from other circumstances, I am led to believe that the information contained in it was supplied by Mr. Bensley himself, and that, as far as it goes, it may be relied upon.

“The cylindrical mode of printing, which, in contradistinction to the old process by the press, is called _Machine Printing_, was invented by the late Mr. Nicholson, well known in the scientific and literary world, who took out a patent in the year 1790, though it does not appear that his plans and experiments ended in any actually practical result. Whether M. König, who at a later period more successfully attempted to print by machinery, was indebted to Mr. Nicholson for his elementary principles, or whether almost the same ideas spontaneously occurred to each individual, is a question that can only be satisfactorily solved by the former. Thus much is certain, that M. König’s labours were the first which produced any fruit:--and surely more is due to him who, after years of persevering toil, succeeds in the application of hitherto unapplied principles, than to one of whom we can only say that he was simply the first to suggest ideas--since no evidence is offered of their ever having been acted upon.

“M. König, by birth a Saxon, and by occupation a printer, many years ago conceived it possible to print by Steam, though he then expected no more than to be able to give accelerated speed to the common press, to which end his first efforts were bent. As from the nature of such an undertaking, considering the state of scientific pursuits in his native land, he could calculate on little success unaided by others, and failing in his application for encouragement and support at the hands of the most eminent printers in several of the continental capitals, he turned his eyes towards England. Arriving in London about 1804, he submitted his scheme to several printers of repute, who, not being disposed to incur the risk of property which a series of experiments was sure to entail, and perhaps placing little confidence in a successful issue, received his overtures very coolly: and it is probable his applications in this country would have shared the fate of similar attempts abroad, had he not finally been introduced to Mr. Bensley senior, who, attracted by M. K.’s plans, speedily entered into an arrangement with him. After a short course of experiments on the fabrication of a press which should have accelerated motion, and at the same time render the work of the man who _inks_ the type unnecessary, the above gentlemen were joined by Mr. G. Woodfall and Mr. R. Taylor, the former of whom however soon retired; the remaining three, in nowise discouraged by the tediousness and expense which all who are conversant with the progress of any invention in machinery well know to be unavoidable, persevered amidst unforeseen perplexities, which were doubtless not diminished by the parties’ deficiency in practical mechanical knowledge. It was at length discovered that the intended improvement of the common press could not be brought to bear--and that much labour and prodigious expence would be thrown away, unless more radical alterations were invented. Cylindrical printing was now thought of--and after some two or three years of renewed exertion, a small machine was brought forth, the characteristic of which was, that instead of the printing being produced by a flat impression (similar to the press) the sheet passed between a large roller and the types still flat; and in lieu of the old fashioned balls, used by hand to beat over the types and so to communicate the ink to their surface, skins were strained round smaller rollers, on which it was contrived to spread the ink, and under which the Form, _i. e._ the frame in which the types are fixed, passed in its way to the printing cylinder. Considerable promise of success attended this production; and after continued experiments, it was deemed practicable to extend the general principles to a more powerful machine. To print a newspaper was considered highly desirable--and on exhibiting to Mr. Walters, proprietor of the Times Newspaper, the Machine already erected, and shewing what further improvements were contemplated, an agreement was entered into with that gentleman for the erection of two large machines for printing his Journal. So secret had been the operations of the patentees, that the first public intimation of their invention was given to the reader of _The Times_ on Monday the 28th of November, 1814, who was told that he then held in his hand one of many thousand impressions thrown off by steam. At this time but few persons knew of any attempt going on for the attainment of the above object; whilst among those connected with printing, it had often been talked of, but treated as chimerical.

“The machines at the Times Office, cumbrous and complicated as subsequent improvements have made them appear, are yet in many respects admirably adapted to the purpose for which they were erected, and it is believed will outlast many contrivances for printing which have been since brought out.

“The next advance in improvement was the manufacture of a machine for Messrs. Bensley, distinguished from those before mentioned by the mode of _perfecting_ (or printing on both sides)--so that the sheet of white paper is placed in the feeder, and delivered from the machine printed on both sides! In addition to the essential difference between this machine and those previously made, it came forth with many obvious improvements, though still unquestionably complex:--and for the first attempt at effecting register (causing the pages to fall precisely on the back of one another) a greater degree of success than might have been expected was attained, subsequent experience shewing the many difficulties to be surmounted in the accomplishment of this object. Deficiencies were now detected in the _inking_: the strained skins were found uneven in their surface; and attempts were made to clothe the rollers with an elastic preparation of glue, treacle, &c. which has at length attained perfection.

“By this time the invention had attracted the attention of various individuals, who thought the manufacture of printing machines an easier task than they afterwards found it to be; and far the greater number of attempts, we believe, failed almost as soon as undertaken. A machine, however, similar in its capacities to that last mentioned, but much more simple in its construction, has been brought out--under the direction of some eminent engineers. It was not long before these gentlemen were requested to apply their _inking_ apparatus to Messrs. Bensley’s machine; and at one stroke, as it were, _forty wheels_ were removed--so great was the simplification: and at the same time the defects of the former system, of communicating the ink to the types, were most effectually remedied. Massive and complicated as it was, yet as an immense expense had been incurred in its erection, Messrs. Bensley went on using their machine until the destruction of their establishment by fire in 1819. And even after the rebuilding of the premises, the machinery, which had been only partially damaged, was reinstated, and worked for some time:--it has now, however, given place to two large and admirable machines built on the improved plan, which when inspected by a judicious eye can only create wonder at the heretofore circuitous manner adopted to attain ends so apparently within easy reach. The writer has no hesitation in stating that the original machine contained upwards of _one hundred_ wheels; whereas the new machine, with about _ten wheels_, accomplishes, in point of _quantity_, exactly the same object, and with a marked advantage in regard to the _quality_ of the printing. Another important point respecting the new machine is, that it occupies scarcely half the space of the original one.

“The printing machine in its present state appears susceptible of little improvement. It produces excellent work, and its movements are attended with certainty and despatch--the double, or perfecting, machine throwing off 800 to 1000 sheets, printed _on both sides_, within the hour,--and the single machine delivering 1500 or 1600 done _on one side_: which, in cases where one form of the types (as in newspapers) is ready to be worked off while the last side is preparing, is attended with the greatest advantage, since the rate of delivery thereby becomes doubled. The first is that by which our Gazette is printed, and the last described is that with which Mr. B. Bensley is now (and has for a considerable time been) printing the _Morning Chronicle_ newspaper.

“Other leading daily newspapers are also wrought off by steam; as well as several publications of extensive circulation. Like almost every ingenious invention, this has had no small portion of prejudice to encounter, and perhaps has been longer in forcing its way than many other schemes of real utility. The various advantages, however, which it holds forth have attracted the attention of several proprietors of the more extensive printing concerns, who have introduced it with benefit to the public--to whom, by means of this great reduction of labour, the productions of the press may be furnished at a reduced rate of charge.”--_Literary Gazette, October 26, 1822._

It may, perhaps, be allowable to make a few observations on this statement, more particularly as Mr. Nicholson is seldom spoken of in connexion with printing machines, and when he is, it is in such a manner as to convey the impression that he was a visionary man, who had some imaginary scheme in his head which he was incompetent to carry into effect. To rebut this opinion I have given the specification of his patent, with his own observations on his invention, which certainly do not discover any symptoms of a weak or a speculative man. I knew Mr. Nicholson personally, and I have no doubt that, had he lived, he would have carried his invention into effect; but he had a number of other pursuits which occupied his time. He published a work on navigation, which I have seen quoted as authority for its opinions; he was the author of a Dictionary of Chemistry, in two quarto volumes; he edited and published monthly Nicholson’s Journal of Science, &c. which was in high repute; he wrote the Prospectus for the Royal Institution, on its establishment in 1799; and he likewise kept a large school in Soho Square, the leading feature of which was, a scientific education. I was, for ten years, in the habit of hearing in an undisguised manner the opinions of the most eminent scientific men in England,--as I held the office of Assistant Secretary to the Board of Managers of the Royal Institution, (the Secretary being an honorary officer,) also that of Secretary to the Patrons of the Library, and Secretary to the Committee of Chemistry, as well as Superintendant of their Printing Office,--and in all that time I never heard his name mentioned but with respect among these gentlemen, nor did I once hear him spoken of as a visionary who would project schemes that he was unable to execute. In addition to his multifarious pursuits, he was agent to the late Lord Camelford, whose sudden death left Mr. Nicholson involved in difficulties, from which he could never extricate himself.

Could this man, then, who planned the printing machine, and the manner of printing calico, &c. in an improved and expeditious manner, who moreover published the details of his process, with drawings of the requisite machines, be deemed, with justice, nothing more than “one of whom we can only say that he was simply the first to suggest ideas,” this being all the merit that is allowed him by the Literary Gazette? Now it appears to me that the term “suggesting ideas” refers with rather more truth to Mr. König, who, coming to England with the idea of applying steam as the moving power to presses, and being supported by English capital, spent some years in unavailing efforts to reduce his ideas to practice, and when he could not succeed, gave up the attempt as one completely foiled, and turning round upon Mr. Nicholson’s plan, produced a cylindrical printing machine.

Dr. Olinthus Gregory, in a lecture delivered by him before the Mechanics Institution at Deptford, in 1826, among other topics illustrative of the patronage afforded to the arts and sciences by the intelligence and enterprise of this country, directed the attention of his audience to “the case of Mr. König, a truly ingenious foreigner, and his invention of an improved printing press, in which, by duly blending the alternating and rotatory principles of motion, the apparatus is capable of working off 1100 sheets an hour, with the superintendance of two boys. Tracing the history of his invention, of his difficulties, and of his want of encouragement, through the greater part of the continent of Europe, Mr. König says, ‘I need hardly add, that scarcely ever was an invention brought to maturity under such circumstances. The well known fact, that almost every invention seeks, as it were, refuge in England, and is there brought to perfection, seems to indicate that the Continent has yet to learn from her the best manner of encouraging the mechanical arts. I had my full share in the ordinary disappointments of continental projectors; and, after having spent in Germany and Russia upwards of two years in fruitless applications, I proceeded to England.’

“What could not be accomplished by the encouragement of princes on the Continent,” proceeds Dr. Gregory, “was effected by the aid of private individuals in London. A few enterprising printers,--and their names cannot be mentioned but with honour on such an occasion; Mr. Thomas Bensley, Mr. George Woodfall, and Mr. Richard Taylor,--liberally assisted this ingenious foreigner in bringing his invention to maturity. The machine was set to work in April 1811, and 3000 copies of sheet H of the “New Annual Register for 1810,” was printed by means of it. This was, doubtless, the first part of a book ever printed solely by a machine. Messrs. Bacon and Donkin were, it is true, simultaneously at work upon analogous contrivances, and, since then, other ingenious artists, especially Applegath and Cowper, have contributed greatly to the simplification of this class of machinery.”

In 1818, Messrs. Donkin and Bacon obtained a patent for a most ingenious but complex machine, which claims the merit of having been the first to print with a circular movement of the types. It is said that the invention of this machine was simultaneous with that of König. A great point was gained in it, for the composition inking rollers were first introduced in this machine, Mr. König’s having rollers covered with leather, which were not found to answer the purpose so well.

In this machine the patent specified the fastening of the pages of type to the surface of a prismatic cylinder having any number of planes from four to eight; to these types the ink was immediately supplied by a large elastic roller placed over the type cylinder, and made to rise and fall in accordance with the irregular motion of the surfaces of the latter; two other and smaller rollers conveying the ink from a receptacle to the larger roller. The sheet of paper to be printed was applied to another revolving prism, composed of segments of cylinders exactly adapted to meet the irregularities of the type roller. To insure the niceties and regularities of motion and of contact required in printing, toothed wheels, corresponding in shape to the prisms, were placed upon the axis; and however strange, at first sight, may appear to non-mechanical persons the working together of metal wheels of such angular shapes, yet by providing for a free vertical motion of the gudgeons of each roller, the operation of the whole machine was steady and uniform. The annexed diagram, representing a section of the principal parts, will enable the reader to form a more correct idea of this curious machine.

[Illustration: Cross-section of the Bacon machine]

A, the quadrangular prismatic roller, with its surfaces of stereotype plates.

B, the roller for distributing the ink, which it receives from the two smaller rollers _a_ _e_, in contact with the box _i_.

C, the pressing cylinder, covered with cloth or felt.

D E, the track of the paper in the direction of the arrows.

The Norwich Mercury, a paper published by Mr. Bacon, contains a prospectus of his newly invented machine, to which is added a notice respecting its merit as compared with that of Mr. König, erected at the Times printing office, from which statement the following is an extract:--

“In Messrs. Bacon and Donkin’s machine, there is no reciprocating motion. The types are placed on a prism of as many sides as the nature of the form requires. This prism occupies the centre of an upright frame, like the roller in a copperplate press; below this is a kind of compound-faced roller, suited to the form of the prism; through between these the sheets to be printed (attached to the face of a piece of cloth) are passed in succession, and in the meantime the revolution in the type prism brings its different portions in succession under a system of inking rollers placed over it, by which it receives successive charges of ink, to be delivered to the sheets as they pass in succession between the lower rollers.”

Mr. Hansard, in his “Typographia,” says, that “one machine would not answer for all kinds of work.” And “the only one of these machines that was, I believe, ever made, rests in peace as not being found useful.”

On the erection of the machines for printing the Times newspaper, Mr. Bensley being apprehensive that there would be impediments thrown in the way of their general introduction by the workmen, who had already shown symptoms of opposition, was desirous that I should see them at work, that he might have my opinion on the subject. I accordingly went with Mr. Joseph Bensley, his eldest son, to look at them, and view their manner of working, and on my return, Mr. Bensley was anxious to see me, that he might have my report. I told him that truly they surpassed any thing I had imagined, and did the work so well, and so expeditiously, that I did not believe any opposition on the part of the workmen could prevent their coming into use. This opinion was gratifying to him: but I also told him that I foresaw another thing that might probably take place, which would have an equally injurious effect with respect to him. With considerable anxiety he asked to what I alluded; I told him that I thought some man of abilities would step in and simplify them, for they appeared to me complex in their construction. He treated this suggestion with indifference, as a thing that could never happen, and expressed himself perfectly satisfied that no person would ever make the attempt. My prognostication, however, was fulfilled; for immediately after, Mr. Edward Cowper, of the firm of Applegath and Cowper, printers, proved not only its possibility, but its practicability, by sweeping away at once wheels, &c. which had cost, as I was credibly informed at the time, at least 1500_l._ in the course of their experiments; and thus made the machine more simple, and less liable to be out of order, while he at the same time improved it greatly in its facility of working, and in the quality of the work it produced. Mr. Cowper took out a patent for his improvement; and, as I was told, in consideration of the expense that Mr. Bensley had been at in the pursuit, which amounted to at least 16,000_l._, offered him, as an act of justice, a share of the patent, which was accepted. The machine erected for “The Times” cost the proprietor of that newspaper 3,000_l._

Messrs. Applegath and Cowper then commenced manufacturing these machines, which met with general approval; they also much improved the inking apparatus. After the dissolution of their partnership, Mr. Cowper established a manufactory for them at Manchester, in conjunction with his brother, he himself continuing to reside in London.

[Illustration: COWPER’S MACHINE FOR PRINTING BOOKS.]

In the year 1824 a new mode of machine printing was introduced, that of printing with two colours simultaneously in the same impression. This arose out of the Commission appointed by Government to inquire into the best means of preventing the Forgery of Bank Notes. A pamphlet was published by Sir William Congreve, describing the process as inimitable, except by their machine, for which they had a patent, so that no one else could possibly produce a facsimile. A design was made, generally composed of a great number of lines in a flourishing style, and, when engraved on two pieces of metal, these lines were printed with two colours, one part sinking below the other after each impression, and, there being two sets of inking rollers, each part was inked at the same time, when the lower part rose again to a level with the other, so that one part of these complicated lines should be black, and the continuation of them should be blue or red, or any other colour that might be thought proper, and any device that might be included in the design should also be in two colours, such, for instance, as the King’s arms, and the register should be exact, so that each line should uniformly be perfectly continuous, notwithstanding the change of colour. Government adopted the plan for printing a new stamp on the backs of country bank notes, and also for the Excise Stamps for paper. So far, however, from being inimitable, I have no hesitation in saying, that there never was a plan suggested that was more easy of imitation, even with the common press, and by the customary workmen. The machines were made by Messrs. Donkin and Co.

A single machine, that is, a machine which prints one side of the paper only, may be estimated to produce upon the average one thousand impressions in an hour; and were I to attempt to describe the one by which the Times newspaper is now printed, I should state that it is the mechanism of four single machines combined in one frame, all being worked simultaneously by steam as the motive power: thus there are four places at which to feed it with paper, four printing cylinders, and four places at which the sheets are delivered when printed, so that the actual speed of each part of the machine is rather more than one thousand an hour. This ingenious and skilful combination is the production of Mr. Augustus Applegath.

I have seen it stated by the proprietor of a machine, that it would print at the rate of two thousand impressions in an hour: I have known another assert that his perfecting machine would print one thousand five hundred in the same time. This is a fallacy, which produces disappointment and dissatisfaction. I have had occasion in the course of business to satisfy myself as to their real capability, by attending and carefully observing them at work, and have thus ascertained that a single machine cannot be depended on for more than one thousand in the hour, nor a perfecting machine for more than seven hundred and fifty. I am well aware that both may be driven with greater speed for a short time, but in the case of newspapers and periodical publications, where punctuality is indispensably requisite, I would never calculate upon greater expedition.

With respect to the comparative merits of the cylindrical method of printing and those of the press, the manufacturers of machines as well as most master printers, not content with the real superiority of properties which the machine does certainly possess, attribute to it properties which it does not possess, and which are incompatible with it, namely, those of producing the finest work, and printing the finest impressions from highly finished engravings on wood at the rate of eight hundred or one thousand per hour; even an engraver on wood has fallen into this error, and has produced a work with numerous beautiful illustrations, in which the writer of the book has boldly defended this erroneous opinion, but the engraver himself has cautiously avoided the risk of, and shrunk from, the comparison, and has had the book printed at the press. The Penny Magazine has trumpeted the same fallacy; and yet the spirited Publisher has all his splendid works, with their beautiful illustrations, printed also at the press: thus tacitly acknowledging its superiority, and denying the opinions which he is the means of publishing to the world.

In producing the finest workmanship in printing, it is essentially requisite to use the best ink: this is ink made with strong varnish, which binds the colouring matter, and, when dry, prevents its smearing on being handled or setting-off in the process of binding; the colouring matters are selected with care from among those of the best quality; the whole is ground to a state of impalpability; the strength of the varnish causes the ink to require a great deal of distributing on the balls, which I prefer to rollers for the best work,--_See_ BALLS,--in order to diffuse it equally on their surface; the form should be well and carefully beat, so as to coat the face of the types, &c. completely and uniformly with ink, without any superfluity; the pressure should be slow and gradual, what is termed a soaking pull, not quick and abrupt, and when the bar of the press is brought home, the workman should rest there a short time, in order to transfer the ink completely from the types, &c. to the paper, and fix it firmly on its surface. These precautions and care are necessary to produce the finest work in printing; and in every instance, in whatever art or manufacture the article may be, good workmanship and high finish will be found to require more time for their production than in an inferior article.

From the rapidity with which impressions are produced by the cylindrical method of printing, it must be apparent that it is not capable of executing work of a superior kind, as the ink must be weak to enable the light rollers to distribute it as expeditiously as it is required; the ink too must be prepared with a soft varnish to enable it to do so, which deprives it of the valuable property of drying, as well as of binding the colouring matter so as not to smear; this weak ink also incurs the risk of allowing the oil in the varnish to separate from the colouring matter, and thus spread in the paper and discolour it. Another imperfection is, that there is not time to ink the face of the type, &c. properly, which is thus obliged to be done in an imperfect manner with an inferior ink; and in taking the impression, again for lack of time, there is not pressure sufficient to fix the ink firmly to the paper.

As overlays cannot be used in cylindrical printing, the engravers on wood, when producing a subject which is to be printed at a machine, hollow out on the surface of the block the parts that are to appear light, as well as round off the edges that are to be printed lightly, and engrave on those lowered parts, so that the surface is not a perfect plane; and this is to answer the purpose of overlays, thus in practice allowing that of which they deny the necessity and which they ridicule in theory--unequal pressure to produce the desired effect; but the object is not gained by this method, for, to obtain an impression from those lowered parts, thick woollen cloth, called a blanket, is used, which, owing to its elasticity, is pressed into the hollows as well as between the lines of the depths; so that an impression is produced, in which the lights are composed of crude lines, and the depths are muddy, and which show more than the engraved line, and thus the wood-cut does not possess that delicacy in the light parts, nor that firmness in the dark, which are produced by good workmen at the press, and which give to the whole a brilliant effect.

The hollowing of the block on its surface requires great care and judgment, not only in ascertaining the precise situation and bounds, but also the precise depth to which it ought to be lowered; for if a thick blanket be used, the light parts will be produced stronger and heavier than is required, and if a thin one be used, they will either not appear, or, if they do, will be rotten, or else chalky; and some small parts in the depths will always require to be of a full firm colour, which a thick blanket and weak inferior ink will never produce. _See_ ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD. FINE PRESSWORK.

The advantages that cylindrical printing possesses are of great importance in the art, and not less so with respect to the public. Its power of printing larger sheets of paper than was ever before contemplated, has enabled the proprietors of newspapers to enlarge them to a previously unparalleled extent. The rapidity with which impressions are multiplied is also an advantage of great consequence, as in the case of morning newspapers, instead of going to press on the evening preceding the publication, they can now wait until five o’clock in the morning, and even later, when if a despatch or an express arrives with any important news, it is in the hands of the public at the usual hour of publication; neither is this rapidity of less advantage to periodical publications, more particularly to those of which a large number is printed, for example, the Evangelical Magazine, and the Methodists Magazine, of each of which there were printed about 24,000 copies. When these were done at press, it was necessary to put the last sheets to press ten days before the publication, whereas now they can delay them till the third day, and yet be punctual in publishing at the regular time. They thus avail themselves of any later intelligence that may arrive, and give it publicity a month earlier than before the invention of cylindrical printing.

Another advantage in machine printing is, the regularity and uniformity of colour through any number of impressions, as it can be regulated with the greatest nicety to any shade; in this instance it is superior to the press for the production of common work, in the uniformity of colour, but only superior to common work in its rivalry with the press.

MACULE.

If the joints of the tympan, or the head, or the nut of the spindle, be loose, or any accident happen in pulling, so that the impression be somewhat doubled, and not clear, it is said to be maculed. Cards under the winter, to produce a spring, have often been the cause of maculing: the sides of the tympan or the ear of the frisket touching the cheeks will also produce the same effect. _See_ DOUBLE. SLURRING.

MAGAZINES. _See_ NEWSPAPER POSTAGE.

MAKE.

In casting off copy, they say it will _make_ so much; as, it will make a sheet, two sheets, &c.

MAKE A MEASURE. _See_ JUSTIFY A STICK.

MAKING READY.

This term implies the process of laying the form on the press--fixing it in its place--placing the tympan sheet on the tympan--placing the points to make register, when both sides of the paper are to be printed--making register--preparing the frisket--and producing an equal impression from all the pages, and from every part of each page.

When an engraving on wood is printed, it also denotes the overlaying it, so as to produce an impression, which shall possess all the effect that the subject may require.

In common work, where despatch is required, thick blankets are used in the tympans; and when the types are much worn they are also necessary, to bring up the rounded face of the letter. It is too common in good work to put an excess of blanket into the tympans, to lessen the pull for the purpose of easing the pressmen’s arms, and to enable them to be more expeditious: the consequence is, that the impression will show more than the surface of the types or engraving; and thus what is gained in ease and expedition, is more than counterbalanced by the imperfect and rough impression that is produced. _See_ FINE PRESSWORK, and ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD.

An old pressman, who was a good workman, gave me the following directions for making ready a form:--

“In making ready, I will only speak of a form of fine work; if a pressman can do that, he surely can make common work ready.

“Lay the form on the stone, centrically under the platen; quoin it all round; fold the tympan sheet according to the form laid on the press; lay it even on the form, and stretch it as much as it will bear; pull it, for the purpose of attaching it to the tympan; paste it all round to the tympan, at the same time keep stretching it; screw on the points; make them fall in the channel of the short cross; make good register with white paper, whether the form be whole or half sheet work.

“This is one of the good old customs, and the best that I know of; because the pressman is sure to have the points centrical; he perceives whether all the furniture be put in right or wrong, even to a single scale-board: in leaded matter, which should be line upon line, he ascertains whether the form be locked up evenly or not, and whether the leads be all put in right; also, whether the pages that begin chapters, or other divisions of the work, have the proper whites; he can likewise discover if any of the pages be made up too long, or too short: any of these errors, that may have occurred, must be amended in the white paper form, otherwise the reiteration will have the same faults, in order to make register. On fine work, I make ready the white paper form of a sheet in the same manner as I do a half sheet, on purpose to discover those errors, by which process I gain more time in making ready the reiteration than I lost in the white paper form.

“For fine work, use the finest cloth that can be procured, and not thick flannel blanket: if the form be light, one thin cloth blanket will be sufficient; and if it be very light, that is to say open leaded matter, sheets of paper are preferable to either flannel or cloth in the tympans. Be sure to have one sheet of stout paper, which will cover all the parchment, in the inside of the outer tympan. Pull a dry even sheet of paper; look carefully on the back of the impression; if it be not equally even, the light parts must be overlaid with tissue paper, or India paper; if some parts be very heavy, cut or tear out the heavy parts. The overlays should be pasted only slightly on the impression sheet, in case any of them should have to be taken off; paste the four corners of this sheet upon the thick sheet; let the overlays be uppermost, that you may see them; then pull another impression sheet, with the first in the tympans, and if the impression still be not even, overlay the first impression sheet again; and continue pulling impression sheets, and overlaying the first impression sheet, until you have an even and regular impression on all parts.

“As you go on with the form, if any of the overlays require to be taken off, do so; if bits are required to be taken out, or rubbed off, the tympan sheet, it must be done. In some works the outer tympan cannot be too dry, but the pressman must be the judge of this, according to the work he has to do.

“Having a good black ink well brayed on the surface of the ink block, he takes a small quantity on the balls, and distributes it well; he takes time to beat the form well and carefully, and then pulls a sheet of the right paper, dwells on the pull, or keeps down the bar a short time by means of a catch or hook, in order to make the paper take the ink clean off the types, and look a clear black upon the paper. The impression must not be too deep, as nothing must appear but the shape of the face of good types. If the impression be too deep, or too much ink on the form, more than the real shape will appear, and the work will not be fine; but if the work be fine, he goes on gently and regularly until the white paper be off. He then lays on the reiteration form; and having the overlays ready that he made before, he has very little trouble in making it ready: he makes such good register, that line falls upon line. After the reiteration is off, if he does not go on with the same work, or work of a similar size and imposition, he carefully puts by the tympan blankets, cloths, or tympan paper, and overlays, till they are again wanted for the same work. All other works must have their own overlays made purposely for them.

“After the first overlays are made for their respective works, there is not so much trouble in making ready the future sheets of the same work as they are put to press; indeed, if the pressman carefully preserves his overlays, tympan paper, or cloths, he seldom has occasion to do more than alter a few of the overlays, as the paper sometimes varies in thickness, which may want a few overlays on the tympan sheet. India paper is the best for this, as it is of a soft and pliable nature, and as it lies on the tympan sheet the pressman can easily perceive if one part of it has a deeper impression than another.

“It is to be observed, that fine work cannot be made upon bad paper, or with old worn types.

“Fine work must not be hurried, as some do when they are paid for it as piecework, and spoil it, in order to make a large bill. How a master stares at this, when the same men could not earn nearly so much on scale work. These are the very men who have despised the establishment, because they could earn more money by attending fewer hours, but not on scale work. How miserable and discontented I have seen them when on scale work, although at the same time they had as much work as they could do. This has been the cause of masters reducing the price of works not paid by the scale. A few shillings per week additional ought to satisfy a man for his extra abilities on fine work.”

MAKING REGISTER.

The act of making the pages and lines fall exactly on the back of each other at press, when any work is perfected. _See_ REGISTER.

MAKE UP.

After a compositor has been setting at random, and commences arranging his matter into pages, it is termed _making up_. In large pages and letter, in a work where good register is required, I would recommend the compositor to mark on a gauge accurately every line of the page, so that he may regulate his whites in such a manner that line may fall upon line without causing much trouble to the pressman, or to himself; for if it be much out, and the pressmen are on piecework, he will be called on to rectify the errors, and this is better avoided in the making up, as it is attended with but little trouble then, and his work will appear to more advantage in the first instance.

_To give the making-up._ When a compositor in a companionship has composed his copy to within the quantity of a page of the work, he gives the overplus of the copy, after having completed his own last page, to him who is composing the copy that follows his matter; and he ought to mark on it with a pencil where he has himself concluded, as well as the folio that should follow that of his own last page. This is called _giving the making-up_.

MALABARIC. _See_ TAMOULIC.

MALAY.

The Malay is the principal vernacular tongue used by the people who inhabit that vast region and chain of islands comprehended between ninety-three and one hundred and thirty-five degrees of East longitude, a space of about two thousand two hundred and twenty miles; and extending from fourteen degrees North to eleven degrees of South latitude, comprehending twenty-five degrees, about one thousand seven hundred and forty miles. This vast extent of country over which the language is spoken includes the peninsula of Malacca, the islands of Sumatra, Java, Borneo, Maccasser, Balee, Cumbava, Sallayer, Bootoon, Booro, Ceram, Pulo Pinang, the Moluccas, and innumerable others.

The Malays have not any proper national character, except that which has been introduced by the Mohammedan priests, who have from time to time settled in the peninsula of Malacca and the adjacent islands; therefore it resembles the Arabic Nishki alphabet, excepting some slight alteration to express a sound which the Arabians had no character to delineate. In conformity then with the principal of the Eastern nations, Arabians, Turks, Persians, &c. they read from the right hand to the left.

The acute accent (´) is always used to mark a very long sound of the vowel over which it is placed; but when inserted after a consonant, it shows that the syllable ends with it.

[Illustration: The Malay Alphabet]

_The Malay Alphabet._

+-------+-----------------------------------+--------------------+ | | Form. | | | +-----------------+-----------------+ | | | Finals. | Medials and | | | | | Initials. | | | +--------+--------+--------+--------+ | | Name. | IV. | III. | II. | I. | Power. | | | Con- | Uncon- | Con- | Uncon- | | | | nected.| nected.| nected.| nected.| | +-------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------------------+ | Aulif | ـا‎ | ا‎ | ـا‎ | ا‎ | A in _all_, _wall_.| | Bé | ـب‎ | ب‎ | ـبـ‎ | بـ‎ | B | | Pé | ـپ‎ | ﭖ‎ | ـﭙـ‎ | ﭘـ‎ | P | | Té | ـت‎ | ت‎ | ـتـ‎ | تـ‎ | T | | Jeem | ـج‎ | ج‎ | ـجـ‎ | جـ‎ | J in _jar_. | | Hhé | ـح‎ | ح‎ | ـحـ‎ | حـ‎ | Hh strong aspirate.| | Khé | ـخ‎ | خ‎ | ـخـ‎ | خـ‎ | Kh guttural. | | Dal | ـد‎ | د‎ | ـد‎ | د‎ | D | | Ré | ـر‎ | ر‎ | ـر‎ | ر‎ | R | | Zé | ـز‎ | ز‎ | ـز‎ | ز‎ | Z | | Sin | ـس‎ | س‎ | ـسـ‎ | سـ‎ | S | | Shin | ـش‎ | ش‎ | ـشـ‎ | شـ‎ | Sh | | Oain | ـع‎ | ع‎ | ـعـ‎ | عـ‎ | A very slender. | | Fé | ـف‎ | ف‎ | ـفـ‎ | فـ‎ | F | | Kiaf | ـک‎ | ک‎ | ـكـ‎ | كـ‎ | C or K softer | | | | | | | than ق‎. | | Kof | ـق‎ | ق‎ | ـقـ‎ | قـ‎ | K | | Gaf | ـڭ‎ | ڭ‎ | ـڭـ‎ | ڭـ‎ | G | | Laum | ـل‎ | ل‎ | ـلـ‎ | لـ‎ | L | | Mim | ـم‎ | م‎ | ـمـ‎ | مـ‎ | M | | Nun | ـن‎ | ن‎ | ـنـ‎ | نـ‎ | N | | Vau | ـو‎ | و‎ | ـو‎ | و‎ | Oo, o | | Hé | ـه‎ | [#] ه‎ |[#] ـهـ‎ | هـ‎ | H slight aspirate. | | Yé | ـي‎ | ي‎ | ـيـ‎ | يـ‎ | Y | | Ché | ـچ‎ | چ‎ | ـچـ‎ | چـ‎ | C in _cherry_. | | Ngé | ـغ‎ | غ‎ | ـغـ‎ | غـ‎ | Ng in _hang_. | | Laum- | ـلا‎ | لا‎ | ـلا‎ | لا‎ | La | | aulif| | | | | | +-------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------------------+

In the above alphabetical arrangement, the second and fourth columns from the right hand are used only when they are connected with a preceding letter; as, _banyak_ بنيق‎, many. Every letter should be connected with that which follows it, except these five: ا‎ aulif, ‎د‎ dal, ر‎ ré, ز‎ zé, and و‎ vau; neither of which can possibly be joined to the following letter.

MALLET.

A wooden hammer, with which to drive the quoins in locking up and unlocking forms, to plane down forms, and for other similar purposes. The general size of the head is 5 inches by 4¼, and 3 inches thick: the hole in the head for the reception of the handle should be bevelled each way from the centre on two sides, so that the handle fitting into the lower part, and being tightly wedged at the upper end, the head can neither fly off, nor can the handle be driven up, when a quoin is struck down with it, or when the planer is struck with the end of it, both which ways of using the mallet are frequent. It is commonly made of beech; but mallets are more durable when the head is made of a piece of tough ash. The head was formerly made round.

MARGIN.

Making margin is the apportioning of the proper distances between the pages of a sheet or form.

This is a most material object in book work; for, if it be not properly done, the appearance of the book, when bound, will be injured; as the binder will be obliged either to reduce the size of the book, in order to make the edges smooth, or else he will have to leave many raw edges of paper.

The spaces between the pages should be such, that, when the book is bound and cut, the page of printing should be very nearly in the middle of the page of paper.

Convenience and custom have familiarised us to the printed page being a little higher than the middle of the leaf, and to its having a little more margin at the fore edge than in the back.

The first of these circumstances may be accounted for, by the head, in all sizes except folio, being at the fold of the paper, which admits of the bookbinder cutting it smooth by taking off a very narrow shaving, so as to reduce the size but a mere trifle; while the bottom of the page lying towards the raw edge of the paper, which is irregular, and which often varies considerably from being cater-cornered--machine-made paper also varies greatly in the size of the sheets, being cut up irregularly; and paper made at different times, and by different makers, which is often used in the same volume, and which likewise varies in size--all combined, render it necessary to allow a little more margin at the foot of the page and at the fore edge than at the head and in the back; for these variations in the paper equally affect the fore edge and the foot: but the head, the back, and the gutter, being folded, remain uniformly the same, however much the paper may vary.

It is always presumed that the backing of the book in binding, takes up as much of the margin as is cut off the fore edge, so as to make them both equal.

Having premised these explanatory observations, I shall proceed to describe, in as clear and distinct a manner as I am able, the manner of ascertaining the proper spaces between the pages, for the different sizes of books, in the simplest way that is known, and as it is now generally practised; for the division of the margin by compasses is obsolete.

To facilitate the operation, it will be necessary to keep in mind the observation I made in the article IMPOSING, that, “when we arrive at a great number of pages in a sheet, they resolve themselves into the same order as quartos, octavos, and duodecimos,” as a recollection of this will tend to simplify the process, and, if the person who has to perform it be not well experienced, it may prevent him from getting confused, by keeping him to a small part of the form, instead of leaving him to attempt doing all at once.

After the pages have been laid upon the imposing stone, and the chases put over them, the first thing to be done is to get a sheet of the proper paper of the work, wet, and to fold it as exactly as possible to the size in which the work is intended to be printed.

If the paper for the work has not been sent in, then a sheet of the same size may be taken from the paper of some other work that is in progress, which will be found to be sufficiently near, inasmuch as a scaleboard or two in the backs and heads, more or less, will make it right; or the first sheet may be imposed temporarily with furniture out of the drawer.

I must here caution the compositor, or the person who has this business to perform, never to cut his furniture till he is certain of the proper distance required between the pages.

To ascertain this distance, take short pieces of furniture out of the drawer, or quotations, or both, and quadrats or reglets to fill up the interspace, between two pages; then push the pages close up to them, and when you have got the right distance between the pages, you can ascertain what furniture will be of the exact width, by trying the ends of different pieces, always measuring from the edges of the types themselves, and not within the page cords.

We will now proceed with making margin, commencing with folio, and proceeding through the various sizes, at least through so many as may be necessary to elucidate the subject.

FOLIO.--Having folded a sheet of the intended paper exactly in the middle, place the edge of the paper even upon the outer edge of the first page, and move the adjoining page to it till the fold in the paper will lie about half an inch upon it, when the folded sheet is laid upon the face of the first page; the space between the pages on either side of the cross is then to be filled up with furniture, using one piece only on each side where it is practicable, and where there is no reason to the contrary, in order to prevent mistakes in re-imposing. This space, with the addition of one or two scaleboards on each side of the cross, which are to assist in making register at press, will be sufficiently near for a demy folio, where the page is of a fair dimension; but if the page be very large, or if it be a smaller sized paper than demy, I would not allow the back fold of the paper to lie quite so much over the adjoining page, but would lessen it in proportion to the size of the page or paper; if it be very large paper and a corresponding margin, I would allow a little more proportionably; for it is to be observed, that the more the fold of the paper lies over the edge of the adjoining page, the more fore edge is given at the margin than in the back.

The margin for the head of a folio is arranged at press.

After the scaleboards have been put in, the page cords taken off, and the pages pushed up close to the furniture, you should try it again, to see that it is correct. It is a good plan to take a slip of paper, and cut it to a length equal to the width of the back, then to fold it even in the middle so as to make a distinct crease, to open it again and lay it in the back, so that the crease shall be exactly in the middle of the back; then to open out the sheet of paper, and lay it upon the form, with the crease in its middle upon the crease in the slip of paper; the margin in the back may then be compared with the margin in the fore edge as well as if the sheet were printed, and it may be altered if thought necessary by a scaleboard more or less.

If two jobs, that are to be cut up, are worked together, it is usual to impose them so that the margin shall be equal on both sides; to effect this, fold the paper exactly in the middle, and laying it folded upon the left hand page with the edge of the paper even with the edge of the page of types, bring the other page to it till the left hand side fairly touches the fold of the paper; this is termed being out and out; and when the paper is cut evenly in two, after having been printed, the side margins will be found to be equal.

QUARTO.--Fold a sheet of paper exactly into quarto; then lay it, thus folded, upon the first page, the fore edge of the paper being even with the left hand edge of the types; bring the adjoining page towards the first page till the fold in the paper lies upon the left hand side of it about as much as a Double Pica body; this will make the back about right: then place the lower edge of the paper even with the foot of the page, and bring the heads of the pages which adjoin at that part towards each other till the fold in the paper covers the head line, and barely the first line of matter; this will make the head right. Then fit the furniture into the spaces; add a scaleboard or two, as the case will admit; and, after cutting and folding slips of paper and laying them in the back and head, open out the sheet of paper, laying the folds in the paper exactly over the folds in the slips, and it will be perceived how the margin is to be for all the pages.

Before I proceed to octavo, it will be necessary to observe, that in all sizes except folio and quarto, if there be not enough in the backs, the raw edge of the paper in the front margin will project beyond the folded margin, and this in proportion to the deficiency in the back; the same will take place in the length in duodecimo, and in smaller sizes where there are offcuts, if there be not enough at the foot of the pages whence the offcut is taken: the effect produced by these deficiencies is, that the binder is obliged to reduce the size of the book both in length and width, when cutting, in order to make the edges smooth.

The French allow the raw edge of the paper in the front to extend considerably beyond the folded edge; and also at the foot in duodecimos: in England we endeavour to give the book the fullest size that the paper will permit, and suffer the raw edge of the front margin to project but a very little beyond the folded edge, to allow for any discrepancy in the size or shape of the paper.

OCTAVO.--Fold a sheet of paper into octavo, and lay it, thus folded, upon the first page, the fore edge of the paper even with the outer edge of the types: then bring the adjoining page towards it till the other side of the octavo paper lies over the left hand side of this page about a Pica; this will give the width of the gutter: then open the paper out a fold, into quarto, and laying it upon the two pages, bring the third page on the right hand sufficiently near for the right hand side of the paper to lie upon the left hand side of the page about a Long Primer body; this will give the width of the back: then fold the paper up again, and laying it upon the first page, with the foot of the paper even with the direction line, bring the head of the page above it so near that the top of the octavo paper will cover the head line and barely also the first line of matter; this will give the space at the head: then put into all the spaces on one side of the long cross, and into the head, small pieces of furniture from the drawer, or quotations, which are generally used where they will fit, or quadrats, making both the gutters alike, and push the pages up close; cut the slips of paper as before, and fold them; lay them in the gutters, head and back, and open the sheet of paper to its full size; lay it with the crease of the middle fold exactly upon the crease of the slip of paper in the back, and if the margin be right the creases between the other pages will fall exactly upon the creases in the slips of paper laid in the gutters; if they do not, the space in the back must be increased or diminished till they do, when the margin will be right; the furniture may then be cut, and a scaleboard inserted next the crosses at the backs and heads in all the quarters.

DUODECIMO.--After folding a sheet of paper exactly into 12mo., proceed as in octavo for the gutter, but let the fold lie rather less over the edge of the adjoining page than a Pica; proceed in the same manner for the back, but that the paper lie on the third page barely a Long Primer body will be sufficient; the fold in the head will just cover the top line of matter in the adjoining page above it, as in octavo, but the pieces of furniture put in there are called bolts. The offcut is now to be considered--this is always imposed on the outside of the short cross, and the back and gutters are the same as those in the other part of the sheet; for the head of the offcut, the space between the running title, or, where there is no running title, the headline, and the middle of the groove in the short cross, must be exactly half the width of the bolts; for as register is made at this part, and the points fall into the groove and there make point holes, the binder folds to these holes, and takes off the offcut in accordance: thus when the sheet is folded, the offcut inserted, and knocked-up, the head lines of the offcut ought to range with the head lines of the other pages, and this should always be kept in view by the printer; the space between the bottom of the other pages and the middle of the groove in the short cross, should be within a Pica of the outer margin at the feet of the pages, which will allow for any little variation in the size of the paper, and not affect the size of the book in cutting the edges: when these distances are thus arranged, put short bits of furniture, quotations, &c., as before directed, between the pages, in the gutters and back in one row, and in the head and both sides of the short cross in another row lengthways, and push the pages of both these rows close up: cut the slips of paper and fold them for the gutters and the back, as also for the bolts: then open out the sheet of paper, and lay the middle crease in it exactly upon the crease in the slip of paper laid in the back; and if the side margin is right, the creases in the sheet of paper between the other pages will fall upon the creases in the slips of paper laid in the gutters; if they do not, the space in the back must be altered till they do: then try it the other way, by laying the crease in the sheet of paper upon the crease in the slip laid in the bolt, and if the crease of the offcut falls exactly in the middle of the groove in the short cross, it is right; if it does not, the space at the feet of the pages next the cross must be altered till it does: it being presumed that the gutters and bolts are right, the only places at which to alter are the back, and the space at the feet of the pages adjoining the offcut; a scaleboard or two, as may be required, must be put into all the quarters next the crosses.

In _Duodecimo Music way_, the pages are reversed in shape, being so wide as for two of them to occupy the width of the sheet, and so short as to have six in the depth; in this case there are no backs, technically so called, but only gutters; but as the long cross comes between the pages, they must be treated as backs, in the same manner as in folio, and the fold of the paper must be allowed to lie more over the side of the adjoining page, as was described in making margin for folio; if the page be very wide, less than half an inch; if it be narrow, and a large margin, it may be a little more; the head margins or bolts are three in depth, and may be ascertained in the same manner precisely as for octavos or common twelves, which, being done, the foot margins must be ascertained; these, being two, may have a Pica body each less than the outer foot margins, to allow for any inequality in the size of the paper, or in laying on the white paper at press; this will be done by folding the sheet of paper exactly in three portions across it, and extending the pages till one of these portions covers the two outer pages with the gutter, and lies over the third about a Pica body; when this has been performed at one end, repeat the same process at the other end of the form. The margin may then be tried in the manner before described, and any necessary alteration must be made in the space at the feet of the pages, care being taken that both spaces are equal.

In _Long Duodecimo_, the pages are the same in size as in the preceding, only that they exchange the length for width, and the width for length; the manner of making margin is the same for this size as for the last; the only difference between them being one of words--that which was the gutter in the other being the head in this; and what was the head or bolt, and the foot margin, now becoming the gutter and the back; the spaces between the pages, for heads, for gutters, and for backs, are ascertained in the manner before described.

As the number of pages multiply in a sheet, so the utility of placing slips of paper, folded in the middle, in the gutters, backs, &c., becomes greater, by enabling the person, whose office it is, to know readily the middle of each space when he tries the whole margin with the sheet opened out; to some this may appear unnecessarily minute, but I hold that whatever method tends to facilitate an operation, and enables a person to perform it more correctly, is useful.

SIXTEENS.--After having described so fully the manner of folding the paper, and ascertaining the spaces between the pages for the gutters, the heads, and the backs, which are required for quartos, octavos, and duodecimos, it appears unnecessary to extend this article by repeating the same thing in every size. For sixteens, fold a quarter of a sheet of paper exactly in four; pursue the foregoing direction for ascertaining the width of the gutter, the back, and the head, in one quarter of the form, and having made these right, arrange the remainder of the form in the same manner, always trying all the pages by the whole sheet opened out, and rectifying any thing wrong by adding or diminishing in the backs, and similarly at the feet of the pages next the short cross.

The greater the number of pages in a sheet, the smaller in proportion does the margin become: it must therefore be evident, that the folded paper should lie proportionably less over the edge of the adjoining page, both for gutter and for back, as the number of pages increases; for as a folio may require the page to be half an inch nearer the back than the fore edge, an eighteens may not require it to be more than a Long Primer; and so in proportion with respect to the size of the page and of the margin.

EIGHTEENS.--A sheet of eighteens is the same as three half sheets of twelves imposed together: there are two backs and three gutters in each form: the other way of the chase it is three pages in depth, having bolts and an offcut the same as twelves; and the process is the same as when making margin for twelves, only ascertaining the first gutter and back by one third of the sheet of paper the long way, instead of one half of it the narrow way: having made the six pages on the left hand of the form right, make the remaining twelve pages like them, and then try the whole with the sheet of paper opened out; the creases in the folds should fall exactly in the middle of the gutters and backs; but as the offcut is not imposed on the side of the short cross with the groove in it, the crease for the offcut should be exactly half the width of the bolt from the running title or headline, or it should fall in the middle of the long cross.

I wish here to impress upon the mind of the person who is making margin, never to attempt doing so with the whole form at once; for if he does, it is more than probable that he will get wrong, cause himself additional trouble, and frequently waste furniture; but let him get one portion right, then make a range of pages through the form one way the same, and then another the contrary way, and afterwards try them with the sheet of paper opened out, when any little variation that may occur will be easily remedied before he cuts the furniture.

TWENTIES.--A form of this size has four pages in width, and five in length; in width the margin will be made in the same manner as for twelves; in the length there are two heads or bolts, which will be also ascertained as for twelves; the space between the feet of the pages must be out and out, except about a Pica body; and the offcut must be treated the same as for a form of twelves or eighteens.

TWENTY-FOURS.--The side margin will be ascertained just as for eighteens, there being the same number of pages in width; and the head and foot margin as for sixteens; the difference in the size of the pages not affecting the principle of making margin.

_Long Twenty-fours._--A form of this size is similar to a sheet of twelves imposed in one chase, the width of the pages being the longest way of the paper: the method of making margin for it will be similar to that for twelves or eighteens.

_Square Twenty-fours._--The difference between this size and twenty-fours is, that the width of the pages occupy the sheet the longest way; the margin will be made in the same manner.

THIRTY-TWOS.--One quarter of a form of thirty-twos is similar to a form of octavo; and the margin may be made by folding a quarter of a sheet of paper, and arranging the pages of a quarter of the form only in the first instance: then place the others at the same relative distances, and try the whole with the sheet of paper opened out, before cutting the furniture.

There is no variation in any principle of making margin as to the remaining sizes; and if I were to go into detail for each, it would be but a repetition of the method of ascertaining the width of the gutters, backs, heads or bolts, and of the spaces at the feet of the pages where they either cut up, or fold, at that part, which I think unnecessary; for when a person is competent to make margin correctly for an octavo, a twelves, and an eighteens, he will find no difficulty with respect to the other sizes.

Wherever a half sheet is imposed, or two half sheets to work together, the middle margin, where the sheet is cut in two, should always be made out and out, that both the fore edges may be equal.

When the margin to the first sheet of a work has been made, and the quoins tightened with the fingers, a gauge should be cut for the back and head, for the succeeding sheets. _See_ ALTERATION OF MARGIN.--GAUGE.--IMPOSING.

MARGINAL NOTES,

generally called side notes by printers, are notes at the fore edge of the page, running from top to bottom, or placed opposite the matter to which they refer, when they are short. They are generally of the width of a broad quotation; in historical works, where there is only a date at the top of each page, a narrow quotation is run down the side. They are always used in acts of parliament, and in law books, and contain a short abstract of the clause to which they are affixed, and should be justified to range with the line to which they refer.

It is usual, where marginal notes are not heavy, to economise the metal quotations by using furniture; in this case I would advise the compositor to select pieces of precisely the same width, but of different short lengths, and to cut their ends square; some should extend the length of the page; and when he uses short pieces, that he always put a metal quotation or a justifier next to the note, which will cause the lines to stand more even; he will then not lose so much time in seeking quotations and justifiers, nor will he be blamed for monopolising them, as they are seldom so plentiful in an office as to allow of being lavishly used.

MARKS. _See_ POINTS, and REFERENCES.

MATHEMATICAL COMBINATIONS.

This is the name given by Messrs. Thorowgood and Besley to a number of ornamental designs for letter-press printing, which they were, in the first instance, the means of introducing into England from Paris, these being the invention and execution of Mons. Derriey, a French artist. In England, they come under the denomination of what are called Flowers; but Messrs. V. & J. Figgins style them Changeable Borders.

The flowers in the English founderies have received little improvement or addition during the last hundred years, and are not remarkable either for their beauty or taste: the consequence is, that they are seldom used, hardly ever indeed in fine works. It is difficult to account for this apathy of our letter founders and artists, for the few improvements that have been introduced, have generally been copied from French patterns.

The borders in question are a great improvement, and will, by exciting emulation, most probably lead to others still greater. They are of various patterns, formed of straight lines, as well as of diversified curves; the corners are also formed of angles and curves, so that they may be combined into an almost innumerable variety of forms; in addition, there are many detached tasteful pieces, which, when judiciously used, will add greatly to the effect; but unless the workman possess judgment with some taste, it is doubtful whether he will be able to produce a border, or any other subject, that will be gratifying to the eye.

That the reader may himself form an opinion of these borders, I have given two pages in which several of these pieces are arranged so as to show their effect. Those who are desirous of seeing all the varieties, may find them in the type founders specimen books, where there are a number of borders of different forms and patterns, which are combined in such a manner as to convince the beholder of the superiority of these ornaments over our old class of flowers.

As the French and German type founders, when they produce any new devices, sell matrices of them as articles of trade, the ornaments that are now introduced into England, have consequently all been manufactured from the same punches.

[Illustration: Mathematical combinations]

[Illustration: Mathematical combinations]

MATRIX PLATES. For stereotype printing, _see_ RISERS.

MATTER.

The series of the discourse of the compositor’s copy.--_M._ It now also means pages of types composed for any work; thus we have _Set Matter_, and _Matter for Distribution_, which _see_.

_Matter for Distribution._ Types that, having been composed for a work and printed off, are ready for use in another work, are, collectively, called Matter for Distribution.

MEASURE.

The width of a page. _See_ COMPOSING STICK.--_M._ _See_ also JUSTIFY A STICK.

MEDHURST’S PRESS.

A few years ago, a new press was constructed by Mr. Medhurst, of London, the great recommendation of which was its simplicity, and consequent cheapness. In its general form it much resembled the iron presses in common use, the principal difference being in the manner in which the pressure was produced. This was accomplished by means of an ingenious arrangement of levers, differing so much from every thing previously employed in machinery, that the inventor described his contrivance as one which exhibited a new power in mechanics.

[Illustration: Medhurst’s press]

The principle upon which this press acts will be understood from the annexed sketch of the parts by means of which the impression is given. Instead of a screw, a plain spindle is employed: on the lower part of this spindle there is a swell or collar, A, into which the handle, or working bar of the press, B, is fastened. The upper part of this collar has cups or steps for the reception of two short iron props or pins, C, D, which extend up to the head of the press, and are there supported by the points of two screws, E, F, entering sockets cut out in the heads of the pins, which are made of steel. When the platen is up, these pins stand in an inclined position, as represented in the annexed figure: but when the lever handle is pulled towards the spectator, so as to turn the spindle, the two screws remain stationary, while the props come into a vertical position, thus forcing the spindle and attached platen to descend, as if a screw were employed. It may be observed that, in the figure, G is merely a section of the head of the press, which is supposed to be looked at sidewise, to present the back and front projections, H, I, through which the screws pass.--_Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopædia_, 1833.

MEDICAL CONTRACTIONS

used in prescriptions, &c., with the words at length, and a translation. From _Gray’s Supplement to the Pharmacopœia_. 5th edit. 8vo. _London_, 1831.

_A._ _Aa._--Ana, of each ingredient.

_Abdom._--Abdomen, the belly; abdominis, of the belly; abdomini, to the belly.

_Abs. febr._--Absente febre, in the absence of the fever.

_Ad 2 vic._--Ad duas vices, at twice taking.

_Ad gr. acid._--Ad gratam aciditatem, to an agreeable sourness.

_Ad libit._--Ad libitum, at pleasure.

_Add._--Adde, or addantur, add; addendus, to be added; addendo, by adding.

_Admov._--Admoveatur, or admoveantur, apply.

_Adst. febr._--Adstante febre, when the fever is on.

_Aggred. febre._--Aggrediente febre, while the fever is coming on.

_Altern. horis._--Alternis horis, every other hour.

_Alvo adst._--Alvo adstricta, when the belly is bound.

_Aq. bull._--Aqua bulliens, boiling water.

_Aq. ferv._--Aqua fervens, boiling water.

_Bis ind._--Bis indies, twice a day.

_BB._ _Bbds._--Barbadensis, Barbadoes.

_B. M._--Balneum maris, a sea-water bath.

_Bull._--Bulliat, it should boil; bulliant, they should boil.

_B. V._--Balneum vaporis, a steam heat.

_Cap._--Capiat, take.

_C. m._--Cras mane, to-morrow morning.

_Coch. ampl._--Cochleare amplum, a large spoon.

_Coch. infant._--Cochleare infantis, a child’s spoon.

_Coch. magn._--Cochleare magnum, a large spoon.

_Coch. mod._--Cochleare modicum, a dessert spoon.

_Coch. parv._--Cochleare parvum, a small spoon.

_Cœrul._--Cœruleus, blue.

_Col._--Colatus, strained.

_Colat._--Coletur, it should be strained; colaturæ, of or to the strained liquor.

_Colent._--Colentur, they should be strained.

_Comp._--Compositus, compounded.

_Cont. rem._--Continuentur remedia, the medicines should be continued.

_Contr._--Contritus, ground to a fine powder.

_Coq._--Coque, boil; coquantur, they should be boiled.

_C. P._--Codex of Paris.

_Crast._--Crastinus, to-morrow.

_Cuj._--Cujus, of which.

_Cujusl._--Cujuslibet, of any.

_Cyath. theæ._--Cyatho theæ, in a cup of tea.

_Deaur. pil._--Deaurentur pilulæ, the pills should be gilt.

_Deb. spiss._--Debita spissitudo, a proper consistence.

_Decub._--Decubitus, of lying down.

_De d. in d._--De die in diem, from day to day.

_Dej. alvi._--Dejectiones alvi, stools.

_Det._--Detur, it should be given.

_Dieb. alt._--Diebus alternis, every other day.

_Dieb. tert._--Diebus tertiis, every third day.

_Dim._--Dimidius, one half.

_Dir. prop._--Directione propria, with a proper direction.

_Donec alv. bis dej._--Donec alvus bis dejiciat, until two stools have been obtained.

_Donec alv. sol. fuer._--Donec alvus soluta fuerit, until a stool has been obtained.

_Ejusd._--Ejusdem, of the same.

_Enem._--Enema (en-e-ma), a clyster; enemeta, clysters.

_Ext. sup. alut._--Extende super alutam, spread upon leather.

_F. pil. xij._--Fac pilulas duodecim, make 12 pills.

_Feb. dur._--Febre durante, during the fever.

_Fem. intern._--Femoribus internis, to the inner part of the thighs.

_F. venæs._--Fiat venæsectio, bleed.

_Fist. arm._--Fistula armata, a clyster pipe and bladder fitted for use.

_Fl._--Fluidus, liquid; also by measure.

_Gel. quav._--Gelatinâ quâvis, in any kind of jelly.

_G. G. G._--Gummi guttæ gambiæ, gamboge.

_Gr._--Granum, a grain; grana, grains.

_Gtt._--Gutta, a drop; guttæ, drops.

_Gutt. quibusd._--Guttis quibusdam, with a few drops.

_Har. pil. sum. iij._--Harum pilularum sumantur tres, three of these pills should be taken.

_Hor. decub._--Hora decubitus, at going to bed.

_Hor. som._--Hora somni, just before going to sleep; or on retiring to rest.

_Hor. un. spatio._--Horæ unius spatio, at the expiration of an hour.

_Hor. interm._--Horis intermediis, at the intermediate hours between what has been ordered at stated times.

_Ind._--Indies, from day to day, or daily.

_In pulm._--In pulmento, in gruel.

_Inj. enem._--Injiciatur enema, a clyster should be given.

_Lat. dol._--Lateri dolenti, to the side that is affected.

_Lb._--Libra, a pound; or libra, weight, or a wine pint; when preceded by Arabic figures, Avoirdupois weight is generally meant; but when succeeded by Roman numerals, Troy weight, or pint measures.

_M._--Misce, mix; mensura, by measure; manipulus, a handful.

_Mane pr._--Mane primo, very early in the morning.

_Min._--Minimum, the 60th part of a drachm measure.

_Mtt._--Mitte, send; mittatur, or mittantur, there should be sent.

_Mitt. sang. ad [ounce]xij. saltem._--Mittatur sanguis ad uncias duodecim saltem, blood should be taken away to 12 ounces at least.

_Mod. præsc._--Modo præscripto, in the manner directed.

_Mor. sol._--More solito, in the usual manner.

_Ne tr. s. num._--Ne tradas sine nummo, you should not deliver it without the money: as a caution to the shopman, when the presence of the customer prevents the master giving a verbal direction.

_N. M._--Nux moschata, a nutmeg.

_O._--Octarius, a wine pint, being 1-8th of a gallon.

_Ol. lini s. i._--Oleum lini sine igne, cold drawn linseed oil.

_Omn. hor._--Omni hora, every hour.

_Omn. bid._--Omni biduo, every two days.

_Omn. bih._--Omni bihorio, every two hours.

_Omn. man._--Omni mane, every morning.

_Omn. noct._--Omni nocte, every night.

_Omn. quadr. hor._--Omni quadrante horæ, every quarter of an hour.

_O. O. O._--Oleum olivæ optimum, best olive oil.

_Oz._--The ounce Avoirdupois, or common weight, as distinguished from that prescribed by physicians in their orders.

_P._--Pondere, by weight.

_P. Bat._--Pharmacopœia Batava.

_P. Belg._--Pharmacopœia Belgica.

_P. D._--Pharmacopœia Dublinensis.

_P. E._--Pharmacopœia Edinensis.

_P. L._--Pharmacopœia Londinensis.

_P. L. V._--Pharmacopœia Londinensis [Vetus?] before 1745.

_P. U. S._--Pharmacopœia of the United States.

_Part. vic._--Partitis vicibus, to be given in divided doses, instead of all at once.

_Per. op. emet._--Peracta operatione emetici, when the operation of the emetic is finished.

_Post sing. sed. liq._--Post singulas sedes liquidas, after every loose stool.

_P. r. n._--Pro re nata, according as circumstances occur.

_P. rat. æt._--Pro ratione ætatis, according to the age of the patient.

_Pug._--Pugillus, a gripe between the finger and thumb.

_Q. p._--Quantum placet, as much as you please.

_Q. s._--Quantum sufficit, as much as may suffice.

_Quor._--Quorum, of which.

_R._--Recipe, take; but for this the old authors, and the French to this day, use this sign ♃, being the old heathen invocation to Jupiter, seeking his blessing upon the formula, equivalent to the usual invocation of the poets and of Mahomedan authors, or the Laus Deo with which book-keepers and merchants clerks formerly began their books of account and invoices, a practice not yet quite extinct

_Red. in pulv._--Redactus in pulverem, powdered.

_Redig. in pulv._--Redigatur in pulverem, it should be reduced to powder.

_Reg. umbil._--Regio umbilici, the parts near the navel.

_Repet._--Repetatur, it should be continued; repetantur, they should be continued.

_S. A._--Secundum artem, according to art.

_Semidr._--Semidrachma, half a dram.

_Semih._--Semihora, half an hour.

_Sesunc._--Sesuncia, an ounce and a half

_Sesquih._--Sesquihora, an hour and a half.

_Si n. val._--Si non valeat, if it does not answer.

_Si op. sit._--Si opus sit, if need shall be.

_Si vir. perm._--Si vires permittant, if the strength will allow.

_Sign. n. pr._--Signetur nomine proprio, write upon it the usual name, not the trade name.

_Sing._--Singulorum, singularum, of each.

_S. S. S._--Stratum super stratum, layer upon layer.

_Ss._--Semi, a half.

_St._--Stet, it should stand; stent, they should stand.

_Sub fin. coct._--Sub finem coctionis, when the boiling is nearly finished.

_Sum. tal._--Sumat talem, the patient should take one like this.

_S. V._--Spiritus vinosus, ardent spirits of any strength.

_S. V. R._--Spiritus vinosus rectificatus, spirit of wine.

_S. V. T._--Spiritus vinosus tenuis, proof spirit, or half and half spirit of wine and water.

_Temp. dext._--Tempori dextro, to the right temple.

_T. O._--Tinctura opii, tincture of opium; generally confounded with laudanum, which is properly the wine of opium.

_T. O. C._--Tinctura opii camphorata, paregoric elixir.

_Trit._--Tritus, ground to powder.

_Ult. præscr._--Ultimo præscriptus, the last ordered.

_V. O. S._--Vitello ovi solutus, dissolved in the yelk of an egg.

_Vom. urg._--Vomitione urgente, when the vomiting begins.

_Z._--A mark in writing that a word is contracted, as in oz. for ounce.

_Zz._--Zingiber, ginger.

℈.--Scrupulum, a scruple, equal to 20 grains Troy.

ʒ.--Drachma, a drachm, equal to 3 scruples; or, in liquids, the 8th part of an ounce measure.

℥.--Uncia, an ounce Troy; or, in liquids, the 16th part of a wine pint.

MEREDITH, CHRISTOPHER. _See_ DONATIONS.

METAL.

The technical name of a mixture of metals properly so called, with which types and stereotype plates are cast.

In speaking of type metal, I shall first give Moxon’s description of making it, which is curious; and then some interesting observations on the same subject by M. Sage, from the Journal de Physique.

Moxon says--“What the metal founders make printing letters of, is lead hardened with iron: thus, they choose stub nails for the best iron to melt, as well because they are assured stub nails are made of good, soft, and tough iron, as because they (being in small pieces of iron) will melt the sooner.

“To make the iron run, they mingle an equal weight of antimony (beaten in an iron mortar into small pieces) and stub nails together. And preparing so many earthen forty or fifty pounds melting pots (made for that purpose to endure the fire) as they intend to use: they charge these pots with the mingled iron and antimony as full as they will hold.

“Every time they melt metal, they build a new furnace to melt it in: this furnace is called an open furnace; because the air blows in through all its sides to fan the fire: they make it of bricks in a broad open place, as well because the air may have free access to all its sides, as that the vapours of the antimony (which are obnoxious) may the less offend those that officiate at the making of the metal: and also because the violent fire made in the furnace should not endanger the firing any adjacent houses.

“They consider, before they make the furnace, how many pots of metal they intend to melt, and make the furnace sizeable to that number: we will suppose five pots. Therefore they first make a circle on the ground capable to hold these five pots, and wider yet by three or four inches round about: then within this circle they lay a course of bricks close to one another to fill the plain of that platform, with their broad or flat sides downwards, and their ends all one way, and on this course of bricks they lay another course of bricks as before, only the lengths of this course of bricks lies athwart the breadths of the other course of bricks; then they lay a third course of bricks with their lengths cross the breadth of the second course of bricks.

“Having thus raised a platform, they place these five pots in the middle of it close to one another, and then on the foundation or platform raise the furnace round about by laying the bricks of the first lay end to end and flat, close to one another: on the second lay, they place the middle of a brick over a joint (as the bricklayers call it) that is, where the ends of two bricks join together, and so again lay bricks end to end till they trim round the platform. Then they lay a third lay of bricks, covering the joints of the second lay of bricks as before: so is the foundation finished.

“Then they raise the walls to the furnace on this foundation; but do not lay the ends of their bricks close together, but lay the ends of each brick about three inches off each other, to serve for wind holes till they trim round about: then they lay another lay of bricks, leaving other such wind holes over the middle of the last lay of bricks, and so trim as they work round, either with half bricks or bats, that the wind holes of the last lay may be covered: and in this manner and order they lay so many lays, till the walls of the furnace be raised about three bricks higher than the mouths of the melting pots, still observing to leave such wind holes over the middle of every brick that lies under each lay.

“Then they fill the sides of the furnace round about the melting pots, and over them, with charcoal, and fire it at several wind holes in the bottom, till it burn up and all over the furnace, which a moderate wind in about an hour’s time will do: and about half an hour’s time after, they lay their ears near the ground and listen to hear a bubbling in the pots; and this they do so often till they do hear it. When they hear this bubbling, they conclude the iron is melted: but yet they will let it stand, perhaps half an hour longer or more, according as they guess the fire to be hotter or cooler, that they may be the more assured it is all thoroughly melted. And when it is melted, the melting pot will not be a quarter full.

“And in or against that time, they make another small furnace close to the first, (to set an iron pot in, in which they melt lead,) on that side from whence the wind blows; because the person that lades the lead out of the iron pot (as shall be shewed by and by) may be the less annoyed with the fumes of the metal, in both furnaces. This furnace is made of three or four course of bricks open to the windward, and wide enough to contain the designed iron pot, with room between it and the sides to hold a convenient quantity of charcoal under it, and about it.

“Into this iron pot they put for every three pound of iron, about five and twenty pounds of lead. And, setting fire to the coals in this little furnace, they melt and heat this lead red hot.

“Hitherto a man (nay, a boy) might officiate at all this work; but now comes labour would make Hercules sweat. Now they fall to pulling down so much of the side of the open furnace as stands above the mouth of that melting pot next the iron pot, and having a thick strong iron ladle, whose handle is about two yards long, and the ladle big enough to hold about ten pounds of lead, and this ladle red hot that it chill not the metal; they now, I say, with this ladle, fall to clearing this first melting pot of all the coals or filth that lie on the top of the melted metal; while another man at the same time stands provided with a long, strong, round iron stirring poot, the handle of which stirring poot is also about two yards long or more, and the poot itself almost twice the length of the depth of the melting pot: this poot is nothing but a piece of the same iron turned to a square with the handle: and this poot is also in a readiness heated red hot.

“Now one man with the ladle lades the lead out of the iron pot into the melting pot, while the other man with the poot stirs and labours the lead and metal in the melting pot together, till they think the lead and metal in the melting pot be well incorporated: and thus they continue lading and stirring till they have near filled the melting pot.

“Then they go to another next melting pot, and successively to all, and lade and stir lead into them as they did into the first. Which done, the metal is made: and they pull down the walls of the open furnace, and take away the fire that the metal may cool in the pots.

“Now (according to custom) is half a pint of sack mingled with sallad oil, provided for each workman to drink; intended for an antidote against the poisonous fumes of the antimony, and to restore the spirits that so violent a fire and hard labour may have exhausted.”--_Moxon._

Smith, who published his Printer’s Grammar about seventy years after the appearance of Moxon’s work, says, “In Germany they use more than three ingredients to their metal, which is there made of steel, iron, copper, brass, tin, and lead; all which they incorporate with each other by means of antimony. This metal, if duly prepared, does not bend, but breaks like glass; it is harder than tin and lead, something softer than copper, and melts sooner than lead. This account I have of Mr. Struke, a printer at Lubec.”

“_Observations on the Metallic Mixture made use of for casting Letters, or Characters, for Printing. By M. Sage. From the Journal de Physique._

“Lead and regulus of antimony, melted together in various proportions, form the metal used by letter founders, for casting their different types or characters. When I say that these metals are used in various proportions, I mean, that more or less of the regulus of antimony is mixed with the lead, according to the degree of hardness the types are required to possess. In general, eighty pounds of lead are added to twenty pounds of regulus of antimony, already melted: but, for the small characters, in which a greater degree of hardness is required, seventy-five pounds of lead are used to twenty-five pounds of regulus of antimony; and, for large ones, eighty-five pounds of lead, and fifteen pounds of regulus of antimony.

“These two substances, though of very different specific gravities [Lead, 11·35--Antimony 6·70.--_W. S._], remain perfectly combined, and do not separate from each other by fusion, unless the fire made use of is so strong as to burn and volatilize them; in that case, the antimony begins to exhale.

“Letter founders should take care to employ only the purest regulus of antimony, or that which is the most free from sulphur; for, when it contains any of that substance, it acts upon the lead, in the course of time, and forms with it a kind of galena, which acquires a black colour. The letters cast with a mixed metal of that kind, instead of preserving their shining and polished appearance, become dull, and as it were cracked, forming also a sort of efflorescence. When this spontaneous decomposition takes place, the letters become brittle, and lose their form. Of this I have been convinced, by having analysed a mixture of this kind, with which M. Anisson had cast some Arabic characters.

“Having exposed some of the letters, made with this bad metal, to a violent fire, the sulphur it contained burnt, and exhaled, in the form of vitriolic acid. Having then poured the metal remaining in the crucible into an ingot, it acquired a white brilliant colour like silver; which colour did not become sensibly changed, by being left, for the space of six months, in a damp place.

“Regulus of antimony is prepared, in the large way, by melting calcined antimony, in a reverberatory furnace, with dried wine lees; from this is obtained the regulus, which is sold in the form of round cakes, on the surface of which are seen figures like the leaves of fern, &c. which figures are produced from the elements of octoëdral crystals. If the regulus, thus prepared, appears more grey in colour than when it is prepared according to Stahl’s process, it is because it still retains a portion of sulphur.

“At present, there is not found a sufficient quantity of regulus of antimony in commerce to supply the letter founders. It appears to me that, in the place of regulus of antimony prepared as above, we might substitute that which may be prepared with iron. One-fifth part of iron is sufficient to absorb all the sulphur with which antimony is mineralized. When this mixture is melted, it must be poured into a cone: the sulphuretted iron remains upon the surface of the regulus, and is very easily separated from it.

“This process is less expensive, and produces more regulus, than the process made use of by those who work the mines of antimony.

“Regulus of antimony, as we have seen, gives hardness to lead; but a much greater degree of hardness is produced by adding tin to the mixture. I have analysed some nails which were proposed to be used in shipbuilding, and found them to contain three parts of tin, two parts of lead, and one part of regulus of antimony. These nails were sufficiently hard to penetrate oak wood, without being blunted; and this metallic mixture is not acted upon by sea water, which very quickly decomposes iron.”

These observations of M. Sage show the utility of iron in the making of type metal by our predecessors, from its combining with the sulphur contained in the antimony.

Stereotype founders vary considerably the proportions of lead and regulus of antimony in making their metal. The hardest metal made, is in the proportion of ten pounds of regulus of antimony to forty pounds of tea lead; but the general proportions are ten pounds of regulus of antimony to sixty pounds of lead, which are said to make a mixture of a good quality.

METAL RULES.

Straight lines cast on pieces of metal similar to quadrats, but higher; they are rarely cast to founts larger than English. They are used as leaders; to cut off sums of money from the line which contains the sum total; for transverse lines in columns; sometimes for column rules, but very seldom; and for blanks, where the names of persons, &c., are omitted; em metal rules are sometimes used for divisions in a paragraph instead of a point. They are generally of one em, two ems, three ems, and four ems, but in English founts their size does not exceed three ems; sometimes there are en metal rules cast. Metal rules ought to be cast exactly on the middle of the body, and be continued precisely to the sides, so as to join each other at the ends, even if they are placed alternately with the sides reversed; should this not be the case, the continuity of the line must be broken, and it will necessarily have a disagreeable appearance.

MILLED LEAD. _See_ SPACE LINES.

MINION.

The name of a type one size larger than Nonpareil, and one smaller than Brevier. Moxon does not enumerate this size in his list.

MODERN GOTHIC. _See_ BLACK LETTER.

MONK.

When the pressman has not distributed his balls, some splotches of ink may lie on one or both of them, which in beating he delivers upon the form, so that the sheet printed on has a black blotch on it, which blotch is called a _Monk_--_M._ The same effect will take place also with rollers, if care be not taken to roll them backwards and forwards, as well as crossways on the inking table.

MOULD FOR MAKING PAPER.--_See_ FORGERY.

MUSIC.

It is not necessary in this work to define what music is, nor enter at all into any disquisition on the subject, as the object is the printing of it only; and all that I shall attempt is to give the plan of a pair of Music Cases, with the characters, and a specimen.

The English musical types have never to my knowledge undergone any improvement, till within a few years, when Mr. Hughes cut two new founts, which are looked upon as the best we have, and the largest of which I have used for this article.

Mr. E. Cowper devised a plan for printing music, in which one page was the lines only, and the other page was the notes, &c. only, and the chase was prepared to turn upon a centre fixed in the table of a press: thus the first impression was that of the lines without the notes, &c. on one page, and the notes, &c. without the lines on the other; the form was then turned half round, and the second impression was, the lines on the notes on one page, and the notes on the lines on the other. There is an objection to this plan for good work, which is, that the page of notes requires a different making ready to the page of lines, and when the two are completed they will be unequal in the effect, for either the lines will be too strong, or the notes have too little impression.

Mr. R. Branston struck out a different mode: he produced his music by the usual process for printing it with the rolling press, only the punches were struck deeper in the plate, and he then took a stereotype plate from it in type metal, and after the white parts were blocked out the music was sufficiently in relief to be printed at the type press. Both these plans were adopted to preserve the continuity of the lines, which in types got rounded off by wear where they joined, and spoiled the appearance.

In distributing music, the compositor should be careful not to injure the corners of the lines.

_Music of the Presses._ When a house has sufficient business to employ all the presses within it, and a master printer walks through his press room when they are all at work, and hears the creaking of the heads, the thumping of the balls, the noise of the running in and out of the carriage, and all the other miscellaneous, and, to unaccustomed ears, discordant noises, he styles them the music of the presses, which he declares to be the finest music in the world, as it brings grist to his mill.

_The Music of the Presses,_ before the introduction of cylindrical machines worked by steam engines, was a standing toast after dinner at all parties among printers; and I hope it will never be neglected.

C. HANCOCK’S PLAN OF CASES FOR HUGHES’ MUSIC TYPE.

[Illustration: Layout of a Music case]

_Upper Case._

_Lower Case._

[Illustration: THE NATIONAL ANTHEM.

GOD SAVE THE QUEEN.]

N.

NAKED FORM, or PAGE,

is when the furniture is taken away from all sides of the form or page. _See_ STRIP A FORM.

NAMES, ANCIENT, OF CITIES AND TOWNS.

The names distinguished by an asterisk * and an obelisk † were taken from Dr. Adam Clarke’s Bibliographical Miscellany, where they form two lists. The additional names were collected by myself.

In the towns marked * printing was carried on in the fifteenth century; and Dr. A. Clarke says--“In this List, great care has been taken not to omit one place where printing was carried on prior to the year 1500.”--“In this list, because the name refers to the work executed there, the genitive case has been retained. Panzer in his list has followed the same plan. This will be of some use to the mere English scholar, as he will at once see the same form of the word in its alphabetical order in this list, which he finds in the title of his book.”

In the towns marked † printing has been established and carried on since the fifteenth century, and Dr. A. Clarke observes--“This part might have been much enlarged, but it was not judged indispensably necessary. As the most difficult names are here explained, which usually occur in the titles of books, the residue it is hoped will occasion little embarrassment to any scholar.”--“It may be necessary to observe, for the information of the less experienced reader, that in this Supplement, as the Latin name stands in reference to no printed work, the nominative case has been always used.”

* Abbatis Villæ Abbeville, France. † Aberdonia Aberdeen, Scotland. † Aboa Abo, capital of Swedish Finland. † Abrincæ Avranches, an ancient town of France. * Acqui. _See_ Albæ. * Æssii. _See_ Essii. Agathopolis Montpelier, France. Aginum Angoulême, France. Agneda Edinburgh, Scotland. Agrigentum Gergenti, Sicily. * Albæ, or Acqui A town of Montferrat, 25 miles from Genoa. Albani Fanum } * S. Albani Villæ } St. Albans, Hertfordshire. * Albiæ Albia, Italy. * Aldenardæ Oudenarde, Flanders. * Alosti Alost, Flanders. * Alta villæ Eltville, near Mayence. † Altorfia Altorf, Germany. † Amstelodamum--Amst. Amstel. Amsterdam, Holland. * Andegavi Angers, France. Andreapolis--Andrea St. Andrews, Scotland. † Aneda and Edenburgum Edinburgh, Scotland. * Angolismi Angoulême, France. † Anseola Ansloe _or_ Opsloe, now Christiania, Norway. Antitrajectus Andover, Hampshire. * Antverpiæ--Ant. Antverp. Antwerp, Netherlands. * Anvera, Anvers, Anverso Antwerp. Aquæ Augustæ Bayonne, Gascony. Aquæ calidæ Bath, Somersetshire. Aquæ solis Bath. Aquæ, urbs Helvetiorum Baden, Germany, † Aquæ Sextiæ Aix, Provence, France. * Aquilæ Aquila, Naples. † Aquis-Granum, _or_ Aqua-Grani Aix-la-Chapelle, Westphalia. Ardinacha Armagh, Ireland. * Argentinæ and Argentorati--Argent. Strasburg, on the Lower Rhine. * Arimini Rimini, Italy. Armacha Armagh, Ireland. † Arnoldi Villa Arnheim, Guelderland. Ascallingium Hildesheim, Germany. * Asculi Ascoli, Italy. Atuacutum Antwerp, Netherlands. Aturensium civitas Aire, France. Augusta--Aug. August. Tubingen. * Augustæ Vindelicorum--Aug: Vind: August: Vindel: Augsburg, Germany. Augusta Rauracorum Aust, near Basil. Augusta Tiberii Ratisbon, Germany. Augusta Trinobantum London. † Augustodunum Autun, France. Aureatum Eichstadt. * Aureliani, _or_ Gabani Orleans, France. Autricum Chartres, France. * Avenione Avignon, France. Axa Axminster, Devonshire. Axelodunum Hexham, Northumberland.

* Babenberge and Bambergæ Bamberg, Bohemia. Bada Baden, Switzerland. Badiza Bath, Somersetshire. Bajocæ, Bajocassina Baieux, Normandy. Baiona Bayonne, Gascony. * Bambergæ and Babenberge Bamberg, Bohemia. * Barchinone and Barcilone Barcelona, Spain. * Barci Barco, in the province of Breschia. * Barcilone and Barchinone Barcelona, Spain. * Basilæ--Bas: Basil Basil or Bâle, Switzerland. Bathonia Bath, Somersetshire. Bennopolis Hildesheim, Westphalia. * Bergomi Bergamo, Italy. † Berolininum--Berol: Berlin, Prussia. * Beronæ, and Beronis Villæ Beraun or Beraum, Bohemia. Biponti Zweybrucken. † Bipontium Deux Ponts, Germany. * Bisuntii Besançon, France. † Biterræ Beziers, France. † Biturgiæ Bourges, France. Bononiæ--Bonon: Bologna, Italy. Brangonia Worcester. † Bravum Burgi Burgos, Spain. Briganti York. * Brixiæ Bresse _or_ Breschia, Italy. Brixiæ Brussels, Flanders. * Brugis Bruges, Flanders. Brundunum Braunaw. * Brunnæ Brinn _or_ Brunn, Moravia. † Brunopolis Brunswick, Lower Saxony. Brunsvicum Brunswick, Germany. Brunsvigæ Brunswick. * Bruxellis Bruxells _or_ Brussels, France. [Now belonging to Belgium.] * Budæ Buda, _or_ Offen, Lower Hungary. † Burdigala Bourdeaux, France. * Burgdorffii Burgdorf, Switzerland, also a town of Lower Saxony. * Burgis (Bravum Burgi) Burgos, Spain. * Buscoducis Bois-le-Duc, Brabant

† Cabelium Chablies, France Cadomi Caen, France. Caerlud London. * Cæsar Augustæ Saragossa, Spain. † Cæsarodunum Tours, France. Caesarverus Salisbury, Wiltshire. Calaris Cagliari, Sardinia. Caletum Calais, France. * Callii Cagli, Italy. * Camberiaci. _See_ Chamberii. Camboricum Cambridge. Camelodunum Doncaster, Yorkshire. Cameracum Cambray, Netherlands. Camulodunum Colchester, Essex. Canonium Chelmsford, Essex. Cantabrigiæ--Cantab: Cambridge. Cantuaria Canterbury, Kent. * Capuæ Capua, Naples. * Carmagnolæ Carmagniola, Piedmont. Carodunum Cracow, Poland. * Carpen. _or_ Carpentorati Carpentras, France. * Cassale Majori Cassale Maggiore, Milan. * Cassale _Sancti_ Euaxii Casal of S. Evaxius, Montferrat. * Cassellæ and Cassellis Cassel, Italy, near Turin. Cassilia Cashel, Ireland. Castellum Aquarum Baden, Switzerland. Castellum Cattorum Cassel, Germany. † Castellum Nozanum Nizza, Italy, near Lucca. Castra Alata Edinburgh, Scotland. Castra Constantia Constance, Switzerland. Castra Ulpia Cleve, Germany, † Cecerræ Cervera, Catalonia, Spain. Cella Zell, Germany. Celurca Montross, Scotland. * Chablitz Chablies, France. * Chamberii Chambery, France. † Chilonium Kiel, Lower Saxony. Chrysopolis. _See_ Bisuntii. Cibinii Hermanstadt, Transylvania. Cicestria Chichester, Sussex. Circestria Cirencester, Gloucestershire. Civitas Chester and Caerleon. * Civitas Austriæ Not Vienna in Austria, but a city of Friul in the state of Venice. Claudia. Claudia castra Gloucester. Clavasii Chivas _or_ Chivasio and Chivazzio, Piedmont. Clivia Cleve, Germany. Clocheria Clogher, Ireland. Cluanum Kiloon, Ireland. Cluniaci Cluni, France. * Coburgi and Koburgi Coburg, Germany. * Codaniæ. _See_ Hafniæ. Colippo St. Sebastian, Portugal. * Colle _or_ Collis Colle, Tuscany. Colonia Agrippina.--Col: Ag: Colon: Agrip: Cologne, Germany. Colonia Allobrogum--Col: Allob: Geneva, Switzerland. Colonia Augusta London. * Coloniæ--Colon: Cologne, Germany. † Colonia Julia Romana, and Colonia Romulensis Seville, Spain. * Comi Como, Italy. Complutum Alcala, New Castile, Spain. Condercum Chester-le-Street, Durham. † Condivincum-Nannetum Nantes, France. † Confluentes, _or_ Confluentia Coblentz, France. † Conimbrica Coimbra, Portugal. * Constantiæ Constance, Germany. * Constantinopoli Constantinople, Turkey. Conventria Coventry, Warwickshire. Coroagia Cork, Ireland. † Cortona A town of Tuscany. * Cracoviæ Cracow, Poland. † Crema Capital of Cremasco, Italy. * Cremonæ Cremona, Italy. Crisopolis Parma, Italy. Croca Cracow, Poland. * Monaster. S. Cucufatis Monastery of St. Cucufat, near Barcelona. * Culemburgi Culemburg, Dutch Guelderland. * Cusentiæ Cosenza, _or_ Cosence, Naples, capital of Calabria. † Cusurgis Prague, capital of Bohemia. † Cygnea Zuickaw, _or_ Zwickau, Upper Saxony.

Dantisci Dantzick. * Daventriæ Deventer, capital of Overyssel. * Delphis Delft, Holland. † Derpatum, _or_ Torpatum Derp, Russia. † Dertosa Tortosa, Spain. Deunana Doncaster, Yorkshire. † Dillingia Dillengen, Swabia. Divione Dijon, France. Divisæ Devizes, Wiltshire. † Divona Cadurci Cahors, France. † Dola apud Sequanos Dole, France. * Dolæ Dole, France. * Domus fratrum Communis Vitæ Vallis Sanctæ Mariæ. A society of monks in the diocese of Rheingau, near Mentz, Germany. Dorcestria Dorchester, Oxfordshire. Dorobernia Canterbury, Kent. Dorsetia Dorchester, Oxfordshire. Dresa Dresden, Saxony. † Duacum Douay, France. † Dublinum Dublin, Ireland. † Duisburgum, _or_ Teutoburgum Duisburg, Westphalia. Dumnoriorum Exeter, Devonshire. Dunelmum Durham. Dunum Down, Ireland. Durnium Dorchester, Oxfordshire. Durobrovæ Rochester, Kent. Durobrus Rochester, Kent. Durocornovium Cirencester, Gloucestershire. † Durocorturum Reims, _or_ Rheims, France.

Eblana Dublin, Ireland. † Ebora Evora, Portugal. Eboracum--Ebor: York. † Edinburgum. _See_ Aneda. * Eistetæ. _See_ Eustadiæ. † Elbenga Elbing, Western Prussia. † Elna Perpignan, France. * Eltwilæ. _See_ Alta Villæ. Elwa St. Asaph, N. Wales. † Embricum, _or_ Embrica Emmeric, Duchy of Cleves, Germany. * Engaddi, _or_ Engebal A place in Switzerland. † Engolismum Angoulême, France. * Erfordiæ Erfurt, Upper Saxony. † Erfurtum Erfurt, Upper Saxony. * Ergoviæ. Same as Beronis Villæ. * Essii, Æssii, and Œxii Jesi, in Ancona, Italy. Esslingæ Eslingen, Suabia, Wirtemberg. * Eustadii, _or_ Eistetæ Neustadt, Germany. † Exonia--Exon: Exeter, Devonshire.

Falmutum Falmouth, Cornwall. † Faventia Faenza, _or_ Fayence, Italy. * Ferrariæ Ferrara, Italy. Fiorenza--Fior: Florence, Italy. † Firmium, _or_ Firmum Picenum Ferma, Italy. * Fivizani A town in Italy. Flavisbriga Bilboa, Spain. * Florentiæ--Florent: Florence, Italy. † Fontanetum Comitis Fontenai-le-Comte, France. * Forilivii. The ancient Forum Livii Forli, Italy. † Forum Cornelii Imola, Italy. † Franco-Furtum-ad-Mœnum Franckfort on the Maine, Germany. † Franco-Furtum-ad-Oderam Franckfort on the Oder, Germany. † Franequera Franeker, Friesland. † Fransiscopolis Havre-de-Grace, France. * Friburgi Friburg, Swabia. * Frisingæ Freysingen, Bavaria. * Friuli. Anciently Forojulium and Forojuliensis Civitas Capital of the Frioul. * Fulginei Foligni, Italy.

Gabani. _See_ Aureliani. Gades Cadiz, Spain. * Gaiettæ Gaeta, Naples. Galliva Galway, Ireland. * Gandavi Gand or Ghent, Flanders. † Gandia A sea-port, Valentia, Spain. Gaunodurum Constantia, Switzerland. Gavanodurum Saltzburg, Germany. Gedani Dantzick. Genabus Orleans, France. * Genennæ and Genevæ Geneva. * Genuæ Genoa, Italy. † Gerunda Gironna, Spain. * Giennii Gien, France. † Giessa Giesen, Germany. Glasconia Glastonbury, Somersetshire. † Glascua Glasgow, Scotland. Glasguæ--Glasg: Glasgow, Scotland. * Gondæ, _or_ Goudæ Turgow, Holland. † Gotha A town of Upper Saxony. † Gottinga and Tullifurdum Gottingen, Lower Saxony. Gottingue Gottenburgh, Sweden. Gracchopolis Cracow, Poland. * Grudisca A town in the county of Goritz, Germany. † Graiacum Gratz, Germany. * Granatæ Granada, Spain. Gratiæ portus Havre-de-Grace, France. * Gratianopolis Grenoble, France. † Gravionarium Bamberg, Bohemia. Grenovicus Greenwich, Kent. † Gripswaldia Gripswald, Swedish Pomerania. † Groninga Groningen, United Provinces.

* Hafniæ and Codaniæ Copenhagen, Denmark. Haga Comitis--H. Com: The Hague. * Hagenoæ Haguenau, France. * Halæ Halle, Saxony. † Hala Magdeburgica, _or_ † Hala Saxonum Harderwick, Holland. * Hamburgii Hamburg, a free imperial city of Lower Saxony, in the duchy of Holstein. Hannonia Hainault, Low Countries. * Hanoviæ Probably the same with Hagenoæ. * Harlemi Harlem, Holland. * Hasselti Hasselt, Liege, Germany. Hegetmatia Lignitz, Germany. Heideba Sleswick, Denmark. * Heidelbergæ Heidelberg, Germany. Helenopolis Franckfort upon the Main. † Helmestadium Helmestadt, Brunswick, Germany. * Herbipoli Wurtzburg, Franconia, Germany. † Herbona Herborn, Germany. Hermannopolis Hermanstadt, Transylvania. Hildesia Hildesheim, Saxony. * Hispali Seville, Spain. * Holmiæ Stockholm, Sweden. Hypræ Ypres, Flanders.

Ichborough Thetford, Norfolk. Iciani Thetford, Norfolk. * Ilardæ Lerida, Catalonia, Spain. * Ingolstadii Ingolstadt, Bavaria. * Inspruc A town of Germany, in the Tyrol. Insulæ Lisle, Flanders. † Isca Damnoniorum Exeter, Devonshire. Ischalis Ilchester. Somersetshire. Isurium Aldborough, Yorkshire, _or_ Boroughbridge, Yorkshire.

* Januæ. _See_ Genuæ. † Jena A strong town of Upper Saxony, in Thuringia.

Kilchennia Kilkenny, Ireland. Kiobenhaffn Copenhagen, Denmark. * Koburgi. _See_ Coburgi. * Kuttenbergæ Kuttenberg, Bohemia. Lagecium Castleford, Yorkshire. Landava Landaff, Wales. * Lantenaci and Landenaci Loudeac, France. * Lantriguieri Treguier, France. * Laugingæ Laugingen, Swabia. * Leeuwe A fortified town of Austrian Brabant. Legecestria Leicester. * Leidæ Leyden. * Leiriæ Leiria, or Leria, Portugal. Lemgoviæ Limoges? France. * Castr. Lemovicensi Limoges, France. Leodium Liege, Netherlands. Leovardiæ Leuwarden, West Frieseland. * Leridæ. _See_ Ilardæ. Lesua Lewes, Sussex. Leucorea Wittenberg, Saxony. Leuphana Hanover. * Licii Lecce, Naples, in Otranto. * Lignicii Lignitz, Silesia. Limonum Poictiers, France. * Lipsiæ--Lips: Leipsic, Saxony. Liserpalus Liverpool, Lancashire. Litha Leith, Scotland. * Lodeaci. _See_ Lantenaci. * Londini London. Londonia London. Longovicum Lanchester, Northumberland. * Lovanii Louvain, Brabant. * Lubecæ Lubec, Holstein, Lower Saxony. Lucæ Lucca, Italy. * Lugduni Lyons, France. † Lugdunum Batavorum-- L. Bat:--Lugd: Bat:-- Lugdun: Batav: Leyden, Holland. Lugubalia Carlisle, Cumberland. Luguvallum Carlisle, Cumberland. † Lundinum Scanorum Lunden, Holstein, Lower Saxony. * Luneburgi Lunenburg, Lower Saxony. Lupfurdum Leipsic, Germany, † Lutetia--Lutet: Paris. _See_ Parisiis. Lutetiæ Parisior:-- Lutet: Par: Paris.

† Macerata A town in the marquisate of Ancona, Italy. Machlinia Meckelen, Dutch Brabant. Malines, French Brabant. * Madriti Madrid. Madus Maidstone, Kent. * Magdeburgi Magdeburg, Germany. Magontia Magontiacum Mentz, _or_ Mayence, Germany. Mancunium Manchester, Lancashire. † Manhemium Manheim, palatinate of the Rhine, Germany. † Mantua Carpetanorum Madrid. _See_ Madriti. * Mantuæ Mantua, Italy. Marchenium Roxburgh, Scotland. Marionis Lunenburg, Germany. Marionis Lubeck, Pomerland. † Marpurgum Marpurg, Hesse-Cassel, Germany. * Marsipoli Merseburg, Saxony. Martinopolis Tours, France. † Massilia Marseilles, France. * Mediolani--Mediol: Milan, Italy. * Memmingæ Meminingen, Swabia. * Messanæ Messina, Sicily. † Metæ Metz, France. Metelli castrum Middleburg, Zealand. Metelloburgus Middleburg, Zealand. * Moguntiæ--Mogunt: Mayence _or_ Mentz, Germany. * Monachii Munich, Bavaria. Monacum Munich, Bavaria. * Monasterii Munster, Westphalia. * Monast. Montis Serrati Mount Serrat. A very high mountain in Spain, on which is an ancient monastery, dedicated to the Virgin Mary. † Mons Albanus Montauban, France. Mons Badonicus Bath, Somersetshire. Mons Dolorosus Stirling, Scotland. † Mons-Monachorum A place near Bamberg, Bohemia. † Mons-Pessulanus Montpellier, France. † Mons Regalis Mont Real or Mont Royal, Sicily. † Mons-Regius, _or_ Regiomons Königsberg, Prussia. Mons Rosarum Montross, Scotland. Mons Solis Bath, Somersetshire. Monstrolium Montreuil, France. † Moscua Moscow, Russia. * Monteregali Mondovi, Piedmont. Montes Mons, Low Countries. * Murciæ Murcia, Spain. † Mussipontum Pont-à-Mousson, France. * Mutinæ Modena, Italy.

† Nanceium Nancy, France. * Nannetibus Nantz or Nantes, France. * Neapoli Naples, Italy. † Nemausus Nismes, France. Neoportus Newport, Isle of Wight. Nerobergæ Nuremberg, Germany. † Nidrosia Drontheim, Norway. * Nonantulæ Nonente? a small town in the duchy of Modena, Italy. Nordovicum Norwich, Norfolk. Noribergæ--Norib: Nuremberg, Germany. Norica Nuremberg, Germany. Noricorum Nuremberg, Germany. * Norimbergæ--Norimb: Nuremberg, Franconia, Germany. Norvicum Norwich, Norfolk. * Novæ Pilznæ Pilsen, Bohemia. Novamœnia Weisenburg. * Noviomagii Nimeguen, Dutch Guelderland. * Novis Novi, Genoa, Italy. Novum Castrum Newcastle-upon-Tine. * Nozani Nizza, Lucca, Italy.

Oenipons Inspruck, Tyrol. * Offenburgi Offenburg, Swabia. * Olomuci Olmutz, Moravia. † Olysippo, _or_ Ulisippo Lisbon. _See_ Ulyssipone. † Onate, _or_ Ognatæ In Spain. * Oppenheimii Oppenheim, Palatinate of the Rhine, Germany. * Ortonnæ Ortona del Mare, Sicily. † Ovietum Oviedo, Spain. * Oxonii--Oxon: Oxford.

† Paderborna Paderborn, Westphalia. Padova Padua, Italy. * Palentiæ, _or_ Palencia A town of Spain, in Leon. † Palum Pau, France. * Pampelunæ and Pompeiopoli Pampeluna, Spain. * Panormi Palermo, Sicily. * Papiæ and Ticini Pavia, Italy. * Parisiis Paris. * Parmæ Parma, Italy. Parthenopolis Magdeburg. Pastovia Padstow, Cornwall. * Pataviæ vel Passavii Passau, Bavaria. * Patavii Padua, Italy. Pax Augusta Badajos, Spain. Pembrochia Pembroke, Wales. Pendenium Pendennis, Cornwall. * Perpiniani Perpignan, France. * Perusiæ Perausa, Italy. Pessulanus Montpellier, France. Pestini Pest. † Petropolis St. Petersburg, Russia. Pettuaria Beverley, Yorkshire. Phabiranum Bremen, Westphalia. * Pheibiæ. _See_ Plebisacii. Pheugarum Halberstadt, Lower Saxony. Philyre Lindaw, Germany. * Phorcæ Piacenza Placentia, Italy. * Pictavii Poitiers, France. * Pinarolii Pignerol, Piedmont. Pintia Vaccæorum Valladolid, Spain. * Pisæ Pisa, Tuscany, Italy. * Pisauri Pesaro, Italy. * Pisciæ Pescia, Tuscany, Italy. * Placentiæ Placentia or Placenza, Italy. * Plebisacii and Pheibiæ Piobe de Sacco, Italy. * Polliano A town of Italy, in the Veronese. † Pollianum Rus. _See_ Polliano. Pompeiopoli. _See_ Pampelunæ. † Pompelon. _See_ Pampelunæ. † Pons Oeni Inspruck, Tyrol, Germany. * Portesii Portici, a village near Naples; _or_ Portenza, a town of ditto. Portus magnus Portsmouth. Posonium Presburgh, Germany. Povisia Powis, Wales. Præsidium Warwick. Prætoria Augusta Cronstadt * Pragæ Prague, Bohemia. Probatopolis Schaffhausen, Switzerland. * Promentour * Provini Provins, France.

Quercetum Quesnoy, Low Countries. Quintinopolis S. Quintin, Picardy. † Quitoa Quito, Peru, South America.

* Ratisbonæ Ratisbon, Bavaria. † Redones, _or_ Condate Rennes, France. * Reenen Reinen, Venetian territory. * Regii Reggio, Italy. † Regiomons. _See_ Mons Regius. † Regium Lepidi. _See_ Regii. † Remi Reims, _or_ Rheims, France. * Reutlingæ Reutlingen, Swabia, Wirtemberg. * Rhedonibus Rennes, France. Rhodopolis Rostock, Lower Saxony. * Romæ Rome. Rosarum urbs Rostock, Lower Saxony. * Rostochii Rostock, Mecklenberg, Lower Saxony. † Roterodamum Rotterdam, Holland. * Rothomagi Rouen, France. † Rubens Mons A Priory of the order of Clugny. † Rupella Rochelle, France. † Rutheni Rodez, France.

† Sæna Sienna, Tuscany. _See_ Senia. † Sætobris Setuval _or_ Setubal, St. Ubes, Portugal. † Salernum Salerno, Naples. † Salinæ Salins, France. † Salisburgum Saltzburg, Bavaria. * Salmanticæ Salamanca, Leon, Spain. † Sanctus Ursius. _See_ Ursius Sanctus. Sandvicus Sandwich, Kent. Santonum portus Rochelle, France. Sarisberia Salisbury, Wiltshire. * Savilliani Savigliano, Piedmont. * Savonæ Savona, Genoa, Italy. * Scandiani Scandiano, Italy. * Schedami Schiedam, Holland. * Schœnhoven Schoonhoven, Holland. * Segobricæ Segorbe, Spain. † Segodunum. _See_ Rutheni. † Segontia Siguenza, New Castile, Spain. * Senis Sens?, France. Sestiæ Aix, Provence. Severia Salisbury, Wiltshire. * Sleswici Sleswick, Denmark. * Soncini Soncino, in the Cremonese, Italy. * Soræ, _vel_ Soriæ Whether Sora a town of Naples, or Soria, a town of Spain, in Old Castile, is not known. Sorbiodunum and Sorviodunum Salisbury, Wiltshire. Monast. Sortem A monastery of the Præmonstrants, in Suevia, in Germany. * Spiræ Spire, Germany. Stereontium Cassel, Germany. † Stockholmia and Holmia Stockholm, Sweden. † Subiacus Sublac, or Subbiaco, a monastery in the Campagna di Roma. Sundis Straelsund, Pomerania.

† Taraco Tarragona, Catalonia, Spain. Taradunum Friburg, Germany. * Tarrazonæ Tarazona, Arragon, Spain. * Tarvisii Treviso, Italy. * Taurini Turin, Sardinia. Tava Tinmouth, Devonshire. † Telo Martius Toulon, France. Tergestum Trieste, Istria. Theoci curia Tewksbury, Gloucestershire. Theonis villa Thionville, Luxemburg. Theodorodunum and Theorodunum Wells, Somersetshire. * Thessalonicæ Salonichi, the ancient Thessalonica, Macedonia. † Ticinum. _See_ Papiæ. † Tigernum Thiers, France. † Tigurum and Tigurinus Pagus Zuric, Switzerland. Tileburgum Tilbury, on the Thames. * Toleti Toledo, New Castile, Spain. † Tolosa-Palladia-Tectosagum Toulouse, France. It was not at this town, but a small town of Biscaye, that the editions printed in the fifteenth century with the imprint _Tolosæ_ were executed. Tornatum Tournay, Netherlands. * Trajecti. _See_ Ultrajecti. Trajecti ad Oderam Frankfort upon the Oder. Trajecti ad Rhenum-- Traj: ad Rhen: Utrecht, Holland. Trajecti Batavorum-- Traj: Bat: Utrecht, Holland. † Trajectum ad Mosam Maestricht, Netherlands. * Trecis Troyes, France. † Tranquebaria Tranquebar, coast of Coromandel, Hindostan. Trento Trent. Treveri Treves, Germany. † Trevi apud Ancones. _See_ Trevii. * Trevii Trevi, Umbria, Italy. * Tridenti Trent, Germany. Tripontium Towcester, Northamptonshire. Tuberum Rotenberg, Germany. * Tubingæ Tubingen, Swabia, Wirtemberg. Tuesis Berwick-upon-Tweed. Tulifurgium Brunswick, Germany. * Turonis Tours, France. * Tusculani Lacus Benaci Tusculanum, Lombardy. [? Tusculum, now Frescati.] Tybur. Tyburis Tivoli, Italy. * Tzennæ. _See_ Zinnæ.

† Ulisippo. _See_ Ulyssipone. * Ulmæ Ulm, Swabia. * Ultrajecti--Ult: Ultraj: Utrecht, United Provinces. * Ulyssipone Lisbon, Portugal. † Upsale In Upland, Sweden. Uratislavia Breslaw, Silesia. * Urbini Urbino, Italy. Uriconium Worcester. † Ursius Sanctus A place near Vicenza. † Urso Ossuna, Andalusia, Spain. Utini Udino, Venetian Friuli, Italy. Utricesium Utrecht, Holland.

Vagniacum Maidstone, Kent. † Valentia Valence, France. * Valentiæ Valentia, Spain. Valentianæ. Valentinianæ Valenciennes. * Vallisoleti Valladolid, Old Castile, Spain. † Varsovia Warsaw, Poland. Vellocases Baieux. Venantodunum Huntington. † Venetia. _See_ Venetiis. * Venetiis Venice, Italy. Venta Belgarum Winchester, Hampshire. * Vercellis Vercelli, Piedmont. Veredunum. Verodunum Verdun, Lorraine. * Veronæ Verona, Italy. Verovicum Warwick. Versaliæ Versailles, France. † Vesontio Besançon, France. _See_ Bisuntii. * Vicentiæ Vicence, Italy. * Viennæ Austriæ Vienna _or_ Wien, the metropolis of Austria. * Viennæ in Delphinatu Vienne, Dauphiny. Viennæ Pannoniæ Vienna, Austria. † Vigornia Worcester. Villa Faustini St Edmond’s Bury. † Villafranca Villefranche, France. † Vilna Wilna, Lithuania, Poland. Vindinum Cenomanum _or_ Subdinum, Mans, the capital of La Sarthe. † Vindobona--Vindob: Vienna, Austria. Vindobonensis--Vindob: Vienna, Austria. Vindocinum Vendosme, France. Vindogladia Winburn, Dorsetshire. Vinegia--Vin: Vineg: Venice, Italy. * Viqueriæ Viqueria, probably some town in Italy. Some think that Voghera, in the duchy of Milan, is meant. † Virmaranum Guimaraens, Portugal. * Viterbii Viterbo, Italy. † Vittemberga, _or_ Vittebarea Wittemberg, Germany. Voliba Falmouth, Cornwall. † Vratislavia Breslaw, Silesia, Germany.

Warovie. Warsavia Warsaw, Poland. Warwicus Warwick. Wellæ Wells, Somersetshire. * Westmonasterii--Westmonast: Westminster. Wigornia Worcester. Windesora Windsor, Berkshire. Winterbergæ Winterberg, Bohemia. Wintonia--Winton: Winchester, Hampshire. Wittenbergæ Wittenberg, Saxony. Wormacia Worms, Germany.

* Xericæ “Yerica.--_Oppid. nobili in regno Valentino._ PANZER. (Serigo?) I know nothing more of this place.”--_Dr. A. Clarke._

* Zamoræ Zamora, Leon, Spain. † Zamoscium Zamoski, a strong town of Poland, in Red Russia, now the Austrian kingdom of Lodomeria. * Zinnæ _or_ Tzennæ A monastery belonging to the order of Cistercian monks in Saxony. † Zuvolla. _See_ Zwollis. * Zwollis Zwoll, Overyssel, United Provinces.

NARROW. The technical name of a piece of furniture equal in width to a narrow quotation.

NATURAL HISTORY. Explanation of some Terms used in Natural History.

Aculeated. Sharpened. Amphibious. Capable of living by land or water. Animalcules. Small animals, generally invisible without the assistance of the microscope. Annulated. Marked with rings. Antlers. Horns overhanging the brows. Aquatic. Living or growing in the water. Bifid. Divided into two parts, or cleft. Bimaculated. With two spots, or two series of spots. Bivalve. With two shells or openings. Callosity. A hard lump, an excrescence. Canine. Belonging to the dog kind. Carinated. In the shape of a keel. Carnivorous. Feeding on flesh. Cartilaginous. Furnished with cartilages. Cere. A skin over the bill of birds; sometimes movable, as in parrots. Cetaceous. Of the whale kind. Cinereous. Of the colour of ashes. Columbine. Belonging to the dove kind. Cordiform. Heart-shaped. Crustaceous. Covered with a crust; as lobsters, &c. Digitated. Having the feet divided into parts, like toes or fingers, as in dogs. Dorsal. Belonging to the back. Exsanguineous. Without blood, as worms. Entomology. A description of insects. Feline. Belonging to the cat kind. Ferruginous. Of an iron or rust colour. Frugivorous. Feeding on seeds. Furcated. Forked. Gallinaceous. Belonging to the hen kind. Gestation. The time of going with young. Granivorous. Feeding on grain. Gregarious. Associating together. Herbivorous. Feeding on grass. Ichthyology. A description of fishes. Imbricated. Tiled or plated over each other. Incubation. The act of a bird sitting on her eggs. Insectivorous. Feeding on insects. Lateral. Belonging to the side, placed sideways. Migratory. Coming and going at certain seasons. Multivalve. With many shells or openings. Nascent. Very young, growing. Nictitating. Winking; applied to a membrane with which birds cover their eyes at pleasure. Obfuscated. Of a darkish colour. Olfactory. Relating to smell. Ornithology. A description of birds. Oviparous. Laying eggs. Parturition. The act of bringing forth young. Passerine. Belonging to the sparrow kind. Patulous. Open, wide. Pectoral. Belonging to the breast. Pendulous. Hanging. Piscivorous. Feeding on fishes. Predaceous. Formed to pursue prey. Quadrifid. Divided into four parts. Ruminating. Chewing the cud. Scabrous. Rough. Scapulars. Shoulders. Semilunar. In the form of a half-moon. Setaceous. Hairy. Subulated. Formed like an awl. Testaceous. Covered with a shell; as oysters, &c. Trifurcated. Three-forked. Truncated. Appearing as if cut off. Umbrageous. Spreading. Univalve. With one shell or opening. Ventral. Belonging to the belly. Viviparous. Bringing forth the young alive. Webbed. Connected with a membrane, as the claws of aquatic birds. Zoologists. Writers on animated nature. Zoology. The history of animated nature. Zoophite. An animal plant, or sensitive vegetable.

NAUTICAL ALMANACK.

9 Geo. 4. c. 66. s. 2. “And whereas the Publication of the Nautical Almanack, constructed by proper Persons for the finding of the Longitude at Sea, is of great Importance to the Safety of Ships and Persons, and highly conducive to the general Interests of Commerce and Navigation; be it therefore enacted, That it shall and may be lawful to and for the Lord High Admiral, or the Commissioners for executing the Office of Lord High Admiral, of the United Kingdom of _Great Britain_ and _Ireland_, for the Time being, to cause such Nautical Almanacks, or other useful Table or Tables, which he or they shall from Time to Time judge necessary and useful in order to facilitate the Method of discovering the Longitude at Sea, to be constructed, printed, published, and vended, free of all Stamp Duty whatever, in the same Manner as the Commissioners under the said Act of the Fifty-eighth Year of His late Majesty’s Reign might or could do; and that every Person who, without the special Licence and Authority of the Lord High Admiral or Commissioners for executing the Office of Lord High Admiral aforesaid for the Time being, to be signified under the Hand of the Secretary of the Admiralty for the Time being, shall print, publish, or vend, or cause to be printed, published, or vended, any such Almanack or Almanacks, or other Table or Tables, shall, for every Copy of such Almanack or Table so printed, published, or vended, forfeit and pay the Sum of Twenty Pounds, to be recovered with Costs of Suit, by any Person to be authorised for that Purpose by the Lord High Admiral or Commissioners for executing the Office of Lord High Admiral aforesaid, (such Authority to be signified under the Hand of the Secretary of the Admiralty as aforesaid,) by Action of Debt, Bill, Plaint, or Information, in any of His Majesty’s Courts of Record at _Westminster_; and that the Proceeds of the said Penalty, when recovered, shall be paid and applied to the Use of the Royal Hospital for Seamen at _Greenwich_.”

NEAR CHEEK.

That cheek of the press which is on the side at which the pressmen stand to beat and pull.

NECK OF A LETTER.

So much of the punch as is sunk into the matrice is called the neck; and when that letter is cast of metal, it is so much as comes above the square of the shank, viz. above the beard.--_M._

NEST FRAMES.--_M._ The same as our CASE RACKS, which _see_.

NEWS HOUSE.

A printing office in which newspapers only are printed; a term used to distinguish them from book houses and job houses.

NEWSPAPERS.

The following report on the regular mode of working on Newspapers, contains much interesting information respecting this branch of the printing business.

I feel gratified in being able to give a copy of it, as it is little known beyond the circle of the newspaper department, and I am satisfied it will prove serviceable to the trade at large, for newspapers are now frequently printed in book houses, where the regulations connected with them are not generally known: and I also think I am acting in accordance with the motives of the Committee that drew it up, in giving it more publicity; for they say, a Committee was appointed “to draw up, and circulate, for the information of the trade, a statement of the regular mode of working on newspapers--‘to guide the ignorant, to guard the unwary;’ to assist them in their labours, and to maintain that harmony which should ever subsist between two branches in one profession.” And, “your Committee have extracted from, or inserted at length, every document relating to regulations or prices since 1785, which they trust will not be considered uninteresting, and, handed down as records, may yet be useful.”

“REPORT

“Of a Committee appointed to draw up a Statement of the regular Mode of working on Newspapers, for the Information of the Trade; to examine Documents, and to report the same.--_Read July_ 29, 1820.

“THE object which your Committee were directed to accomplish (that of giving a fair scale of work, mode, time, and price, on _all Newspapers_, wherever published) has been entered into with zeal on their parts, and they trust will be found to your satisfaction. They have examined the bases of all official agreements, and all acknowledged and understood rules; and have particularly adhered to their instructions, by keeping in view, ‘that it was to guide the ignorant, to prevent the evil intentions of the unprincipled, and, if possible, to form a closer bond of union among yourselves.’

“Laws are rendered more sacred, more valid, by age; and in performance of the task assigned them, the Committee commenced their labours by tracing the Regulations for News Work back to a certain period, in order to support them in their declaration, that they had been introduced on fair principles, that they had been cordially agreed to by the Masters, had been acted upon by the employed for so great a length of time, and that any innovation made on those regulations by an employer, or _set of men_ acting for themselves, without the concurrence of the general body of News Compositors, should be opposed, and those concerned in such an attempt treated as enemies to their fellow-workmen, and marked as acting inimically to the interests of their profession.

“It was necessary for your Committee, for the maintenance of the superstructure, to examine its foundation; with this view they have, from oral testimony, been enabled to collect the size and price of various Newspapers from 1770. They consisted of 16 small columns, some 18, some 19, and others 20 ems Long Primer wide. The galley was 130 or 132 lines, and 50 _after-lines_, Long Primer; Brevier galley 96, _after-lines_ 38. (The only exception was the old _Daily Advertiser_, which contained 12 columns of 25 ems Long Primer wide, the galley in proportion.) The prices were, full hands 27_s._; supernumeraries 13_s._; galley 2_s._ 2_d._; 5_d._ per thousand; and _over hours_ 6_d._ _Supernumeraries_ (a term which explains itself) were not known ten years prior to this date. Most of the papers were small folios; and as they were nearly all connected with, or done in Book-houses, the eldest apprentice, upon a press of matter, was usually called in to assist. Upon the subdivision of the labour into galleys, and the size of the papers extending, a man was employed if any deficiency arose in the quantity required. Advertisements increased; the use of small type was extended, and the _Supernumerary_ became a fixture.

“Prior to 1776, controversial essays, domestic news, and extracts from the official communications in the London Gazette, appear to have filled the small columns of the Journals; but the American war commencing this year, they assumed a new consequence, by first venturing to give daily Reports of the Debates in Parliament.

“In 1777 there were seven Morning Papers, eight of three times, one twice a week, and two weekly. The first _Sunday Paper_ came out in 1778; in a few weeks it was followed by a second: and a third was brought out in the succeeding year. The weekly Journals paid 24_s._ In 1780 a new Daily Journal arose, with a different appearance from the others, which seems to have induced a further alteration. The prices remained the same, but the employment of more hands was rendered necessary. The hour of beginning varied, some commencing business at eleven, others at two, and some so late as three o’clock.

“In 1784, the first year after the peace, another Journal started for public favour, in which Minion was introduced. The old method of display was discarded, a new taste appeared in the arrangement of the matter in the inner form, and the former advertisement style was completely exploded. Rivalry commenced, and the other Newspapers soon made a correspondent change. Your Committee have thus reached the period when they meet with the first printed document relating to the composing part of the printing business. It is a request, in the form of a Circular, by the _body_ of Compositors, for an advance of _one halfpenny_ (Book-work being then paid 4_d._ per 1000), dated April 6, 1785, and consisting of eight propositions; which were not finally determined upon by the Employers till the 25th of November following. The proposition and answer relating to News-work were as follow:

“‘PROP. 4. That the Compositors employed on Daily Newspapers, now paid at the rate of 27_s._ per week, be in future paid 1_l._ 11_s._ 6_d._ per week, and over hours paid as at present--_Answ._ This cannot be a matter of general regulation, as the trouble of every paper differs from that of another.’

“Your Committee have no other document of this date: it will be observed that the prices were low, and that the over hours were paid for; but it was considered impossible to make the request ‘a matter of general regulation,’ as every Journal differed in its trouble from another. The Book-men, however, received an advance of one-eighth, or 2_s._ 6_d._ in the pound, and the establishments in Book-houses varied from 1_l._ 1_s._ to 1_l._ 7_s._

“1786.--The advance on Book-work commenced on the 1st of January, and in the month of March following the Newsmen, on Daily Papers only, received a rise of 4_s._ 6_d._, which made the price for full hands 1_l._ 11_s._ 6_d._, and for Supernumeraries 15_s._; the galley 2_s._ 6_d._ A few Journals only of the other class rose to 27_s._ At this time there were eight Morning Papers, eight of three times a week, two Weekly, and three Sunday Journals. In 1788 the first _Daily_ Evening Paper made its appearance, and the men received the same price as the Morning Papers; a second came out in 1791, and was paid in like manner.

“1793.--For a number of years the Compositors employed on Book-work had been labouring under an intolerable grievance, and although they did not demand a rise per thousand, requested, as a new regulation, that the head and direction lines of pages, and the en and em quadrats at the sides, should be paid for. Their Circular was dated the 14th January, and on the 11th March following, the masters agreed to the proposition of paying the head and direction lines, but not the ens and ems.

“The News department appears to have been in full employment at this period. By a strong competition for public favour (which commenced, as already observed, prior to the termination of the American war, and from the year 1785 to 1793), the Journals underwent a most material alteration. It was a remarkable epoch, including the most eventful seven years of the last century. The disarrangements, both civil and political, concomitant to a return to peace after a long war--the wars in India--the troubles in Germany, in Flanders, Brabant, Holland--the French Revolution--and the commencement of a war with France--all occurring within the dates just mentioned, caused a strong political feeling in the public mind; of course, information from all quarters was eagerly sought, and as readily given by the Editors of the Daily Journals, among whom, as with their readers, party spirit rose to its utmost height, and no expence was spared to gratify it. In this period nineteen _new_ journals put forth their claims for public support--the majority, however, were ‘born but to die!’--two of the older Papers also expired; but their places were occupied by _seven_ juniors. The number now amounted to eleven Morning and two Evening Papers; seven of three times a week, one Weekly, and five Sunday papers. An alteration in the method of display, and a new mode in the arrangement of the matter, became now very general. One Journal went beyond the rest, by its introduction of French rules, the small capitals for particular paragraphs, and discarding nearly all the double letters, and the _long s_. Your Committee are also enabled to state, by comparing the modes of work prior to 1785, with the necessary alterations at the period they have now mentioned, that a complete revolution was also effected in the _nature_ of News-work. It became necessary, therefore, that the price should keep pace with the labour, and an advance was solicited. The first printed document, _solely_ from Newsmen, is dated April 4, 1793, signed by 145 Newsmen, and their request was supported by the signatures of 281 Bookmen. It contains four propositions:--the first for an advance of 4_s._ 6_d._ per week on _Morning_ and _Evening_ papers; the second related to the _hours_ of working and the charge for _over-hours_, which then was but 6_d._ per hour; the third, to Papers published _three times a week_; and the fourth, to supernumeraries, but it did not state their price. All these propositions were modified ten years afterwards.

“The address which accompanied these propositions, and the requests made in it, being so applicable to the present mode of work, your Committee are satisfied with defending every iota requited by their predecessors. Although twenty-seven years have elapsed since they were submitted to the employers, yet, if required at the present moment, the same arguments might be used in their support. In fact, they must be considered the foundation-stones of the edifice. Your Committee will introduce the document.

“_London, April 4, 1793._ “‘SIR,

“‘The Compositors employed on Newspapers, impressed with the opinion of your candour in hearing and redressing any real grievances they may complain of, presume to submit to your consideration the following statement:

“‘Previous to the year 1786, the weekly salary of _Daily_ Newspaper Compositors was 1_l._ 7_s._, a sum which, considering the regularity and moderation of the hours of attendance, was thought fully adequate to their trouble. Owing, however, to a competition for Public favour among the various newspapers, by giving a long detail of Parliamentary Debates, entering at large into the politics of Europe, and the irregularity and uncertainty of the arrival of mails, the hours of attendance were necessarily increased, which, together with the enhanced price of Provisions, made an advance of salary necessary, and which was at that time cheerfully acquiesced in by the Proprietors of _Daily_ Newspapers, as perfectly reasonable; but no advance was then given to _Evening_ Papers.

“‘The Compositors on both _Daily_ and _Evening Papers_, upon a comparative view of the trouble and attendance requisite at that period and at the present time, and the still increased price of the necessaries of life, humbly propose and request an addition to their Salary, which they trust the Gentlemen Proprietors of Newspapers will not think unreasonable, when the following circumstances are taken into consideration:

“‘That at the rate of twelve hours’ Composition, and at least two hours’ Distribution, the present Salary of Compositors employed on _Daily Papers_ amounts to no more than Fourpence Halfpenny an hour, which, considering the irregular hours of attendance, working by night, and on Sundays, and of being constantly at command, the Compositors humbly think, and trust, the Gentlemen Proprietors of Newspapers will agree with them in opinion is by no means adequate to their labour.

“‘That as Compositors on _Evening Papers_ obtained no advance in the year 1786, and that as their labour has been gradually increasing ever since that time, it is hoped their joining in the present application will not be thought unreasonable.

“‘It is humbly proposed, for the above reasons, that an increase should take place upon the Salaries of Compositors on Newspapers, in the following proportion, viz.

“‘I. That an advance of 4_s._ 6_d._ per week take place on the present Salary of every Compositor fully employed on _Daily Papers_.

“‘II. That if, owing to the length of Proceedings in Parliament, or other late Matter, the Compositors employed on Daily Papers should be detained above twelve hours on Saturday, to be reckoned from the time of beginning to compose on Friday, they be paid Sixpence per hour extra for the same, or an equal proportion of time allowed on Sunday, in the same manner as is usual on other Days of the Week.

“‘III. That 3_s._ be added to the present Weekly Salary of Compositors fully employed on _Evening Papers published three times a week_.

“‘IV. That the Salary of Supernumeraries employed on either of the above be increased in proportion.

“‘These, Sir, are the propositions submitted to you, to be laid before the Gentlemen Proprietors, not doubting but that the reasonableness of the Compositors’ demands will be evident to you, and that it will meet with your approbation and concurrence, especially when it is considered that the advance they require is so nearly proportionate to that lately obtained on Book-work.’

“It will be necessary to state that the terms _Evening Papers_ used in this document, allude only to the desire expressed in the third proposition. The words _Daily Newspapers_, repeated in the second and fourth paragraphs of the Address, and in the first proposition, sufficiently show that no distinction was intended to be made between _Daily Morning_ and _Daily Evening Papers_. But this request of the Newsmen did not seem to be answered with cordiality by the Masters, for your Committee have a copy of the Report of the News Committee, dated April 20, 1793, which, after mentioning the names of 15 Delegates present, at two in the afternoon, previous to the general meeting to be held at seven in the evening, states

“‘That, pursuant to a printed circular Letter, signed ‘JOHN BELL,’ the Committee adjourn to Anderton’s Coffee-house, to hold a conference as requested, on some Propositions laid before the Printers and Proprietors of Newspapers, by the Journeymen employed by them.--Adjourned accordingly.

“‘_Six o’Clock_, P.M.

“‘The Delegates having returned to the Hole-in-the-Wall, report to the General Meeting.

“‘That they met with the Representatives from the following Newspapers, viz.

LEDGER, ORACLE, TIMES HERALD, TRUE BRITON, AND WORLD, SUN, DIARY. MORNING CHRONICLE, STAR,

“‘That these Gentlemen did not chuse to hold any conference on the Subject to which your Delegates were invited.

“‘That the professional Printers present, though personally requested, declined entering upon the Subject, the Discussion of which your Delegates were required to attend.

“‘That the above-mentioned _John Bell_, instead of attending to the Business to which they were expressly called, endeavoured to persuade them to accede to the following Resolutions, as particularly _advantageous_ to the Employers and _Employed_, viz.

“‘_April 20, 1793._

“‘At an Adjourned Meeting of the Proprietors and Representatives of the Daily Newspapers, held this Day at Anderton’s Coffee-house, to consider the Propositions of the Daily Newspaper Compositors,

“‘Present,--The Representatives of the _Ledger_,--_Herald_,--_World_,--_Morning Chronicle_,--_Oracle_,--_True Briton_.

“‘Considering the Requisitions and Pretensions of the Newspaper Compositors in the most extensive and liberal Points of View, so far as they are connected with the fair Interests of their Employers, it was resolved, to recommend the Prices and Regulations in future for Newspaper work to be fixed on the following Plan:

“‘That each regular Compositor be paid One Pound Fourteen Shillings _per_ Week.

“‘That the Hours of regular Attendance for composing, be from Three o’Clock in the Afternoon until the Paper goes to Press.

“‘That whenever the Time of going to Press shall exceed Three o’Clock in the Morning, the Times of Attendance on the same Day shall be in the following Manner, _viz_.

“‘When the Paper goes to Press at-- 3 to begin at 3 8 5 4 3 9 6 5 3 10 7 6 4 11 8 7 4 12 9

“‘That the Supernumerary Compositors shall be allowed one Shilling _per_ Week over and above their present Pay, supposing that such Supernumerary shall compose _one Column_ per _Day_, and so in Proportion.

“‘That your Delegates felt the Indignity offered to them, but bore it with the Patience which the Justice of the cause in which they were engaged only could warrant.

“‘That your Delegates, with a becoming Dignity, rejected the Resolutions of the said _John Bell_.

“‘That your Delegates, from the Consideration of the Labour required, find their first Proposition unanswered, unopposed, and therefore just.’

“‘_Ten o’Clock_, P.M.

“‘The GENERAL MEETING unanimously approve of the Conduct of the Delegation; and further resolve,

“‘That the Original Propositions standing uncontroverted, the same be strictly adhered to.’

“The Resolution in the last paragraph of this Report was most rigidly adhered to; and your Committee cannot but lament, that the first attempt of your brethren to introduce _Laws and Regulations_ for the reciprocal benefit of the employer and employed, was met by such proposition on the part of one Proprietor, that, in order to carry their point, they were obliged to enter into a Resolution that a general notice of quitting their situations, according to the custom of the trade, should be given. Before the expiration of the fortnight, however, an accommodation was proposed by the Employers individually; but upon the principle that a material difference existed, both in labour and comfort, between an Evening and a Morning Paper, the Newsmen agreed to a distinction being made in the price. Morning Papers received the sum required of 4_s._ 6_d._, but Evening Papers only 2_s._ 6_d._ The wages of the former were 1_l._ 16_s._; Supernumeraries 17_s._; the galley 2_s._ 10_d._: the Evening Papers were 34_s._; Supernumeraries 16_s._; the galley 2_s._ 8_d._ Within this period the term _Assistants_ was first recognized. Your Committee are not enabled to state whether any satisfactory agreement was entered into with respect to the second Proposition of the Journeymen relating to the commencing work on Sundays. It would appear that they only requested that day’s indulgence, for they already possessed it on the others. Some of the Journals at this time paid but 6_d._ per hour, while others, more liberal, paid on those of the Morning 7½_d._ and on the Evening 7_d._ for over-hours or Assistants.

“In the month of October, 1793, the same year of the rise, your Committee find that the Journeymen had occasion, from the accumulation of labour on Daily Newspapers, to object to the employment of Apprentices, as a strong desire was evinced, at this period, of returning to the system, by employing _run-aways_, or _turn-overs_, as they were denominated. The Employers conceiving they had been _forced_ to accede to the rise in the month of April preceding, appeared determined to take advantage of the men, by paying themselves for their defeat by the difference of price between Apprentices and Journeymen. Suspicion had been long awake that some innovation was intended, and the scheme soon developed itself; the Newsmen assembled, and entered into certain Resolutions, which, with a statement of their case, were sent round the Trade for the concurrence or disapproval of the Bookmen. They were readily adopted by the latter, and your Committee present an Extract from the Journeymen’s Address, and their Resolutions.

“‘_October 1, 1793._

“‘Can any reasonable Advocate be found for the Introduction of Apprentices on Newspapers? We do not believe there can.--A Companionship on a Newspaper, distinct and different in its Nature from Book-work, requires equal Attention, equal Exertion, and equal Interest. And can this be expected (we ask) from an Apprentice? Companionships find it their mutual interest to be watchful over each other, and see that each does an equal share; which, if not done, is easily remedied among themselves. But who is it that will say this can be done with an Apprentice? A Journeyman must be attentive, or, from the Representations of his Companions, he loses his situation. But how is this to take place in regard to Apprentices? If complaints are made to the Printer, how can he rectify them? It is evident to us that he cannot. Your time of employment is not to be forced on an Apprentice; he can refuse to work either by Night or on Sunday, and be justified in his refusal; and Magistrates _must_ sanction him. Indeed, experience has proved that it is generally impossible to keep an Apprentice to the Business on a Newspaper with regularity; they have no interest to bind them; they have no obligation to compel them. Need there be a further Argument used in support of our opinion? We trust not. Under these circumstances, then, there is only one thing remaining for us to recommend--to unite in a firm Phalanx, and to be _unanimous_.’

“‘RESOLUTIONS.

“‘I. That Newspaper printing, being necessarily conducted by Companionships, requires in each Companion corresponding abilities, corresponding modes of reasoning, and corresponding interests.

“‘II. That an Apprentice, not being at liberty to act for himself, cannot be supposed to possess an equal and independent mode of reasoning, and therefore has not a corresponding interest.

“‘III. That the introduction of an Apprentice upon a Newspaper will occasion a clashing of interests, which may, in the end, prove highly detrimental, not only to the Companionship, but to the Property on which they are engaged, and likewise to the whole body of Compositors, by enlarging the field for the employment of Apprentices.

“‘IV. That therefore the Compositors on Newspapers are firmly and decidedly of opinion, that an Apprentice is by no means an adequate Companion.

“‘V. And therefore they will resist, to the utmost of their power, any attempt (if any such attempt should happen) to obtrude an Apprentice upon them.’

“The system, however, commenced in the month of October, upon one Journal, which lasted about five years--and upon another which continued nearly eleven years; but in the end you were successful; and men were again engaged upon these Journals on a fair principle. The fate of some who had worked with the boys should have served as a warning--they were neglected, despised, and ultimately driven from the profession. Your Committee cannot refrain from congratulating the Journeymen of that period on their unanimity and perseverance; and at this moment, upon a due consideration of the present state of our business, rejoice in their patriotism, and return thanks to every individual now in being concerned in the opposition given to the attempt.

“1801.]--Your Committee have thus led you to the conclusion of the second period of seven years, through the whole of which the country was engaged in a war with nearly all the European quarter of the globe, and, as has been stated for 1793, your labour increased with the demand for news by the public, and by the struggles of the Journals for pre-eminence, which, added to the alarming price of provisions and all other family requisites, made it again necessary to solicit an advance of wages. In the month of November, 1800, the Book-men requested a rise, and certain regulations applicable to their department. It was granted to the amount of 1-6th, and took place on the 1st of January, 1801. Shortly after, almost gratuitously, the News department received an advance of 1-9th (or 4_s._) on Morning, and 1-11th (or 3_s._) on Evening Papers. The former were now 2_l._; Supernumeraries 19_s._; per galley 3_s._ 2_d._; Assistants 9½_d._ per hour; the Evening, 1_l._ 17_s._; Supernumeraries 17_s._; per galley 2_s._ 10_d._; Assistants 8½_d._ per hour.

“Thus terminated the third rise from 1785. In this period several disputes occurred; but your Committee will only repeat those relating to the general interest. From the extensive sale of some of the Evening Papers, the work was obliged to be performed in a manner that, from its evil tendency, required some modification; the hours for composition were not so well defined as hereafter they appear to have been, and the following Resolution, as applicable to Evening Papers, was agreed to among the Newsmen; ‘That all composition cease when the day’s publication goes to press--all work afterwards to be paid for as extra, or deducted from the first work of the next publication.’ This did not apply to the second or third editions of the day’s paper; that being completed, those _additions_ could have no claim on the following publication. The quantity and quality of the matter were also better defined within this period. Brevier was the smallest type till 1784, when Minion was introduced; and the adequate number of lines, by their proportion to Long Primer and width of column, were regulated by the Companionships and their _Printers_. This continued till 1793, when the different proportions were _generally_ understood, and a printed graduated Scale for Long Primer, Brevier, and Minion, according to width, was found in each News-house. This appears to have been requisite, as your Committee learn, that, from 1789, it was the custom on some Journals to widen their columns, during the sitting of Parliament, one or two ems, and reducing them in the recess. At this date a misunderstanding still existed relative to the hour of beginning on Sundays. Certain regulations were adopted respecting the twelve hours’ work (including refreshment time, galley and ‘_lines_,’ and correcting), and the time of commencing on that day.--Your Committee must observe, that the Compositors employed on Morning Papers at this period were not uniform in their hours of beginning on Sundays, and disputes frequently occurred on that point. This might have arisen from the different _temper_ and _politics_ of the Journals on which they were engaged; some entering at length on the Friday night’s Debates in Parliament, Foreign News, &c., while others were content with giving the Public a moderate portion of both. Competition, however, soon made the labour on the Journals equal, and, in 1803, the hour of commencing on the Sunday, regulated by the Saturday’s finish, became general.

“Your Committee also state that they have endeavoured to trace the origin of what are termed the ‘_after-lines_’ of the first work; tradition has vaguely assisted them in their research. They learn that they were general in 1777, but differing in amount. The term is not mentioned in the Propositions of 1793, but is acknowledged in the Regulations before mentioned; your Committee are therefore led to conclude that they arose with the subdivision of labour on the smaller Papers, prior to 1770, and suppose that custom, arising from local convenience, sanctioned their adoption by your predecessors.

“1809.]--In pursuing their plan, your Committee observe nothing of material consequence occurring in the News department till the year 1809, when the still-increasing price of provisions rendered it necessary for the Compositors to solicit a rise of prices, and on the 19th of May the Newsmen issued a Circular, addressed ‘To the Proprietors of Newspapers,’ requesting an advance of 1-5th on their wages,--_i. e._ 8_s._ per week on Morning, and 6_s._ per week on Evening Papers.

“In the two former Circulars, certain propositions were submitted, to be accepted, modified, or rejected; but the present one was accompanied by the first and regular _Scale for News Work_, and signed by 198 Newsmen. Your Committee will introduce an extract from the introductory paragraphs and the Scale itself, which completed the edifice you had long laboured to rear.

“After stating the necessity the Newsmen were under of soliciting the assistance of the Employers to enable them, by their industry, to make their existence comfortable, they point out the moderation of their request, by giving a comparative statement of the prices for family necessaries, between 1793 and 1809, by which it appeared, that in sixteen years they were nearly doubled. They further add, that

“‘It has been observed by the Duke of Portland, in his letter to the Lord Lieutenant of Oxford, that ‘_there is no reason why the labour of the Handicraftsman, the Mechanic, and the Artizan, should not keep pace with the advance on the articles of the Farmer, Grazier,’ &c._ Upon this principle, the justice of which is too evident to need the smallest comment, might we not calculate, as Morning Papers, in 1793, were paid 36_s._, and Evening Papers 34_s._ that we should now receive nearly 3_l._ 12_s._ on the Morning Papers, instead of 2_l._; and nearly 3_l._ 8_s._ instead of 1_l._ 17_s._ on the Evening?

“‘There is another consideration to which we must beg to call your attention; at the time of the last advance a ratio of one-sixth was obtained on all works in Book-houses, which proportion was not received by those employed on Newspapers; four shillings only being granted on Morning Papers, which before that time were 36_s._, and three shillings on Evening Papers, which previously were 34_s._, being only one-ninth on the former, and scarcely an eleventh on the latter. These circumstances, together with the great increase of labour on Papers of late years, arising from the introduction of _so large a portion of small letter_, are considerations which, we hope, will not be passed over without that deliberation they deserve.

“‘From an impartial view of the comparative statements and the proposed advance, it will be seen that we have kept perfectly within the limits prescribed by justice. We have pursued this line of conduct from a solicitude to avoid the introduction of any thing which might prevent your ready compliance with our request.

“‘PROPOSED SCALE.

Daily Morning Papers to be paid £2 8 0 Per Galley on ditto 0 3 9½ Daily Evening Papers 2 3 0 Per Galley on Ditto 0 3 7

“‘That Ten Hours Composition be the specific time for Daily Evening Papers.

“‘That Assistance be paid at per Hour in proportion to the sum per Galley, considering the Galley as Four Hours Composition.

“‘Papers Three Times a-Week, and Weekly Papers, to take an advance in proportion to that on Evening Papers.

“‘☞ That the above advance do take place from Saturday the 3d of June, 1809.’

“This request was verbally and negatively answered in the different News Houses, and the 3d of June passed over as if no solicitation for a rise of prices had been made. The Journeymen felt the necessity of perseverance, and the following Circular was sent to the Employers, dated June 13, signed by the same number of men:

“‘GENTLEMEN,--We cannot help expressing our surprise at the manner in which our request has been passed over; nearly a month has elapsed, and no answer has been communicated. Had we in our Scale gone further than the urgency of the times renders necessary, or had we neglected to shew that respect which your situations in life require, we might have anticipated such indifference; but feeling our conduct not liable to such objection, we are entirely at a loss to assign any motive for the want of attention to our present circumstances; and we feel ourselves under the necessity of requesting an answer by Saturday next; a noncompliance with which will be considered as a refusal of our propositions.’

“This second Circular received no answer, and on the 20th of June, the regular notice of quitting was given to the different Printers; but before the fortnight had elapsed, each Journeyman received a copy of a Report of a Committee of Masters, dated June 30, accompanied by a string of Resolutions, but not meeting the request of the men.

“Your Committee regret that the document is too voluminous for insertion, but they will make a few extracts in furtherance of their present object. It commences with stating, that ‘A General Meeting of the Proprietors of London Morning and Evening Papers was held this day (June 30, 1809), Mr. Stuart in the Chair, to take into consideration the Report of the Committee appointed to enquire into, and report their opinion upon the _Circular Letter_ of the Compositors, respecting certain alleged grievances, and _demanding_ an advance of Wages; present five Daily Morning, and five Daily Evening Papers,’ and that the said Report was read.--To answer the above-mentioned ‘Circular Letter,’ eleven paragraphs are given, and a comparative Table of the Prices of Necessaries, from 1793 to 1809, in contradiction to that given in by the Journeymen.

“The _first_ paragraph condemns the strong spirit evinced by the men in demanding so large a rise as 20 per cent. on their labour; and protests against the ‘Scale proposed,’ as containing ‘_Rules and Restrictions_ new to the Trade, and embarrassing to the Proprietors, while no reciprocal benefit or advantage is held out.’

“The _second_ attempts to controvert the assertion of the Newsmen, that they ‘experienced difficulties in procuring the necessaries of life,’ by declaring it ‘a matter of surprise and regret, that any thing so unfounded should be advanced on so serious an occasion by a body of men, generally speaking, so intelligent and respectable;’ and after comparing your prices and situation with your Brethren on Book-work and other mechanics, conclude with stating, that

“‘Their claims to high wages do not rest on the difficulties in obtaining the necessaries of life, but on the disagreeable hours of labour. They make more money than falls to the lot of 39-40ths of the men in Britain, and they can procure not only all the necessaries of life, but even _more of its comforts_, than 99 out of every 100 men in Europe. It is lamentable to see men so insensible to the _blessings_ of their situation!’

“Your Committee cannot congratulate you on the _comforts_ or _blessings_ of your situation; they leave to your own feelings the fallacy of assertions so hackneyed, and proceed to the _third_ paragraph, which calls the quotation from the ‘Duke of Portland’s Letter,’ a ‘misrepresentation, and a pretended extract,’ and concludes with finding a meaning not intended by his Grace of Portland--‘that the arbitrary fixing of wages was a most alarming evil.’

“The _fourth_ respects the statement of the prices of necessaries, and will not admit the propriety of introducing the year 1793 in comparison with 1809, because the Compositors ‘then received all they asked, and a _new compact_ was formed with them on their own terms.’ A difference appears in the Compositors statement and that of your Employers, for the year 1793, of 2½_d._!

“The _fifth_ acknowledges the calculation for 1809 to be correct--10_s._ 4½_d._; and as the prices for 1800 were 8_s._ 9½_d_., there only remained a difference of 1_s._ 6¾_d._ to 1809; a loss they conceived you might well bear ‘without incurring the penalties of starvation.’

“Your Committee feel it necessary to quote the _sixth_ at length;--it needs no comment.

“‘The reference the Compositors make to the increased labour on Newspapers, in consequence of the introduction of _small letter_, is unjust, is absurd, and we cannot understand how they could allow so unfounded a complaint to escape them. The proprietors have always paid, and paid smartly too, for this introduction. The Compositors have limited hours of employment, limited quantities of work, and they _compose only one number of letters_, whether small or large, _agreeably to the universal rule of the business_.’

“The _seventh_ mentions Apprentices, which your Committee will not repeat, considering that question set at rest.

“The _eighth_ recommends that ‘the false assertions, groundless complaints, and extravagant pretensions of the Compositors should be met by a firm and determined resistance;’ and for fear that you should be intoxicated by success to demand ‘double wages,’ state, that they ‘have therefore considered a plan of establishing a society of Compositors under an Act of Parliament, connecting with it a benefit society, which, they are confident, will enable the trade to go on, and which they may hereafter submit to you;’ but without stating who were to be the _honoured_ Members of such society.

“The _ninth_ paragraph, after expressing the indignance of the Masters at the extravagant demands of the men, recommends that the wages should be put upon a footing with Book-work in 1800; acknowledging that the rise on the latter was 1-6th, while that on News-work was but 1-9th on Morning, and 1-11th on Evening Papers, and propose that 2_s._ per week should be added to the Morning Papers, but that only 1_s._ should be given to the Evening Papers, ‘the difference in the labour and hours of work being much more than 4_s._ per week.’

“The _tenth_ recommends that no alteration in the hours of composition on Evening Papers be permitted.

“The _eleventh_ expresses the anxiety of the Committee to give the Compositors a detailed answer, in order that the latter might clearly understand and appreciate their own interests; and the whole concludes with the following

“‘RESOLUTIONS.

“‘_Resolved_,--That the Report of the Committee now read be agreed to.

“‘_Resolved_,--That the Newspaper Compositors have not made out a case entitling them to a rise of wages; but that as they complain their rise in 1800 was not equal to the rise in Book Houses, a Regulation do now take place, putting them both on a footing.

“‘_Resolved_,--That as the labour on Morning is considerably heavier than on Evening Papers, the latter are not entitled to the same indulgence on this occasion as the former.

“‘_Resolved_,--That from Saturday the 15th of July, 1809, the wages of Compositors on Daily Morning Papers shall be two Guineas per week, and on daily Evening Papers Thirty-eight Shillings; and that the Galley on the former shall be Three Shillings and Four-pence, on the latter Three Shillings and Two-pence.

“‘_Resolved_,--That the Circular Letter of the Journeymen Compositors, together with the Report of the Committee of Masters and these Resolutions, signed by the Chairman, be printed in the form of a letter, and that some one Proprietor of each Newspaper shall personally deliver to each Compositor, while at work in his house, a Copy of the said printed Letter.

(Signed) “‘D. STUART, CHAIRMAN.

“‘_Turk’s Head Coffee House, Strand_, _June_ 30, 1809.’

“After some discussion, the Newsmen agreed to accept the offer made by the Proprietors in the Resolution above stated; but as the sums given were declared to be on the principle only of putting you on an _equality_ with the Bookmen, in their advance in 1801, it was determined to continue united to support the original Propositions when an opportunity offered. This regulation gave the Morning Papers 2_l._ 2_s._; Supernumeraries 1_l._; per galley 3_s._ 4_d._; 10_d._ per hour; and Evening Papers 1_l._ 18_s._; Supernumeraries 19_s._; per galley 3_s._ 2_d._; 9_d._ per hour.

“At this period the Book Compositors were soliciting a rise of 1-7th on their prices. The Newsmen were not long behind their brethren in claiming the same advance on their labour, and the long Report of the Masters, before mentioned, was answered, paragraph by paragraph, in a manner which must have convinced them, that if they would not allow the talent, they must acknowledge that all the justice in the dispute lay on your side. This answer is dated January 18, 1810. Your Committee cannot, in consequence of its length, insert it here, but, to suit their present purpose, will extract the answers to the _second_ and _fifth_ paragraphs.

“‘The profession of a man should be always equal to the support of himself and his family in a decent way. They should be supplied with not merely what will preserve animation, but what custom has rendered necessary for our comfort; and every man of family must feel the truth of the assertion--that at the present time he experiences difficulty in procuring such necessaries. With respect to the difference between the wages of Book and News Compositors, it will be observed, that the expences of a News Compositor are necessarily more than that of a Book Compositor, arising from the unseasonable hours of labour.--We believe the latter part of their paragraph will be found very deficient of truth; for there are but few mechanics with the same constant and regular exertion, but would equal, and exceed by far our incomes.’

“As the two dates given by the Journeymen for the prices of provisions were to be contradicted, they introduced _three_ tables, and made a calculation by the rule of Subtraction. But the men were not to be deceived by this _new_ system of Arithmetic, and combated by the _old_ mode as follows:

“‘_It would seem as if the sum of 1s. 6¾d. was considered as the loss we sustained in the course of a week; but it is the proportion it bears to 8s. 9½d.; and we find that it makes a difference in our weekly incomes of 7s. 1d., a sum which must be felt particularly by those having families._’

“The assertions made in the other paragraphs were most ably controverted, and your cause made doubly sure by the truths which accompanied its defence. The Employers never made a reply to it, because it was unanswerable; and your Committee cannot refrain from expressing their gratitude to all concerned in its production.

“1810.]--To proceed. The Book Masters acquiesced in the request of their Compositors for an advance, which was to take place on the 1st of May, and the Newsmen taking advantage of the acknowledgment made in the _ninth_ paragraph before mentioned, demanded the rise of 1-7th to place them on an equality with their brethren in the Book department. Their request was not noticed. They still persevered, and to assist their cause the Bookmen came to a Resolution, that no man should apply for a situation on a Newspaper during the dispute.--Highly to their credit, and honourable to their character, not one application was made.

“The Newsmen still continued their exertions, and, on the 14th of May, the following proposition in MS. was presented to each Companionship:--

“‘_The Proprietors of the Daily Newspapers, having taken the request of their Compositors for an advance of wages into consideration, and on_ referring to the whole series of rises from 1783{5}, _when Bookwork was 4d. per thousand, and Morning Papers were 1l. 7s. per week, find that 2l. 0s. 6d. on Morning Papers would be equal to 6d. per thousand, the present advanced price on Book-work._

“‘_But the Proprietors unwilling wholly to disappoint the expectations of their Compositors, consent to give them an advance of 4s. on Morning Papers, and 3s. on Evening Papers, per week, making the wages on Morning Papers 2l. 6s. per man per week, and on Daily Evening Papers 2l. 1s.; to take place from Monday, May 21, 1810._’

“This was answered by the following Resolutions:

“‘At a General Meeting of the Compositors employed on Newspapers, held May 19, 1810, the following declarative Resolutions were agreed to _unanimously_:--

“‘Res. I. That in tracing our advances of wages from the year 1783{5} up to 1800, there not being extant any clear and certain records, and a perfect collection of documents containing all the circumstances, many important facts and transactions may be forgotten and lost.

“‘Res. II. That from the above consideration, it is evident, that to refer further back than 1800, in order to determine what ought to be the advance of wages on Newspapers, is unfair and improper; and it is contrary to right, according to the declared opinions of the Newspaper Proprietors themselves, as expressed (in a Report of their Committee, dated June 30, 1809, and generally circulated) in the following words of their own: ‘The Compositors have no right to refer further back than the year 1800, as they then received all they asked, and a _new compact_ was made with them on their own terms.’

“‘Res. III. That the Newspaper Proprietors ought to give their Compositors an advance of wages fully equal to the advance on Bookwork since 1800, conformably to the principle admitted by themselves in the above-mentioned document: where, after stating the allegation of the Newspaper Compositors that their advance in 1800 was not equal to the advance on Bookwork, and admitting the fact, they allow it to be (using their own words) a reasonable ground of complaint in your Compositors Circular.

“‘Res. IV. That, in the Scale of 1805, a considerable advance was granted to the Compositors on Bookwork in respect to Sunday-work, Night-work, and Morning-work, which required a correspondent advance on Newspapers, to which it is particularly applicable.

“‘Res. V. That, even if we had not the above indisputable grounds, we have in justice sufficient grounds in the exigencies of the times, as, according to the News Proprietors own statement of the comparative prices of the necessaries of life between 1800 and 1809, there was a rise of 1_s._ 6¾_d._ on 8_s._ 9½_d._, which makes a difference in our weekly incomes (taking the medium of Morning and Evening Papers) of upwards of 7_s._

“‘Res. VI. That the Compositors on Bookwork have received less from their Employers than their exigencies required, and only what circumstances allowed. Those unfavourable circumstances were alleged to arise principally from the war, and, consequently, far from being applicable to the Newspaper branch of the Business, which derives its prosperity from the war. Therefore, there could be no reason why Compositors employed on Newspapers should not have an advance fully adequate to their exigencies.’

“A fortnight’s notice to quit was then given upon the Daily Papers, and on the day of its expiration the News Compositors were given to understand from the individual Printers, that the demand was acquiesced in, and your Scale, as it now stands, was acknowledged--Morning Papers 2_l._ 8_s._; Supernumeraries 1_l._ 3_s._; galley 3_s._ 10_d._; 9_d._ per thousand; and Assistants 11½_d._ per hour.--Evening Papers 2_l._ 3_s._ 6_d._; Supernumeraries 1_l._ 1_s._ 6_d._; galley 3_s._ 7_d._; 8½_d._ per thousand; and Assistants 10½_d._ per hour.

“Thus terminated your last struggle. It will be found that in the space of twenty-four years, your prices and modes of work have equally changed with the appearance of the Journals. From the former rise to the present nothing appears worthy notice, excepting the alteration of measure during the sitting of Parliament; but from the great pressure of matter, and an alteration in the size of paper used, most of the Journals retained the same measure during the recess.

“Your Committee feel that some apology may be necessary for giving so minute a detail of what perhaps has occurred within your own memory; but the task imposed upon them embracing so wide a field, must plead their excuse; and having introduced the latter document to your notice, considering it the precursor of an understood and established ‘Scale of Prices,’ they trust its utility will compensate for the trespass.

“Having now advanced to the period (May, 1810) when your endeavours, after twelve months’ struggle, were crowned with success, your Committee, trusting to your own feelings, must beg to pause on the events of that time.”

[Then follow some observations which are not relevant to the present work, nor to the tracing of the history of prices, nor to the management of Newspapers in the metropolis.]

“In the year 1811, a dispute occurred on an Evening Paper, respecting the introduction of Apprentices, which lasted but six weeks.

“About the year 1813, Morning Papers of 20 columns became almost general. Papers of the present size have not rendered the use of small type less necessary than when they consisted but of sixteen columns; and the remarks made in the extracts from the documents before your Committee, of the years 1793-1810, are equally applicable as the same causes exist.

“In the commencement of the year 1816, the Trade was thrown into confusion by the introduction of Nonpareil, a type not recognised in former agreements respecting the price of Newspapers. The Companionship were required to compose it at Minion price and quantity; they refused, and in consequence left their situations; but others, in direct opposition to the interests of the profession, submitted to the demand. Ignorance could not be pleaded by them; for your Committee are well aware, that few men can be found incapable of casting up the galley on a Newspaper, or be unacquainted with the difference in price of Nonpareil and other types used in Book-houses. The bad example set by these men, with the desire of gain, may have induced others to follow their steps; but they cannot, unless you lose your unanimity, sap the foundation of your rights. It is therefore incumbent on your Committee to protest against any men taking upon themselves the right of deviating from your regulations, or of settling either the price or quantity of the galley of smaller type than Minion, without a general understanding with their brethren of the profession. It has caused both trouble and expense, and been the means of removing good men to gratify the meanness or greediness of those, who have in the end been necessitated to throw themselves upon the mercy of their fellow-workmen, for permission to gain a subsistence among those they had, by their previous conduct, deprived of bread. Your Committee beg to state, that adding the difference in price given on Nonpareil or Pearl in Book-work to the price per thousand in News-work, will be found the equitable charge for those sizes; that is, 1_d._ per thousand extra on Nonpareil, and 2_d._ on Pearl. Thus the fair charge for Nonpareil on Morning Papers would be 10_d._ per thousand, Evening Papers 9½, Pearl, 11_d._ per thousand on Morning and 10½ on Evening Papers--or a _reduction, in proportion to value, on the galley quantity_.

“In the latter end of the same year a misunderstanding arose in consequence of a Morning and Evening Paper being done in the same place. It might have been considered a local dispute; but as certain Resolutions were passed at a delegated Meeting held on the 3d of January, 1817, your Committee cannot refrain from noticing it:

“‘_At a delegated Meeting of News Compositors, held at the Coach and Horses, Water-lane, Fleet Street, Jan. 3, 1817, the following Resolutions were passed unanimously:_

“‘_Resolved_, I. That it is the opinion of this Meeting, that there are but three classes of Workmen on Morning Papers that can be acknowledged by the Profession, viz., _Full hands_ 2_l._ 8_s._ per week; _Supernumeraries_ at 1_l._ 3_s._ per week; and _Assistants_ at 11½_d._ per hour.

“‘_Resolved_, II. That we consider the situation of _Finishers_ on a Morning Paper, (where no person is employed to do the preceding part of the work,) as an innovation that would tend to disorganize the system hitherto acted upon.

“‘_Resolved_, III. That under this consideration we recommend to our fellow-workmen to refuse any such situation should it be offered them.

“‘_Resolved_ unanimously.--_That with respect to the ---- (having no precedent to act upon) and there not being a regular Companionship, we recommend to the persons employed thereon to regulate the trifling difference between them and their employer as amicably as possible, keeping in view that the interests of the profession are not invaded thereby._’

“This matter was amicably adjusted; but your Committee regret to state, that at the commencement of the following year, a dispute arose on another Journal, by a demand being made for eleven hours’ work (time and quantity)--or two measured galleys and a finish, sometimes extending to three hours. This mode was declared inadmissible by the trade; it was resisted; and you again triumphed by the sacrifice of situation only of those who refused their acquiescence.

“Nothing appears worthy of notice after the above date till the month of May in the present year, and while your interests impose upon your Committee the necessity of laying before you the circumstances that then arose, they will trespass upon your patience only so long as the subject demands.--After the introduction of Nonpareil on the Journal mentioned in the year 1816, the Trade were ignorant of the _men_ and their _modes of work_; you had no interest in the enquiry, for they never could be respected who had deserted your standard, nor pitied when labouring under difficulties they had brought upon themselves. From an accidental occurrence, not necessary here to repeat, a request was made, that a statement of the situation of that Journal might be laid before you. Policy dictated the propriety of receiving it; if those employed acted up to the spirit of your laws, you would have nothing to condemn; but if, on the contrary, they had violated your system, you would have the opportunity of declaring against it, and of preventing the evil example from spreading further. Custom, it is said, will in time become law; so would your silence have permitted the unprincipled to gratify themselves by the sacrifice of your rights and interests, and to undermine your whole system before you were aware of the danger.

“By this statement it was discovered there were two _modes_ of work on that Journal, both in direct opposition to the rules and prices agreed upon in 1810. From the pressure of advertisements, two companionships were formed, one for the outer, and another for the inner form; those engaged on the former were offered, and accepted an Evening Paper price per galley for Nonpareil, Minion quantity; while those on the latter were employed according to the custom of the trade. It is unnecessary to comment on the introduction of _two companionships_ on a Daily Paper, much less to point out the absurdity of consenting to receive an Evening Paper price on a Morning Journal, upon the plea of its being performed by day-light; by the same parity of reasoning, you might demand a Morning Paper price for an Evening Journal, because, for a great part of the year, a portion of the work is done by candle-light. But an alteration on the inner-form system was shortly proposed, which was that rejected by yourselves in the year 1818--viz. _two galleys_ and _remaining_ till the paper went to press. This was refused by the employed, and seven out of twelve deserted this ‘flag of blackest hue.’

“This circumstance, from the consequences that might probably follow, led to the appointment of a Committee to draw up, and circulate, for the information of the trade, a statement of the regular mode of working on Newspapers--‘to guide the ignorant, to guard the unwary.’ To assist them in their labours, and to maintain that harmony which should ever subsist between two branches in one profession, your Committee requested at a delegated Meeting of Book-men, the appointment of a gentleman from their body to assist them in the task assigned, which was most cheerfully met and cordially assented to.

“After the appointment of your Committee, another circumstance arose which necessarily occupied a portion of their time. The Proprietor of an obscure Evening Journal, out of which a Sunday Paper is formed, made a demand on the employed to complete the Weekly Journal, not merely with a _reduction_ of wages, but absolutely for _nothing!_--as a kind of make-weight for the salary they received upon the other. This not being found in any article of your scale, was, of course, refused by the companionship, and the loss of situation followed: their places have been filled by some _distinguished_ characters, now out of the pale, but whose _memories_ will be cherished.

“Your Committee will, by recapitulating the events related under each date, bring the various Regulations into one point of view, which, attached to your Scale of 1810, will, it is trusted, fully accomplish the purpose for which your Committee received their appointment. In 1786 a rise of 1-6th (or 4_s._ 6_d._) was obtained on Newspapers, but no Regulations were generally adopted; each Paper having its own mode, its internal management was regulated by existing circumstances; but in the year 1793, the nature of News-work, in a progress of seven years, was completely changed, and the price of necessaries increasing with the labour imposed, rendered it incumbent on your predecessors not only to solicit an advance of wages, but that the time and quantity should also be defined. This request was made by the Newsmen, and though sanctioned by the signatures of their brethren in the Book department, your Committee consider it as the first division of the Compositors into two branches of one profession. Their wishes were granted so far as related to a rise of ⅐th (or 4_s._ 6_d._) on Morning Papers; but nothing relating to the hours of work or time of commencing on Sundays was determined upon. It was acknowledged that the Supernumeraries should receive a proportionate advance, but your Committee cannot pass over the distinction then made between Morning and Evening Papers without expressing their regret at the circumstance. The latter only received a rise of 1-13th, or 2_s._ 6_d._ In the same year the Resolutions were passed against the employment of Apprentices on Papers. Some years prior to this date they were to be found on many of the Journals, and particularly on those called _Weekly_, arising from the connection of both classes with Book-houses; but, from the circumstances already mentioned (1793), when Daily Papers required separate establishments, and were conducted by non-professional men, your brethren took the opportunity of objecting to their re-admission on the latter class. The Resolutions of that day now stand as Laws; you struggled--you conquered; and your Committee can only add that five attempts against them failed of success. A rise was gained 1801 of 4_s._ on Morning and 3_s._ on Evening Papers, making a still greater difference between the two classes of Journals. It was given and accepted without any reference to further regulations in the spirit of the proposition before quoted. The nature of the work and increase of labour on the Evening Journals from 1793 to 1800, required the adoption of the Resolution mentioned under the latter date:--‘That all Composition cease when the day’s publication goes to press--all work afterwards to be paid for as extra, or deducted from the first work of the next day’s publication.’ This regulation (with one exception) was generally accepted; the Printer had the choice of paying or deducting. A Scale of quantity, and a regulation for the twelve hours’ work, was also adopted. In the year 1809 it became necessary to solicit another rise. Twenty-four years had passed away; the system of News-work had ripened into perfection, and it merely required registering for the mutual convenience of the parties interested. With the request for an advance a Scale was introduced, which specifically defined the sum to be paid for labour. You accepted the offer of the Employers, which was a rise of 2_s._ on Morning, and 1_s._ on Evening Papers; but nothing was answered respecting the Scale, the sole object of your wishes. The following year you succeeded; and your Committee merely notice a fractional difference in the sums proposed and those now paid. The galley on a Morning Paper is stated at 3_s._ 9½_d._, now 3_s._ 10_d._; and the Evening Journals at 2_l._ 3_s._, instead 2_l._ 3_s._ 6_d._ per week. With this difference the Scale stands complete; and for its support, with a clear definition, have the labours of your Committee been wholly directed. ‘To guide the ignorant, to frustrate the machinations of the unprincipled, and, if possible, to form a closer bond of union among yourselves,’ has been their pleasing task. By a reference to the first Resolution of the Newsmen of May 19, 1810, it will be observed, that they lament the want of a perfect collection of documents by which they might correctly trace the advances of wages from 1785 to 1800--indeed they assert that no records were extant. Your Committee congratulate themselves upon being more fortunate, and have extracted from, or inserted at length, every document relating to Regulations or Prices since 1785, which they trust will not be considered uninteresting, and, handed down as records, may yet be useful. To prove the strength of your foundation, the Committee have embraced a period of fifty years, in which is included fifteen years prior to the date of the first document, and subsequently, through a space of thirty-five years, to the present time. In pursuing their duty, your Committee have not deviated from their path to obtrude upon your notice at this day all the misunderstandings which have arisen among the Journeymen, nor have they paused to revive the memory of local disputes with the employers; they have sought not ‘to rake the ashes of the dead’--they have endeavoured to avoid any reflection that might cause a blush in the living. The labours of your Committee will close with an Abstract of the Scale, and the Laws and necessary Regulations attached, which they trust will satisfactorily answer the purpose of their collection. You require nothing of the employers--they demand nothing from you; and shall it be said that your privileges must be forfeited by your own negligence, be scattered into air by the unprincipled, or sacrificed to the interest of a designing few?--Forbid it, spirit! while the recollection of the struggles of our predecessors lives amongst us. Your Committee conclude with soliciting your indulgence for any deficiency on their parts; but as your interest has been their sole object, your approbation their reward, they confidently trust the purity of their motives will be a sufficient apology for their unintentional errors.

“P. CHALK, W. YOCKNEY, H. WARREN, T. PATERSON, E. M. DAVIS, J. B. SPENCE.

“ABSTRACT OF THE SCALE.

_Per Week._ _Per Galley._ _Per Hour._

Morning Papers £ 2 8_s._ 0_d._ 3s._ 10_d._ 11½_d._ Evening Papers £ 2 3_s._ 6_d._ 3s._ 7_d._ 10½_d._

“Assistants on other Journals are paid the same as Evening Papers; the Sunday Papers, having their galleys of various lengths, are paid at the rate of 8½_d._ per thousand, or 10_d._ per hour.

“Long Primer and Minion galleys, cast as nigh 5000 letters as possible (at present varying from that number to 5,200, partly arising from a variation in the founders’ standards), are, per thousand, on

_Morning._ _Evening._ Long Primer and Minion 9_d._ 8½_d._ Nonpareil 10_d._ 9½_d._ Pearl 11_d._ 10½_d._ _or a reduction, in proportion to value, on the galley quantity._

“The galley on Morning Papers consists of 120 lines Long Primer, and 40 _after lines_--Minion 88, and 30 _after lines_--on Papers 22 ems Long Primer wide; other widths in proportion; and a _finish_ of five hours. Another _mode_ is, one galley and a _finish_ of six hours. Twelve hours on and twelve off (including refreshment time) was the original agreement.

“The _time_ of beginning to be the same uniformly as agreed upon by the Printer and Companionship--_i. e._ either a two, three, or four o’clock Paper--and at whatever hour the Journal goes to press one morning regulates the hour of commencing work for the next day’s publication, provided it should be over the hour originally agreed upon--if under, the time is in the Compositors’ favour. The hour of commencing work on Sunday is regulated by the time of finishing on Saturday morning.

“Ten hours’ Composition is the specified time for Evening Papers.--All Composition to cease when the day’s Publication goes to Press; any work required afterwards to be paid for extra, or deducted from the first work of the next publication.--This does not apply to _Second Editions_; they being connected solely with the antecedent Paper, must be paid for extra.

“Newspapers in a foreign language take, of course, the same advance as is allowed on Book-work.

“A system termed _Finishing_ having been formerly introduced, it is necessary to state, that no mode of working can be considered fair (except as before stated) otherwise than by the galley or hour.

“No Apprentices to be employed on Daily Papers.”

[Signed by 193 Newspaper Compositors.]

_Acts of Parliament relating to Newspapers._--The Act of the 39th of G. 3. c. 79., for the more effectual suppression of Societies established for Seditious and Treasonable Purposes, &c., which requires the entry of all Presses and Types with the Clerk of the Peace, and the affixing of the name and address of the Printer to his productions, with other regulations, does not extend, alter, or vary the then existing Acts of Parliament in force respecting the printing, &c. of Newspapers; for the 32d Section says--

“Provided also, That nothing herein contained shall extend, or be construed to extend, to alter or vary any Rule, Regulation, or Provision contained in any Act of Parliament now in force respecting the printing, publishing, or distributing any printed Newspaper, or other printed Paper.”

53 G. 3. c. 108. s. 19., “and that from and after the passing of this Act the several other Instruments herein-after specified, shall also be exempted from all Stamp Duty; (that is to say,) All Bonds to His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, which shall be entered into by Cardmakers, for securing the Payment of the Stamp Duties on Playing Cards; and by the Proprietors, Printers, or Publishers of Newspapers, for securing the Payment of the Duties upon the Advertisements therein contained; and by Stationers or others, who sell Paper stamped for the Purpose of being used for printing Newspapers, for the due Performance and Observance of the Matters and Things required of them by the Act passed in the Thirty-eighth Year of His Majesty’s Reign for regulating the printing and Publication of Newspapers; and also all Warrants to sue and defend in the Courts Baron of any Honors or Manors which hold Pleas in Actions or Suits for any Debt or Damages not exceeding Five Pounds, as well as all Plaints, Summonses, Executions, Writs, and other Proceedings, in or issuing out of such Courts.”

6 & 7 W. 4. c. 76., “An Act to reduce the Duties on Newspapers, and to amend the Laws relating to the Duties on Newspapers and Advertisements.

“Whereas it is expedient to reduce the Stamp Duties now payable on Newspapers in _Great Britain_ and _Ireland_ respectively, and to consolidate and amend the Laws relating thereto, and also to the Duties on Advertisements: Be it therefore enacted by the King’s most Excellent Majesty, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons, in this present Parliament assembled, and by the Authority of the same, That in lieu of the Stamp Duties on Newspapers by this Act repealed as herein-after mentioned, there shall be granted, raised, levied, and paid unto and for the Use of His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, in and throughout the United Kingdom of _Great Britain_ and _Ireland_, the several Duties or Sums of Money set down in Figures, or otherwise specified and set forth, in the Schedule marked (A.) to this Act annexed; which said Schedule, and every Clause, Regulation, Matter, and Thing therein contained, shall be deemed and taken to be Part of this Act; and the said Duties hereby granted shall commence and take effect on the Fifteenth Day of _September_ One thousand eight hundred and thirty-six, and shall be denominated and deemed to be Stamp Duties, and shall be under the Care and Management of the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, who are hereby empowered and required to provide and use proper and sufficient Dies for expressing and denoting the said Duties; and all the Powers, Provisions, Clauses, Regulations, and Directions, Fines, Forfeitures, Pains, and Penalties, contained in and imposed by the several Acts of Parliament in force relating to the Stamp Duties, and not repealed by this Act, shall be of full Force and Effect with respect to the Duties hereby granted, as far as the same are or shall be applicable, in all Cases not hereby expressly provided for, and shall be observed, applied, enforced, and put in execution for the raising, levying, collecting, and securing of the said Duties hereby granted and otherwise relating thereto, so far as the same shall not be superseded by and shall be consistent with the express Provisions of this Act, as fully and effectually to all Intents and Purposes as if the same had been herein repeated and specially enacted with reference to the said Duties hereby granted.

s. 2. “And be it enacted, That a Discount after the Rate of Twenty-five Pounds _per Centum_ on the prompt Payment of any Sum amounting to Ten Pounds or upwards, for the Duties on Newspapers granted by this Act, shall be allowed to all Proprietors of Newspapers in _Ireland_ on the Purchase of Stamps for the printing of Newspapers in _Ireland_, which Discount shall be denoted on the Face of every Stamp in respect of which the same shall be allowed: Provided always, that if any Newspaper shall be printed in _Great Britain_ upon Paper stamped with a Stamp denoting the Allowance of any such Discount, such Stamp shall be of no Avail, and such Newspaper shall be deemed to be not duly stamped as required by this Act.

s. 3. “And be it enacted, That from and after the Thirty-first Day of _December_ next after the passing of this Act, in the Stamp to be impressed on each and every Newspaper under the Provisions of this Act, the Title of such Newspaper, or some Part thereof, shall be expressed in such convenient Manner and Form as to the said Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes shall seem expedient; and the said Commissioners shall cause a proper Die for stamping each such Newspaper to be prepared under their Directions, and a new or other Die to be from Time to Time prepared, in like Manner as they shall think necessary; and the reasonable Costs and Expences of preparing such Stamps or Dies shall be from Time to Time defrayed by the Proprietor of each such Newspaper, and paid when and as required by the said Commissioners to such Person as the said Commissioners shall appoint to receive the same, before any Paper shall be stamped under the Directions of such Commissioners for each such Newspaper; and that from and after the Thirty-first Day of _December_ next after the passing of this Act no Newspaper liable to Duty under this Act shall be printed upon Paper not stamped with such Die, containing the Title of such Newspaper, or some Part thereof as aforesaid; and if any Newspaper shall be printed on Paper stamped otherwise than as aforesaid the Stamp thereon shall be of no Avail, and such Newspaper shall be deemed to be not duly stamped as required by this Act.

s. 4. “And be it enacted, That every Paper declared by the Schedule (A.) to this Act annexed to be chargeable with the Duties by this Act granted on Newspapers shall be deemed and taken to be a Newspaper within the Meaning of this Act and of every Act relating to the printing or publishing of Newspapers, and shall be subject and liable to all the Regulations by this Act imposed; and wheresoever in this Act or in any other Act or Acts relating to the printing or publishing of Newspapers the Word ‘Newspaper’ is or may be used, it shall be deemed and taken to mean and include any and every such Paper as aforesaid; and in all Proceedings at Law or otherwise, and upon all Occasions whatsoever, it shall be sufficient to describe by the Word ‘Newspaper’ any Paper by this Act declared to be a Newspaper, without further or otherwise designating or describing the same.

s. 5. “And be it enacted, That every Sheet or Piece of Paper which shall be published as a Supplement to any Newspaper, except the _London Gazette_ and _Dublin Gazette_ respectively, shall be printed with the same Title and Date as the Newspaper to which it shall be or shall purport to be a Supplement, with the Addition of the Words ‘Supplement to’ prefixed to such Title: and upon every such Newspaper, except as aforesaid, there shall be printed in conspicuous Characters some Words clearly indicating that a Supplement is published therewith; and if any Sheet or Piece of Paper shall be published as a Supplement to any Newspaper, such Supplement and the Newspaper to which the same shall relate, not having printed thereon respectively the several Particulars by this Act required to be printed thereon respectively, and in the Manner and Form by this Act directed, the Publisher of such Newspaper shall for every such Sheet or Piece of Paper so published as a Supplement, and for every Copy thereof, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds; and if any Person shall sell, deliver out, or in any other Manner publish any Sheet or Piece of Paper which shall be or shall purport to be a Supplement to any Newspaper, without at the same Time selling or otherwise publishing and delivering therewith the Newspaper to which the same shall be or purport to be a Supplement, every such Person so offending shall for every such Offence forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 6. “And be it enacted, That no Person shall print or publish, or shall cause to be printed or published, any Newspaper before there shall be delivered to the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, or to the proper authorized Officer at the Head Office for Stamps in _Westminster_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_ respectively, or to the Distributor of Stamps or other proper Officer appointed by the said Commissioners for the Purpose in or for the District within which such Newspaper shall be intended to be printed and published, a Declaration in Writing containing the several Matters and Things hereinafter for that Purpose specified; that is to say, every such Declaration shall set forth the correct Title of the Newspaper to which the same shall relate, and the true Description of the House or Building wherein such Newspaper is intended to be printed, and also of the House or Building wherein such Newspaper is intended to be published, by or for or on behalf of the Proprietor thereof, and shall also set forth the true Name, Addition, and Place of Abode of every Person who is intended to be the Printer or to conduct the actual printing of such Newspaper, and of every Person who is intended to be the Publisher thereof, and of every Person who shall be a Proprietor of such Newspaper who shall be resident out of the United Kingdom, and also of every Person resident in the United Kingdom who shall be a Proprietor of the same, if the Number of such last-mentioned Persons (exclusive of the Printer and Publisher) shall not exceed Two, and in case such Number shall exceed Two, then of such Two Persons, being such Proprietors resident in the United Kingdom, the Amount of whose respective proportional Shares in the Property or in the Profit or Loss of such Newspaper shall not be less than the proportional Share of any other Proprietor thereof resident in the United Kingdom, exclusive of the Printer and Publisher, and also where the Number of such Proprietors resident in the United Kingdom shall exceed Two, the Amount of the proportional Shares or Interests of such several Proprietors whose Names shall be specified in such Declaration; and every such Declaration shall be made and signed by every Person named therein as Printer or Publisher of the Newspaper to which such Declaration shall relate, and by such of the said Persons named therein as Proprietors as shall be resident within the United Kingdom; and a Declaration of the like Import shall be made, signed, and delivered in like Manner whenever and so often as any Share, Interest, or Property soever in any Newspaper named in any such Declaration shall be assigned, transferred, divided, or changed by Act of the Parties or by Operation of Law, so that the respective proportional Shares or Interests of the Persons named in any such Declaration as Proprietors of such Newspaper, or either of them, shall respectively become less than the proportional Share or Interest of any other Proprietor thereof, exclusive of the Printer and Publisher, and also whenever and so often as any Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor named in any such Declaration, or the Person conducting the actual printing of the Newspaper named in any such Declaration shall be changed, or shall change his Place of Abode, and also whenever and so often as the Title of any such Newspaper or the Printing Office or the Place of Publication thereof shall be changed, and also whenever in any Case, or on any Occasion, or for any Purpose, the said Commissioners, or any Officer of Stamp Duties authorized in that Behalf, shall require such Declaration to be made, signed, and delivered, and shall cause Notice in Writing for that Purpose to be served upon any Person, or to be left or posted at any Place mentioned in the last preceding Declaration delivered as aforesaid, as being a Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of such Newspaper, or as being the Place of printing or publishing any such Newspaper respectively; and every such Declaration shall be made before any One or more of the said Commissioners, or before any Officer of Stamp Duties or other Person appointed by the said Commissioners, either generally or specially in that Behalf; and such Commissioners or any One of them, and such Officer or other Person, are and is hereby severally and respectively authorized to take and receive such Declaration as aforesaid; and if any Person shall knowingly and wilfully sign and make any such Declaration in which shall be inserted or set forth the Name, Addition, or Place of Abode of any Person as a Proprietor, Publisher, Printer, or Conductor of the actual printing of any Newspaper to which such Declaration shall relate, who shall not be a Proprietor, Printer, or Publisher thereof, or from which shall be omitted the Name, Addition, or Place of Abode of any Proprietor, Publisher, Printer, or Conductor of the actual printing of such Newspaper, contrary to the true Meaning of this Act, or in which any Matter or Thing by this Act required to be set forth shall be set forth otherwise than according to the Truth, or from which any Matter or Thing required by this Act to be truly set forth shall be entirely omitted, every such Offender, being convicted thereof, shall be deemed guilty of a Misdemeanor.

s. 7. “And be it enacted, That if any Person shall knowingly and wilfully print or publish, or shall cause to be printed or published, or either as a Proprietor or otherwise sell or deliver out any Newspaper relating to which such Declaration as aforesaid, containing such Matters and Things as are required by this Act to be therein contained, shall not have been duly signed and made and delivered when and so often as by this Act is required, or any other Matter or Thing required by this Act to be done or performed shall not have been accordingly done or performed, every Person in any such Case offending shall forfeit for every such Act done the Sum of Fifty Pounds for every Day on which any such Newspaper shall be printed or published, sold or delivered out, before or until such Declaration shall be signed and made and delivered, or before or until such other Matter or Thing shall be done or performed as by this Act is directed; and every such Person shall be disabled from receiving any stamped Paper for printing such Newspaper until such Declaration shall be signed and made and delivered, or until such other Matter or Thing shall be done and performed.

s. 8. “And be it enacted, That all such Declarations as aforesaid shall be filed and kept in such Manner as the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes shall direct for the safe Custody thereof; and Copies thereof, certified to be true Copies as by this Act is directed, shall respectively be admitted in all Proceedings, Civil and Criminal, and upon every Occasion whatsoever, touching any Newspaper mentioned in any such Declaration, or touching any Publication, Matter, or Thing contained in any such Newspaper, as conclusive Evidence of the Truth of all such Matters set forth in such Declaration as are hereby required to be therein set forth, and of their Continuance respectively in the same Condition down to the Time in question, against every Person who shall have signed such Declaration, unless it shall be proved that previous to such Time such Person became lunatic, or that previous to the Publication in question on such Trial such Person did duly sign and make a Declaration that such Person had ceased to be a Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of such Newspaper, and did duly deliver the same to the said Commissioners or to such Officer as aforesaid, or unless it shall be proved that previous to such Occasion as aforesaid a new Declaration of the same or a similar Nature respectively, or such as may be required by Law, was duly signed and made and delivered as aforesaid respecting the same Newspaper, in which the Person sought to be affected on such Trial did not join; and the said Commissioners, or the proper authorized Officer by whom any such Declaration shall be kept according to the Directions of this Act, shall, upon Application in Writing made to them or him respectively by any Person requiring a Copy certified according to this Act of any such Declaration as aforesaid, in order that the same may be produced in any Civil or Criminal Proceeding, deliver such certified Copy or cause the same to be delivered to the Person applying for the same upon Payment of the Sum of One Shilling, and no more; and in all Proceedings, and upon all Occasions whatsoever, a Copy of any such Declaration, certified to be a true Copy under the Hand of One of the said Commissioners or of any Officer in whose Possession the same shall be, upon Proof made that such Certificate hath been signed with the Handwriting of a Person described in or by such Certificate as such Commissioner or Officer, and whom it shall not be necessary to prove to be a Commissioner or Officer, shall be received in Evidence against any and every Person named in such Declaration as a Person making or signing the same as sufficient Proof of such Declaration, and that the same was duly signed and made according to this Act, and of the Contents thereof; and every such Copy so produced and certified shall have the same Effect for the Purposes of Evidence against any and every such Person named therein as aforesaid, to all Intents whatsoever, as if the original Declaration of which the Copy so produced and certified shall purport to be a Copy had been produced in Evidence, and been proved to have been duly signed and made by the Person appearing by such Copy to have signed and made the same as aforesaid; and whenever a certified Copy of any such Declaration shall have been produced in Evidence as aforesaid against any Person having signed and made such Declaration, and a Newspaper shall afterwards be produced in Evidence intituled in the same Manner as the Newspaper mentioned in such Declaration is intituled, and wherein the Name of the Printer and Publisher and the Place of printing shall be the same as the Name of the Printer and Publisher and the Place of printing mentioned in such Declaration, or shall purport to be the same, whether such Title, Name, and Place printed upon such Newspaper shall be set forth in the same Form of Words as is contained in the said Declaration, or in any Form of Words varying therefrom, it shall not be necessary for the Plaintiff, Informant, or Prosecutor in any Action, Prosecution, or other Proceeding, to prove that the Newspaper to which such Action, Prosecution, or other Proceeding may relate was purchased of the Defendant, or at any House, Shop, or Office belonging to or occupied by the Defendant, or by his Servants or Workmen, or where he may usually carry on the Business of printing or publishing such Newspaper, or where the same may be usually sold; and if any Person, not being one of the said Commissioners or the proper authorized Officer, shall give any Certificate purporting to be such Certificate as aforesaid, or shall presume to certify any of the Matters or Things by this Act directed to be certified by such Commissioner or Officer, or which such Commissioner or Officer is hereby empowered or intrusted to certify; or if any such Commissioner or Officer shall knowingly and wilfully falsely certify under his Hand that any such Declaration as is required to be made by this Act was duly signed and made before him, the same not having been so signed and made, or shall knowingly and wilfully falsely certify that any Copy of any Declaration is a true Copy of the Declaration of which the same is certified to be such Copy, the same not being such true Copy, every Person so offending shall forfeit the Sum of One hundred Pounds.

s. 9. “And be it enacted, That in any Suit, Prosecution, or Proceeding, Civil or Criminal, against any Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any Newspaper, Service at the House or Place mentioned in any such Declaration as aforesaid as the House or Place at which such Newspaper is printed or published, or intended so to be, of any Notice or other Matter required or directed by this Act to be given or left, or of any Summons, Subpœna, Rule, Order, Writ, or Process of what Nature soever, either to enforce an Appearance, or for any other Purpose whatsoever, shall be taken to be good and sufficient Service thereof respectively upon and against every Person named in such Declaration as the Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of the Newspaper mentioned in such Declaration.

s. 10. “And be it enacted, That the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes shall cause to be entered in a Book to be kept at the Head Office for Stamps in _Westminster_, _Edinburgh_, and _Dublin_ respectively, the Title of every Newspaper registered at the said respective Offices, and also the Names of the Printers and Publishers thereof as the same appear in the Declarations required by this Act to be made relating to such Newspapers respectively, and all Persons shall have free Liberty to search and inspect the said Book from Time to Time, during the Hours of Business at the said Offices, without Payment of any Fee or Reward.

s. 11. “And be it enacted, That no Person shall print or publish, or shall cause to be printed or published, any Newspaper, nor shall any Officer of Stamp Duties or any Vendor of Stamps for Newspapers sell or deliver any stamped Paper for Newspapers to any Printer or Publisher of any Newspaper, or to any Person on his Account, before or until such Printer and Publisher, together with the Proprietor of such Newspaper, or such One or more of the Proprietors thereof, as in the Judgment of the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes or of the proper authorized Officer may be sufficient for the Purpose, together also with Two sufficient Sureties, to be approved of by the said Commissioners or such Officer as aforesaid, shall have entered into Security by Bond to His Majesty in such Sum as the said Commissioners or Officer shall think reasonable and sufficient for Payment of the Duties which shall or may from Time to Time be payable for the Advertisements which shall be printed or inserted in such Newspaper; and every such Bond, when duly executed, shall be delivered to and deposited with the proper authorized Officer at the respective Head Offices for Stamps in _Westminster_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_, according as such Newspaper shall be printed in _England_, _Scotland_, or _Ireland_; and such Bond shall be renewed from Time to Time, with Sureties to be approved as aforesaid, whenever any One or more of the Parties thereto shall die, or become bankrupt or insolvent, or reside in Parts beyond the Sea, and also whenever and so often as the said Commissioners or any Officer of Stamp Duties authorized in that Behalf shall require the same to be renewed, and shall give Notice to the Printer, Publisher, or any Proprietor of such Newspaper for that Purpose; and every Person who shall print or publish, or shall cause to be printed or published, any Newspaper before such Bond shall have been entered into and delivered as aforesaid, or who shall neglect or refuse to renew such Bond in manner aforesaid whenever the same is or shall be required to be renewed by or in pursuance of this Act, shall forfeit the Sum of One hundred Pounds for every Day on which such Newspaper shall be so printed and published before such Bond shall have been entered into and delivered as aforesaid.

s. 12. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That no Person being a Printer or Publisher or Proprietor of any Newspaper at the Time of the Commencement of this Act, and who in pursuance of any Act in force immediately before the Commencement of this Act shall have signed and sworn and delivered any Affidavit, or shall have given or entered into any Bond or Security of the same Nature and for the like Purposes as any Declaration or Bond required by this Act, shall by reason of the passing of this Act be required or bound to deliver or make any new Declaration, or to give or enter into any new Bond or Security, touching any Newspaper mentioned in such former Affidavit or Bond or Security, but every such Affidavit and every such Bond or Security so made and delivered before the Commencement of this Act as to the Newspaper therein mentioned, whether the same shall be published before or after the Commencement of this Act, shall be deemed and taken to be a Compliance with this Act; and a Copy of every such Affidavit, certified as aforesaid, shall in all Proceedings and upon all Occasions whatsoever, be received as conclusive Evidence against any and every Person named in such Affidavit as a Person making, signing, or swearing the same, of all the Matters therein contained, in the same Manner as is herein-before provided with respect to any Declaration which may be made in pursuance of this Act, and shall be of the same Force and Effect to all Intents and Purposes as if the same had been made subsequent to the Commencement of this Act, and in conformity with the Provisions hereof: Provided nevertheless, that in case the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, or any authorized Officer of Stamp Duties, shall, by Notice in Writing to be given in the Manner herein-before directed, require a Declaration to be made and delivered, or any new Bond or Security to be given or entered into, in conformity with the Provisions of this Act, by any such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any such Newspaper, or in case any Transfer, Change, or Alteration shall take place in the Share, Interest, or Property of any Person named in such Affidavit relating to any such Newspaper, or in the Place of Abode of the Printer or Publisher thereof, or of any Proprietor named in such Affidavit, or the Place of printing the same, or in the Person by whom the printing of such Newspaper shall be conducted, or in the Title of any such Newspaper, then and in every such case a Declaration shall be made and delivered, and a new Bond shall be entered into and given, according to the Provisions of this Act; and every Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any such Newspaper who shall knowingly and wilfully continue to print or publish any such Newspaper, after the happening of any of the Events aforesaid, before or until a Declaration containing all the Particulars required by this Act shall be made and delivered, and a new Bond shall be entered into and given, according to the Directions of this Act, shall be subject to all such Penalties and Disabilities as such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor would have been subject or liable to under this Act if no Declaration relating to such Newspaper had ever been made, nor any such Bond entered into: And provided also, that nothing contained in this Act shall extend to require the Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of the _London Gazette_ or _Dublin Gazette_ to make any Declaration required by this Act; but the Printers and Publishers of the said respective Gazettes shall enter into the Bonds by this Act required, together with the Sureties herein-before mentioned for securing the Payment of the Duties upon all Advertisements which shall be printed in the said Gazettes respectively, and shall renew the same from Time to Time in like Manner as the Printers and Publishers of other Newspapers are or may be required to renew their respective Bonds by or under this Act.

s. 13. “And be it enacted, That the Printer or Publisher of every Newspaper printed or published in the City of _London_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_, or within Twenty Miles of any of the said Cities respectively, shall, upon every Day on which such Newspaper shall be published, or on the Day next following which shall not be a Holiday, between the Hours of Ten and Three on each Day, deliver or cause to be delivered to the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, or to the proper authorized Officer, at the Head Office for Stamps in one of the said Cities respectively in or nearest to which such Newspaper shall be printed or published, One Copy of every such Newspaper, and of every second or other varied Edition or Impression thereof so printed or published, with the Name and Place of Abode of the Printer or Publisher thereof, signed and written thereon after the same shall be printed by his proper Hand and in his accustomed Manner of signing, or by some Person appointed and authorized by him for that Purpose, and of whose Appointment and Authority Notice in Writing, signed by such Printer or Publisher in the Presence of and attested by an Officer of Stamp Duties, shall be given to the said Commissioners, or to the Officer to whom such Copies are to be delivered; and the Printer or Publisher of every Newspaper printed or published in any other Place in the United Kingdom shall, upon every Day on which such Newspaper shall be published, or within Three Days next following, in like Manner between the Hours of Ten and Three, deliver or cause to be delivered to the Distributor of Stamps, or other authorized Officer in whose District such Newspaper shall be printed or published, Two Copies of every such Newspaper, and of every second or other varied Edition or Impression thereof so printed or published, with the Name and Place of Abode of the Printer or Publisher thereof signed and written thereon in manner aforesaid after the same shall be printed, and the same Copies shall be carefully kept by the said Commissioners, or by such Distributor or Officer as aforesaid, in such Manner as the said Commissioners shall direct; and such Printer or Publisher shall be entitled to demand and receive from the Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer, once in every Week, the Amount of the ordinary Price of the Newspapers so delivered; and every Printer and Publisher of such Newspaper who shall neglect to deliver or cause to be delivered in manner herein-before directed, such Copy or Copies signed as aforesaid, shall for every such Neglect respectively forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds; and in case any Person shall make Application in Writing to the said Commissioners, or to such Distributor or Officer as aforesaid, in order that any Newspaper so signed as aforesaid may be produced in Evidence in any Proceeding, Civil or Criminal, the said Commissioners, or Distributor or Officer, shall, at the Expence of the Party applying, at any Time within Two Years from the Publication thereof, either cause such Newspaper to be produced in the Court in which and at the Time when the same is required to be produced, or shall deliver the same to the Party applying for the same, taking, according to their Discretion, reasonable Security, at the Expence of such Party, for returning the same to the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer, within a certain period to be fixed by them respectively; and in case, by reason that such Newspaper shall have been previously applied for in manner aforesaid by any other Person, the same cannot be produced or cannot be delivered according to any subsequent Application, in such Case the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer as aforesaid, shall cause the same to be produced, or shall deliver the same as soon as they are enabled so to do; and all Copies so delivered as aforesaid shall be Evidence against every Printer, Publisher, and Proprietor of every such Newspaper respectively in all Proceedings, Civil or Criminal, to be commenced and carried on, as well touching such Newspaper as any Matter or Thing therein contained, and touching any other Newspaper and any Matter or Thing therein contained which shall be of the same Title, Purport, or Effect with such Copy so delivered as aforesaid, although such Copy may vary in some Instances or Particulars, either as to Title, Purport, or Effect; and every Printer, Publisher, and Proprietor of any Copy so delivered as aforesaid, shall to all Intents and Purposes be deemed to be the Printer, Publisher, and Proprietor respectively of all Newspapers which shall be of the same Title, Purport, or Effect with such Copies or Impressions so delivered as aforesaid, notwithstanding such Variance as aforesaid, unless such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor respectively shall prove that such Newspapers were not printed or published by him, nor by nor with his Knowledge or Privity: Provided always, that if any Printer or Publisher of any Newspaper which shall not be printed and published in the Cities of _London_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_, or within Twenty Miles of the said Cities respectively, shall find it more convenient to cause such Copies of such Newspaper to be delivered to any other Distributor of Stamps than the Distributor in whose District such Newspaper shall be published, and such Printer and Publisher shall state such Matter by Petition to the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, and pray that he may have Liberty to cause such Copies to be delivered to such other Distributor as he shall so name at the Office of such Distributor, it shall be lawful for the said Commissioners to order the same accordingly, and from and after the Date of such Order the Place of Publication of such Newspaper shall for that Purpose only be deemed and taken to be within the District of such other Distributor until the same shall be otherwise ordered by the said Commissioners.

s. 14. “And be it enacted, That at the end of every Newspaper, and of any and every Supplement Sheet or Piece of Paper, shall be printed the Christian Name and Surname, Addition, and Place of Abode, of the Printer and Publisher of the same, and also a true Description of the House or Building wherein the same is actually printed and published respectively, and the Day of the Week, Month, and Year on which the same is published; and if any Person shall knowingly and wilfully print or publish, or cause to be printed or published, any Newspaper or Supplement thereto whereon the several Particulars aforesaid shall not be printed, or whereon there shall be printed any false Name, Addition, Place, or Day, or whereon there shall be printed any Description of the Place of printing or publishing such Newspaper which shall be different in any respect from the Description of the House or Building mentioned in the Declaration required by this Act to be made relating to such Newspaper as the House or Building wherein such Newspaper is intended to be printed or published, every such Person shall for any and every such Offence forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 15. “And be it enacted, That it shall not be lawful for any Person other than a Commissioner of Stamps and Taxes, or Officer of Stamp Duties, to sell, supply, or part with any Paper stamped for the purpose of being used for printing Newspapers thereon, unless nor until such Person shall be duly licensed and authorized by the said Commissioners to vend Newspaper Stamps, and shall have given Security by Bond to His Majesty, with sufficient Sureties, to be approved of by the said Commissioners, in such Sum as the said Commissioners shall think reasonable, and the several Conditions of such Bond shall be as follow; (that is to say,) that such Vendor of Newspaper Stamps shall and will deliver or cause to be delivered to the said Commissioners, within Four Days after the End of every Six Weeks, a true and accurate Account of the Quantities and Kinds of all Paper stamped as aforesaid by him sold, supplied, or delivered during such Six Weeks immediately preceding, and to what Persons, naming them; and that such Vendor will not sell, supply, or part with any such Paper to or on account of any Person other than a Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of a Newspaper; and that such Vendor will not sell, supply, or part with such Paper to or on account of any such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor, until the Person applying for the same shall have delivered to such Vendor a Certificate signed by One or more of the said Commissioners, or by the proper authorized Officer of Stamp Duties, purporting that such Security as is required by Law hath been given by the Printer, Publisher, and Proprietor respectively of the Newspaper for the printing of which such stamped Paper is to be sold, supplied, or parted with, and that such Declaration hath been made and delivered respecting the same as is by this Act required; and that such Vendor will not sell, supply, or part with any such Paper to or on account of any Printer, Proprietor, or Publisher of any Newspaper, with respect to whom Notice shall be given to such Vendor by the said Commissioners or any such Officer that such Security has not been duly given, or has not been renewed, pursuant to this Act, or is not remaining in Force, or that the Parties or any of them who have given the same are or is dead, or gone Abroad, or are or is not to be found, or that such Parties or any of them have or hath given Notice that they or he are or is no longer concerned as Printers, Publishers, or Proprietors, or as a Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of such Newspaper, or that no such Declaration respecting the same, as required by this Act, hath been made and delivered, or that any such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor hath become disabled or disqualified under this Act to be the Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any such Newspaper or to receive stamped Paper for the Purpose of printing the same; and if any Person as aforesaid shall sell, supply, or part with any such stamped Paper for the Purpose aforesaid without having given such Security as aforesaid, or if any Person who shall obtain or receive any stamped Paper for the printing of any Newspaper of which he is or shall be the Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor, shall furnish or supply any other Person with any such stamped Paper, or if any Person shall use for the printing of any Newspaper any stamped Paper which he shall receive or be furnished with by or from any Person other than the said Commissioners or their Officers, or some Person duly authorised to sell or distribute such stamped Paper, every Person so offending shall for every such Offence forfeit the Sum of Fifty Pounds; and in any Proceeding for Recovery of such Penalty in the last-mentioned Case, it shall lie on the Person sought to be charged with such Offence to prove that the stamped Paper used by such Person in the printing of any Newspaper was obtained by such Person from the said Commissioners or their Officers, or from some Person duly authorized to sell or distribute such stamped Paper; any Law or Usage to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 16. “And be it enacted, That every Person printing or publishing, or being concerned either as Proprietor or otherwise in printing or publishing, any Newspaper upon Paper not duly stamped, shall be deemed and taken to owe to his Majesty such Sums of Money as would have accrued to his Majesty in case the same had been printed upon Paper duly stamped; and whenever any Information or Bill shall be filed, or other Proceeding shall be had on His Majesty’s Behalf, for Discovery of the Matters aforesaid, and for an Account and Payment of such Sums, it shall not be lawful for the Defendant to plead or demur to such Information, Bill, or Proceeding, but he shall be compellable to make such Discovery as shall be thereby required to be made: Provided always, that such Discovery shall not be made use of as Evidence or otherwise in any Proceeding against any such Defendant except only in that Proceeding in which the Discovery is made.

s. 17. “And be it enacted, That if any Person shall knowingly and wilfully print or publish, or cause to be printed or published, any Newspaper on Paper not duly stamped according to Law, or if any Person shall knowingly and wilfully sell, utter, or expose to Sale, or shall dispose of or distribute, any Newspaper not duly stamped as aforesaid, or if any Person shall knowingly and wilfully have in his Possession any Newspaper not duly stamped as aforesaid, every Person so offending in any of the Cases aforesaid shall for every such Newspaper, and for every Copy thereof not duly stamped, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds; and moreover it shall be lawful for any Officer of Stamp Duties, or for any Person appointed or authorized by the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes in that Behalf, to seize and apprehend any such Offender as aforesaid, and to take him or cause him to be taken before any Justice of the Peace having Jurisdiction where the Offence shall be committed, who shall hear and determine the Matter in a summary Way; and if upon Conviction such Offender shall not immediately pay the Penalty or Penalties in which he shall be convicted, such Justice shall forthwith commit him to Prison for any Time not exceeding Three Calendar Months, nor less than One Calendar Month, unless such Penalty or Penalties shall be sooner paid: Provided always, that if any such Offender as aforesaid shall not be apprehended and proceeded against in the Manner herein-before directed, then the said Penalty or Penalties incurred by any such Offence as aforesaid shall be recoverable by any other of the Ways and Means provided for the Recovery of Penalties incurred under this Act.

s. 18. “And be it enacted, That if any Person shall knowingly and wilfully directly or indirectly send or carry, or endeavour to send or carry, or cause or procure to be sent or carried, or do or cause to be done any Act whatever for or towards the sending or carrying, or for or towards the causing or procuring to be sent or carried, or with Intent that the same should be sent or carried, out of any Part of the United Kingdom, any Newspaper, the same not being duly stamped according to Law, such Person shall forfeit for every such Offence the Sum of Fifty Pounds; and it shall be lawful for any Officer of Stamp Duties, or for any Person appointed or authorized by the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes in that Behalf, without any other Warrant than this Act, to seize and take away all Newspapers not duly stamped wheresoever the same shall be found, unless the same shall be in the Possession of some Person having the Custody thereof by lawful Authority; and all Newspapers not duly stamped which shall be seized or taken under any of the Provisions of this Act shall be destroyed or otherwise disposed of as the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes may direct.

s. 19. “And be it enacted, That if any Person shall file any Bill in any Court for the Discovery of the Name of any Person concerned as Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any Newspaper, or of any Matters relative to the printing or publishing of any Newspaper, in order the more effectually to bring or carry on any Suit or Action for Damages alleged to have been sustained by reason of any slanderous or libellous Matter contained in any such Newspaper respecting such Person, it shall not be lawful for the Defendant to plead or demur to such Bill, but such Defendant shall be compellable to make the Discovery required: Provided always, that such Discovery shall not be made use of as Evidence or otherwise in any Proceeding against the Defendant, save only in that Proceeding for which the Discovery is made.

s. 20. “And be it enacted, That the Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of every Newspaper shall, within Twenty-eight Days after the last Day of every Calendar Month, pay or cause to be paid the Duty chargeable on all and every Advertisement and Advertisements contained in or published with such Newspaper during the said Calendar Month to the Receiver General of Stamps and Taxes, or to the proper Officer appointed to receive the same, at the Head Office for Stamps in the Cities of _Westminster_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_ respectively, if such Newspaper shall be printed or published within any of the said Cities, or within Twenty Miles thereof respectively, and if the same shall be printed or published in any other Part of the United Kingdom, then to the Distributor of Stamps in whose District such Newspaper shall be printed or published; and if any Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any Newspaper shall neglect to pay within Ten Days next after Notice given to him by any Officer of Stamp Duties, after the Expiration of the said Term of Twenty-eight Days, the Duty on any such Advertisement, it shall be lawful for the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes and their Officers, and they are hereby required, to refuse to sell or deliver, and also to give Notice to and to require any Vendor of such stamped Paper to refuse to sell or deliver, to or for the Use of such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor, any such stamped Paper for printing such Newspaper thereon until all Arrears of Advertisement Duty, to the Payment of which such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor may be subject, shall be duly paid and discharged up to and for the last Day of the Month next preceding the Month in which such Payment shall be made.

s. 21. “And be it enacted, That One printed Copy of every periodical literary Work or Paper (not being a Newspaper), containing or having published therewith any Advertisements or Advertisement liable to Stamp Duty, which shall be published within the Cities of _London_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_ respectively, or within Twenty Miles thereof respectively, shall, within the Space of Six Days next after the Publication thereof, be brought, together with all Advertisements printed therein, or published or intended to be published therewith, to the Head Office for Stamps in _Westminster_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_, nearest to which such literary Work or Paper shall have been published, and the Title thereof, and the Christian Name and Surname of the Printer and Publisher thereof, with the Number of Advertisements contained therein or published therewith, and any Stamp Duty by Law payable in respect of such Advertisements shall be registered in a Book to be kept at such Office, and the Duty on such Advertisements shall be there paid to the Receiver General of Stamps and Taxes for the Time being, or his Deputy or Clerk, or the proper authorized Officer; and One printed Copy of every such literary Work or Paper as aforesaid which shall be published in any Place in the United Kingdom not being within the Cities of _London_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_, or within Twenty Miles thereof respectively, shall, within the Space of Ten Days next after the Publication thereof, be brought, together with all such Advertisements as aforesaid, to the Head Distributor of Stamps for the Time being within the District in which such literary Work or Paper shall be published, and such Distributor is hereby required forthwith to register the same in manner aforesaid in a Book to be by him kept for that Purpose, and the Duty payable in respect of such Advertisements shall be thereupon paid to such Distributor; and if the Duty which shall be by Law payable in respect of any such Advertisements as aforesaid shall not be duly paid within the respective Times and in the Manner herein-before limited and appointed for that Purpose, the Printer and Publisher of such literary Work or Paper, and every other Person concerned in the printing or publishing thereof, and the Publisher of any such Advertisements, shall respectively forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds for every such Offence; and in any Action, Information, or other Proceeding for the Recovery of such Penalty, or for the Recovery of the Duty on any such Advertisements, Proof of the Payment of the said Duty shall lie upon the Defendant.

s. 22. “And be it enacted, That upon Information given before any Justice of the Peace upon the Oath of One or more credible Person or Persons (which Oath such Justice is hereby empowered and required to administer) that there is reasonable and probable Cause to suspect any Person of being or having been, at any Time within One Calendar Month last preceding, in any Way knowingly and wilfully engaged or concerned in printing, publishing, vending, or otherwise distributing any Newspaper not duly stamped as required by Law, or of being unlawfully possessed of any Newspapers not duly stamped as aforesaid, or that any Printing Press, Engine, Machine, Types, or other Implements or Utensils for printing is or are or have been by any Person knowingly and wilfully used within the Time last aforesaid for the Purpose of composing or printing any Newspaper not duly stamped as aforesaid, or that any such Newspapers are sold or distributed, or kept for Sale or Distribution, or are unlawfully deposited in any Place, then and in every such Case it shall be lawful for such Justice and he is hereby required, upon the Application of any Officer of Stamp Duties, to grant a Warrant under his Hand, directed to any Constable or other Peace Officer, or any Officer of Stamp Duties, or other Person or Persons named in such Warrant, authorizing and empowering him or them, with such other Person or Persons as he or they shall call to his or their Assistance, to enter and search in the Daytime, any House, Room, Shop, Warehouse, Outhouse, Building, or other Place belonging to such suspected Person, or where such Person shall be suspected of being engaged or concerned or of having been engaged or concerned in the Commission of any such illegal Act as aforesaid, or where any such Printing Press, Engine, Machine, Types, Implements, or Utensils suspected to be or to have been used for any such illegal Purpose as aforesaid shall be or be suspected to be, or where any such Newspapers as aforesaid are suspected to be sold or distributed, or kept or deposited as aforesaid; and if upon any such Search as aforesaid any Newspapers not duly stamped as aforesaid, or any Printing Press, Engine, Machine, Types, Implements, or Utensils which shall have been used in printing or publishing any such Newspaper as aforesaid within the Time last aforesaid, shall be found, it shall be lawful for the Person or Persons named in such Warrant, and his or their Assistant or Assistants, to seize and take away the same, together with all other Presses, Engines, Machines, Types, Implements, Utensils, and Materials for printing belonging to the same Person, or which shall be found in the same House, Room, Shop, Warehouse, Outhouse, Building, or Place; and all such Presses, Engines, Machines, Types, Implements, Utensils, and Materials shall be forfeited to the Use of His Majesty, and shall be proceeded against to Condemnation in His Majesty’s Court of Exchequer in _England_, _Scotland_, or _Ireland_ respectively, in like Manner as in the Case of any Goods seized as forfeited for any Breach of the Laws relating to His Majesty’s Revenues of Customs or Excise.

s. 23. “And be it enacted, That upon the Execution of any Warrant granted under this Act, authorizing any Search to be made in any House, Room, Shop, Warehouse, Outhouse, Building, or other Place, if on Demand of Admittance and Notice of any such Warrant the Door of any such House, Room, Shop, Warehouse, Outhouse, Building, or other Place shall not be forthwith opened, it shall be lawful for the Constable or other Peace Officer having the Execution of such Warrant, or for any other Person or Persons to whom such Warrant shall be directed, in the Presence of any Constable or other Peace Officer, in the Daytime, to break open such Door and to enter thereat for the Purpose of making such Search as aforesaid; and if any Person shall refuse to permit any Constable, Peace Officer, or Officer of Stamp Duties, or any other Person duly authorized in that Behalf, to enter into any House, Room, Shop, Warehouse, Outhouse, Building, or other Place for the Purpose of making any Search by or under this Act directed or authorized to be made, or shall resist, obstruct, molest, prevent, or hinder any such Constable, Officer, or Person as aforesaid in the making of any such Search, or in the Execution of any Warrant issued under or in pursuance of this Act, or in the seizing or taking away of any Goods, Chattels, Articles, Matters, or Things which may be lawfully seized or taken, or in the apprehending or detaining of any Offender or other Person who may lawfully be apprehended or detained, or otherwise in the Execution of any of the Duties, Powers, or Authorities given to or vested in any such Constable, Officer, or other Person as aforesaid by or under any of the Provisions of this Act, every Person so offending in any of the several Cases aforesaid shall forfeit for every such Offence the Sum of Twenty Pounds; and all Constables and other Peace Officers shall be and they are hereby required to be aiding and assisting in the Execution of all Warrants issued under this Act; and if any Constable or other Peace Officer shall neglect or refuse to do or perform any Service or Duty by this Act required or directed to be done or performed by him, or shall neglect or refuse to aid and assist in the Execution of any such Warrant as aforesaid, or of any of the Provisions of this Act, upon proper Application or Notice made or given to him in that Behalf, or shall neglect or refuse to execute or serve any Warrant or Summons granted or issued pursuant to any of the Provisions of this Act, every such Constable or Peace Officer shall forfeit Ten Pounds for every such Neglect or Refusal.

s. 24. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for every Person having in his Possession any Printing Press, or any Engine or Machine for printing, if he shall think fit, to deliver or cause to be delivered in the Manner herein-after mentioned a Notice thereof signed with his own Hand in the Presence of and attested by an Officer of Stamp Duties, which Notice shall specify the Christian Name and Surname and Place of Abode of the Person possessed of any such Printing Press, Engine, or Machine, and a true Description of the House or Building and Place in which the same shall be kept and used for printing; and every such Person who shall give any such Notice as aforesaid shall also at the same Time, if he shall think fit, deliver or cause to be delivered in like Manner a List of all or any of the periodical Papers for the printing of which any such Press, Engine, or Machine is used or intended to be used, and every such Person as aforesaid shall afterwards from Time to Time quarterly, that is to say, within Seven Days after the First Day of _March_, the First Day of _June_, the First Day of _September_, and the First Day of _December_ in every Year, deliver or cause to be delivered in like Manner a similar List of all or any of such periodical Papers as aforesaid; and in the meantime and from Time to Time as often as such Person shall undertake or permit the printing with any such Press, Engine, or Machine as aforesaid of any periodical Paper not specified in the last quarterly List delivered by such Person, he shall, if he shall think fit, before the Commencement of the printing of such last-mentioned Paper, or within Three Days next after any Part or Number thereof shall be first printed with any such Press, Engine, or Machine as aforesaid, give Notice of the printing thereof in manner herein-after mentioned; and every such List and Notice of Papers for the printing of which any such Press, Engine, or Machine is used or intended to be used shall be signed by the Person possessed of such Printing Press, Engine, or Machine with his own Hand, or by some Person appointed and authorised by him for that Purpose, and of whose Appointment and Authority Notice in Writing signed by the Person possessed of such Press, Engine, or Machine as aforesaid, in the Presence of and attested by an Officer of Stamp Duties, shall be given to the said Commissioners, or to the Officer to whom such Lists as aforesaid are to be delivered; and every such List and Notice of Papers printed or to be printed as aforesaid shall specify and set forth the correct Title of every such Paper, and the Name and Place of Abode of the Printer thereof as the same shall appear in the Imprint, and also the Name and Place of Abode of the Person who shall employ the Person possessed of such Press, Engine, or Machine to print or work off such Paper, or who shall engage or use any such Press, Engine, or Machine for that Purpose; and every such Notice as aforesaid relating to the Possession of any Printing Press, Engine, or Machine, and also every List or Notice of the Papers printed or to be printed therewith, shall respectively be delivered to the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, or to some Officer appointed by them to receive the same respectively, at the Head Office for Stamps in _Westminster_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_, according as the Person giving any such Notice or List shall reside in _England_, _Scotland_, or _Ireland_, or to the Distributor of Stamps for the District in which such Person shall reside.

s. 25. “And be it enacted. That no Person who shall have duly given such Notice as aforesaid of being possessed of any Press, Engine, or Machine for printing, and shall, within the respective Periods and in the Manner herein-before limited and directed for that Purpose, have delivered Lists and Notices of all or any of the periodical Papers for the printing of which any such Press, Engine, or Machine shall be used, shall be liable to any Penalty or Forfeiture under this Act in respect of any Paper, the same not being a registered Newspaper, truly specified in the last quarterly List delivered by such Person, or in any Notice duly given by him since the Delivery of the said List, by reason of such Paper having been printed with any such Press, Engine, or Machine of the Possession of which such Notice as aforesaid shall have been given, although such Paper may be liable to Stamp Duty, and may have been printed on Paper not duly stamped, unless the same shall be a registered Newspaper, or unless the same shall have been so printed as aforesaid after Notice given by the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, or some Officer of Stamp Duties, in the Manner herein-after mentioned; (that is to say,) provided always, that if a Notice signed by any One or more of the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, or by any Officer of Stamp Duties, shall be delivered to any Person possessed of any such Printing Press, Engine, or Machine, or shall be left for him at the Place mentioned in any Notice given by him as aforesaid as the Place of his Abode, or the Place where such Printing Press, Engine, or Machine is used for printing, informing him that any Paper is chargeable with Stamp Duty as a Newspaper under this Act, then if the same shall be so chargeable, and such Person shall after such Notice as aforesaid continue to print such Paper, or any subsequent Part or Number thereof, or any Paper of the like Nature, whether under the same or any different Form or Title, or if after such Notice as aforesaid such Person shall permit or suffer any Press, Engine, or Machine belonging to him or in his Possession to be used for the printing of any such Paper, Part, or Number as aforesaid, such Person shall be liable to all the Penalties and Forfeitures imposed by this Act for any Offence committed against any of the Provisions thereof, after such Notice as aforesaid, without any further or other Notice or Caution: Provided also, that every Person who shall neglect or omit to give any such Notice or to deliver any such List as aforesaid in the Manner and Form and within the Time herein-before directed and limited in that Behalf, shall be liable to and chargeable with all Penalties and Forfeitures imposed by this Act for any Offence committed against the Provisions thereof, without any previous Notice or Caution whatsoever.

s. 26. “And be it enacted, That all Actions and Prosecutions which shall be brought or commenced against any Person for any thing done in pursuance or under the Authority of this Act shall be commenced and prosecuted within Three Calendar Months next after the Fact committed, and not afterwards, and shall in _England_ or _Ireland_ be brought and tried in the County or Place where the Cause of Action shall arise, and not elsewhere, and shall in _Scotland_ be brought in the Court of Exchequer; and Notice in Writing of such Action, and of the Cause thereof, shall be given to the Defendant One Calendar Month at least before the Commencement of the Action; and the Defendant in such Action may plead the General Issue, and give this Act and any other Matter or Thing in Evidence at any Trial to be had thereupon; and if the Cause of Action shall appear to arise from any Matter or Thing done in pursuance and by the Authority of this Act, or if any such Action shall be brought after the Expiration of such Three Calendar Months, or shall be brought in any other County or Place than as aforesaid, or if Notice of such Action shall not have been given in manner aforesaid, or if Tender of sufficient Amends shall have been made before such Action commenced, or if a sufficient Sum of Money shall have been paid into Court after such Action commenced by or on behalf of the Defendant, the Jury shall find a Verdict for the Defendant; and if a Verdict shall pass for the Defendant, or if the Plaintiff shall become Nonsuit, or shall discontinue any such Action, or if, on Demurrer or otherwise, Judgment shall be given against the Plaintiff, the Defendant shall recover his full Costs of Suit as between Attorney and Client, and shall have the like Remedy for the same as any Defendant may have for Costs of Suit in other Cases at Law.

s. 27. “And be it enacted, That all pecuniary Penalties under this Act may be sued or prosecuted for and recovered for the Use of His Majesty in the Name of His Majesty’s Attorney General or Solicitor General in _England_ or _Ireland_, or of His Majesty’s Advocate General or Solicitor General in _Scotland_, or of the Solicitor of Stamps and Taxes in _England_ or _Scotland_, or of the Solicitor of Stamps in _Ireland_, or of any Person authorized to sue or prosecute for the same, by Writing under the Hands of the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, or in the Name of any Officer of Stamp Duties, by Action of Debt, Bill, Plaint, or Information in the Court of Exchequer at _Westminster_ in respect of any Penalty incurred in _England_, and in the Court of Exchequer in _Scotland_ in respect of any Penalty incurred in _Scotland_, and in the Court of Exchequer in _Dublin_ or by Civil Bill in the Court of the Recorder, Chairman, or Assistant Barrister within whose local Jurisdiction any Offence shall have been committed, in respect of any Penalty incurred in _Ireland_, or in respect of any Penalty not exceeding Twenty Pounds by Information or Complaint before One or more Justice or Justices of the Peace in any Part of the United Kingdom, in manner by this Act provided; and it shall not be lawful for any Person other than as aforesaid to inform, sue, or prosecute for any such Penalty as aforesaid, except where, in the Case of apprehending an Offender by any Person appointed or authorised by the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes in that Behalf, it is by this Act otherwise expressly provided and allowed; and it shall be lawful in all Cases for the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, either before or after any Proceedings commenced for Recovery of any such Penalty, to mitigate or compound any such Penalty as the said Commissioners shall think fit, and to stay any such Proceedings after the same shall have been commenced, and whether Judgment may have been obtained for such Penalty or not, on Payment of Part only of any such Penalty, with or without Costs, or on Payment only of the Costs incurred in such Proceeding, or of any Part thereof, or on such other Terms as such Commissioners shall judge reasonable: Provided always, that in no such Proceeding as aforesaid shall any Essoign, Protection, Wager of Law, nor more than One Imparlance be allowed; and all pecuniary Penalties imposed by or incurred under this Act, by whom or in whose Name soever the same shall be sued or prosecuted for or recovered, shall go and be applied to the Use of His Majesty, and shall be deemed to be and shall be accounted for as Part of His Majesty’s Revenue arising from Stamp Duties, any thing in any Act contained, or any Law or Usage, to the contrary in anywise notwithstanding: Provided always, that it shall be lawful for the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes, at their Discretion, to give all or any Part of such Penalties as Rewards to any Person or Persons who shall have detected the Offenders, or given Information which may have led to their Prosecution and Conviction.

s. 28. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for any Justice of the Peace within whose Jurisdiction any Offence the Penalty for which shall not exceed Twenty Pounds shall be committed against this Act, and such Justice is hereby required, upon any Information exhibited or Complaint made by any Person duly authorized in that Behalf, to summon the Party accused and also the Witnesses on either Side to be and appear before the said Justice or before any other Justice of the Peace at a Time and Place to be appointed for that Purpose, and whether the Party accused shall appear or not it shall be lawful for the said Justice or any other Justice present at the Time and Place appointed for such Appearance to proceed to examine into the Fact, and upon due Proof made thereof to the Satisfaction of any such Justice, either by Confession of the Party accused or by the Oath of One or more credible Witness or Witnesses, to convict such Offender, and to give Judgment for the Penalty and Costs to be assessed by any such Justice, and to issue his Warrant for levying such Penalty and Costs, and also the reasonable Costs and Charges attending the Distress, on the Goods of such Offender, and to cause Sale to be made thereof in case the same shall not be redeemed within Five Days, rendering to the Party the Overplus, if any; and where Goods sufficient cannot be found to answer such Penalty and Costs, such Justice, or any other Justice of the District or Place in which such Conviction shall take place, shall commit such Offender to the Common Gaol or House of Correction, there to remain for any Time not exceeding Three Calendar Months nor less than One Calendar Month, unless such Penalty, Costs, and Charges shall be sooner paid and satisfied; and if any Person shall find himself aggrieved by the Judgment of any such Justice, it shall be lawful for such Person to appeal against the same to the Justices at the next General or Quarter Sessions of the Peace for the District or Place where the Offence shall have been committed, which shall be held next after the Expiration of Ten Days from the Day on which such Conviction shall have been made, of which Appeal Notice in Writing shall be given to the Prosecutor or Informer Seven clear Days previous to the first Day of such Sessions; and it shall be lawful for such Justices at such Sessions to examine Witnesses on Oath, and finally to hear and determine such Appeal; and in case any Conviction of such Justice shall be affirmed, it shall be lawful for the Justices at such Sessions to award and order the Person convicted to pay such Costs occasioned by such Appeal as to them shall seem meet: Provided always, that no Person convicted before any such Justice shall be entitled or permitted to appeal against such Conviction in manner aforesaid unless within Three Days after such Conviction made he shall enter into a Recognizance, with Two sufficient Sureties, before such Justice, to enter and prosecute such Appeal, and to pay the Amount of the Penalty and Costs in which he shall have been convicted, and also such further Costs as shall be awarded in case such Conviction shall be affirmed on such Appeal; provided also, that no such Proceedings so to be taken as aforesaid shall be quashed or vacated for Want of Form, or shall be removed by Certiorari, Suspension, Advocation, or Reduction, or by any other Writ or Process whatsoever into any Superior or other Court or Jurisdiction in any Part of the United Kingdom, any Law, Statute, or Usage to the contrary notwithstanding; and provided also, that it shall be lawful for any Justice of the Peace before whom any Person shall be convicted of any Offence against this Act to mitigate as he shall see fit any pecuniary Penalty by this Act imposed in Cases where such Justice shall see cause so to do; provided that all reasonable Costs and Charges incurred as well in discovering as in prosecuting for such Offence shall be always allowed, over and above the Sum to which such Penalty shall be mitigated, and provided that such Mitigation do not reduce the Penalty to less than One Fourth of the Penalty incurred, exclusive of such Costs and Charges, any thing herein contained to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 29. “And be it enacted, That the Justice before whom any Person shall be convicted of any Offence under this Act shall cause the Conviction to be made out in the Manner and Form following, or in any other Form of Words to the like Effect, _mutatis mutandis_; (that is to say,)

‘County of ______ to wit.

‘Be it remembered, that on the ______ Day of ______ in the Year of our Lord ______ at ______ _A. B._ of ______ was duly convicted before me, _C. D._ Esquire, one of His Majesty’s Justices of the Peace for the County of ______ in pursuance of an Act passed in the Seventh Year of the Reign of King _William_ the Fourth, intituled [_Title of this Act_], for that the said _A. B._ [here state the Offence], contrary to the Form of the Statute in that Case made and provided, for which Offence I do adjudge that the said _A. B._ hath forfeited the Sum of ______ and [_if the Justice mitigate the Penalty_] which Sum of ______ I do hereby mitigate to the Sum of ______ over and above the Sum of ______ which I do allow to _E. F._ for his reasonable Costs and Expences in prosecuting this Conviction. Given under my Hand and Seal this ______ Day of ______.’

s. 30. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for any Justice of the Peace to summon any Person to appear before such Justice or before any other Justice of the Peace to give Evidence touching any Offence against the Provisions of this Act; and if any Person who shall be so summoned shall neglect or refuse to appear, according to the Exigency of such Summons, at the Time and Place therein for that Purpose named, without reasonable Matter of Excuse to be stated upon Oath and proved to the Satisfaction of such Justice before whom any Information or Complaint shall be depending or shall have been made touching any such Offence as aforesaid, or if such Person having appeared shall refuse to give Evidence respecting any such Offence or other Matter as aforesaid, then every Person so offending shall forfeit Ten Pounds.

s. 31. “And be it enacted, That in any Proceeding either in any Court, or before any Justice of the Peace, or otherwise, under this Act, or for summoning any Party, Witness, or other Person in or for the Purpose of any such Proceeding, it shall not be necessary that the original or any other Process or Summons, or any Notice, Demand, or Order whatsoever, should be personally served on the Defendant or Person to be summoned, but it shall be sufficient that such Process, Summons, Notice, Demand, or Order, or a Copy thereof respectively, be left at the last known Place of Abode of such Defendant or Person to be summoned.

s. 32. “And be it enacted, That the several Acts and Parts of Acts herein-after mentioned, or so much and such Part and Parts thereof as are now in force, and the Stamp Duties thereby granted, or such of them as are now payable upon or in respect of Newspapers, shall respectively remain and continue in force and be payable until and upon the Fourteenth Day of _September_ One thousand eight hundred and thirty-six, and shall from thenceforth cease, determine, and be repealed, (that is to say,) the several Acts and Parts of Acts passed in the Parliaments of _Great Britain_ herein-after specified; namely,

“So much of an Act of the Tenth Year of the Reign of Queen _Anne_, [c. 19.] passed for the Purpose (amongst other Things) of laying Duties upon several Kinds of stamped Vellum, Parchment, and Paper, and upon certain printed Papers, Pamphlets, and Advertisements, as relates in any Manner to the Stamp Duties on Newspapers or the Duties on Advertisements, or as imposes any Penalty with relation to the said Duties or either of them:

“And so much of an Act of the Eleventh Year of the Reign of King _George_ the First, [c. 8.] passed for the Purpose (amongst other Things) of explaining the said last-mentioned Act in relation to the Stamp Duties on Newspapers, as in any Manner relates to the Stamp Duties on Newspapers:

“And so much of an Act of the Sixteenth Year of the Reign of King _George_ the Second, [c. 26.] passed for the Purpose (amongst other Things) of punishing the Vendors of unstamped Newspapers, as in any Manner relates to such Purpose:

“And so much of an Act passed in the Fifth Year of the Reign of King _George_ the Third, [c. 46.] intituled _An Act for altering the Stamp Duties upon Admissions into Corporations or Companies, and for further securing and improving the Stamp Duties in_ Great Britain, as requires Security to be given to His Majesty for Payment of the Duties on Advertisements:

“And the whole of an Act passed in the Thirteenth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 65.] intituled _An Act for explaining Two Acts made in the Eleventh Fear of the Reign of King George the First and the Thirtieth Year of the Reign of His late Majesty in relation to the Stamp Duties upon Newspapers_:

“And so much of an Act of the Sixteenth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 34.] passed for the Purpose (amongst other Things) of granting several Rates and Duties upon Indentures, Leases, Bonds, and other Deeds, and upon Cards, Dice, and Newspapers, as in any Manner relates to Newspapers or to the Stamp Duties thereon:

“And so much of an Act of the Twentieth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 28.] passed for the Purpose (amongst other Things) of granting additional Duties on Advertisements, as relates to such Duties:

“And so much of an Act passed in the Twenty-ninth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 50.] for granting additional Stamp Duties on Newspapers, Advertisements, Cards, and Dice, as in any Manner relates to Newspapers or Advertisements, or to the Duties thereon respectively:

“And the whole of an Act passed in the Thirty-fourth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 72.] intituled _An Act to enable the Commissioners of His Majesty’s Stamp Duties to stamp the Paper used for printing Newspapers thereon in Sheets of Single Demy Paper instead of Sheets of Double Demy Paper_:

“And so much of an Act of the Thirty-seventh Year of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 90.] passed for the Purpose (amongst other Things) of granting certain Stamp Duties on the several Matters therein mentioned, as in any Manner relates to Newspapers or to the Duties thereon, or to any Discount or Allowance in respect of the said Duties:

“And the whole of an Act passed in the Thirty-eighth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 78.] intituled _An Act for preventing the Mischiefs arising from the printing and publishing Newspapers and Papers of a like Nature by Persons not known, and for regulating the Printing and Publication of such Papers in other respects_:

And the whole of Two several Acts passed in the Parliaments of _Ireland_ herein-after specified; (that is to say,)

“An Act passed in the Twenty-third and Twenty-fourth Years of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 28.] intituled _An Act to secure the Liberty of the Press by preventing the Abuses arising from the Publication of traitorous, seditious, false, and slanderous Libels by Persons unknown_:

“And an Act passed in the Thirty-eighth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 7.] for amending the said last-mentioned Act:

And the several Acts and Parts of Acts passed in the Parliaments of the United Kingdom of _Great Britain_ and _Ireland_ herein-after specified; (that is to say,)

“So much of an Act passed in the Fortieth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, intituled _An Act to revive, amend, continue, or make perpetual certain temporary Statutes_, as makes perpetual or otherwise relates to the said Act passed in the Parliament of _Ireland_ in the Thirty-eighth Year of the Reign of the said King:

“And so much of an Act passed in the Forty-first Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 10.] for granting certain additional Stamp Duties, as in any Manner relates to the Stamp Duties on Newspapers, or to any Discount or Allowance in respect of the said last-mentioned Stamp Duties:

“And so much of an Act passed in the Forty-fourth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 98.] intituled _An Act to repeal the several Duties under the Commissioners for managing the Duties upon stamped Vellum, Parchment, and Paper in_ Great Britain, _and to grant new and additional Duties in lieu thereof_, as in any Manner relates to Newspapers or to the Duties thereon, or to any Discount or Allowance in respect of the said Duties:

“And the whole of an Act passed in the Forty-ninth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 50.] intituled _An Act to amend so much of an Act made in the Thirty-seventh year of His present Majesty, for granting to His Majesty certain Stamp Duties, as relates to the Limitation according to which the Discount on Newspapers is regulated_:

“And the whole of an Act passed in the Fifty-fifth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 80.] intituled _An Act to provide for the Collection and Management of Stamp Duties on Pamphlets, Almanacks, and Newspapers in_ Ireland:

“And so much of another Act passed in the said Fifty-fifth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 185.] intituled _An Act for repealing the Stamp Office Duties on Advertisements, Almanacks, Newspapers, Gold and Silver Plate, Stage Coaches and Licences for keeping Stage Coaches, now payable in_ Great Britain, _and for granting new Duties in lieu thereof_, as in any Manner relates to Newspapers or the Duties thereon, or to any Discount or Allowance in respect of the said Duties:

“And so much of an Act passed in the Fifty-sixth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 56.] intituled _An Act to repeal the several Stamp Duties in Ireland, and also several Acts for the Collection and Management of the said Duties, and to grant new Stamp Duties in lieu thereof, and to make more effectual Regulations for collecting and managing the said Duties_, as in any Manner relates to Newspapers or to the Duties thereon, or to any Discount or Allowance in respect of the said Duties:

“And so much of an Act passed in the Sixtieth Year of the Reign of the said King _George_ the Third, [c. 9.] intituled _An Act to subject certain Publications to the Duties of Stamps upon Newspapers, and to make other Regulations for restraining the Abuses arising from the Publication of blasphemous and seditious Libels_, as subjects any Newspaper or other Paper or Pamphlet to any Stamp Duty:

“And the whole of an Act passed in the Sixth Year of the Reign of His late Majesty King _George_ the Fourth, [c. 119.] intituled _An Act to allow Newspapers to be printed upon Paper of a larger Size than is now allowed, and to reduce the Stamp Duties now payable upon Supplements to Newspapers and other Papers in_ Great Britain:

“And so much of an Act passed in the Third and Fourth Years of the Reign of His present Majesty, [c. 23.] intituled _An Act to reduce the Stamp Duties on Advertisements and on certain Sea Insurances, to repeal the Stamp Duties on Pamphlets and on Receipts for Sums under Five Pounds, and to exempt Insurances on Farming Stock from Stamp Duties_, as provides the Mode of collecting the Duty on Advertisements contained in or published with any Pamphlet, periodical Paper, or literary Work:

“And the whole of an Act passed in the Fifth Year of the Reign of His present Majesty, [c. 2.] intituled _An Act to amend an Act of the Thirty-eighth Year of King_ George _the Third, for preventing the Mischiefs arising from the printing and publishing Newspapers and Papers of a like Nature by Persons not known, and for regulating the Printing and Publication of such Papers in other respects, and to discontinue certain Actions commenced under the Provisions of the said Act_:

And the said several Acts and Parts of Acts herein-before specified shall be and the same are hereby repealed accordingly, save and except only so far as is herein in that Behalf provided.

s. 33. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be construed to extend to repeal any of the herein-before mentioned Acts or Parts of Acts with respect to any Duty or Arrears of any Duty whatsoever which before or upon the said Fourteenth Day of _September_ One thousand eight hundred and thirty-six shall have accrued and been incurred under or by virtue of the said Acts or Parts of Acts, or any of them respectively, and which shall then or at any Time afterwards be or become due or payable and remain in arrear and unpaid, or with respect to any Fine, Penalty, or Forfeiture or Punishment incurred and not recovered or suffered for or in respect of any Offence or Crime committed or to be committed against the said several Acts or Parts of Acts respectively, or any of them, upon or before the said Fourteenth Day of _September_ One thousand eight hundred and thirty-six, or with respect to any Proceedings, Civil or Criminal, commenced or to be commenced against any Person for the Recovery of any such Arrears of Duty, or of any such Fine, Penalty, or Forfeiture, or for the Infliction of any such Punishment as aforesaid, but that all such Arrears of Duty, Fines, Penalties, Forfeitures, and Punishments shall and may respectively be sued or prosecuted for, recovered, obtained, and inflicted, by the same Ways and Means and in such and the same Manner as if this Act had not been passed: And provided also, that nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be construed to extend to repeal any of the said herein-before mentioned Acts or Parts of Acts so far as the same or any of them repeal the Whole or any Part of any other Act or Acts; and that no Matter or Thing whatever in this Act contained shall revive or be construed to revive, for any Period or Purpose whatsoever, any Act or Acts, or any Part of any Act or Acts, which before the passing of this Act shall have expired, or which by any Act or Acts passed before the passing of this Act shall have been repealed, and that the Repeal of any Act or Acts herein-before mentioned, or any other Matter or Thing in this Act contained, shall not extend or be construed to extend to repeal or annul or in any way to affect any Indemnity granted under or by virtue of any Act or Acts so repealed.

s. 34. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for any Person having in his Possession any Paper stamped with any of the Duties hereby repealed, and not made use of, or who may at any Time hereafter have in his Possession any Paper stamped for denoting the Duties by this Act granted, and which may be rendered useless by reason of any Change of Dies or by the Operation of any of the Provisions of this Act, to bring the same to the Head Office for Stamps in _London_, _Edinburgh_, or _Dublin_ respectively at any Time within Six Calendar Months next after the said Fifteenth Day of _September_ One thousand eight hundred and thirty-six, or within Six Calendar Months next after the same shall be so rendered useless, in order that the Stamps thereon may be cancelled and allowed; and it shall be lawful for the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes or their proper Officers to cancel and allow such Stamps accordingly, and to stamp such Paper or any Portion thereof, and any other Paper which shall be brought for that Purpose, with Stamps denoting the Duty by this Act granted to the Amount or Value of the Stamps so to be cancelled and allowed as aforesaid, after deducting the Amount of any Discount allowed thereon.

s. 35. “And in order to avoid the frequent Use of divers Terms and Expressions in this Act, and to prevent any Misconstruction of the Terms and Expressions used therein, be it enacted, That wherever in this Act, with reference to any Person, Matter, or Thing, any Word or Words is or are used importing the singular Number or the Masculine Gender only, yet such Word or Words shall be understood and construed to include several Persons as well as one Person, Females as well as Males, Bodies Politic or Corporate as well as Individuals, and several Matters or Things as well as one Matter or Thing, unless it be otherwise specially provided, or there be something in the Subject or Context repugnant to such Construction.

s. 36. “And be it enacted, That this Act may be amended, altered, or repealed by any Act or Acts to be passed in this present Session of Parliament.”

“SCHEDULE referred to in this Act.

“SCHEDULE (A.)

“Containing the Duties imposed by this Act on Newspapers; (that is to say,)

“For every Sheet or other Piece of Paper whereon any Newspaper shall be printed 0 0 1

“And where such Sheet or Piece of Paper shall contain on One Side thereof a Superficies, exclusive of the Margin of the Letter-press, exceeding One thousand five hundred and thirty Inches, and not exceeding Two thousand two hundred and ninety-five Inches, the additional Duty of 0 0 0½

“And where the same shall contain on One Side thereof a Superficies, exclusive of the Margin of the Letter-press, exceeding Two thousand two hundred and ninety-five Inches, the additional Duty of 0 0 1

“Provided always, that any Sheet or Piece of Paper containing on One Side thereof a Superficies, exclusive of the Margin of the Letter-press, not exceeding Seven hundred and sixty-five Inches, which shall be published with and as a Supplement to any Newspaper chargeable with any of the Duties aforesaid, shall be chargeable only with the Duty of 0 0 0½

“And the following shall be deemed and taken to be Newspapers chargeable with the said Duties; viz.

“Any Paper containing public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences printed in any Part of the United Kingdom to be dispersed and made public:

“Also any Paper printed in any Part of the United Kingdom, weekly or oftener, or at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days, containing only or principally Advertisements:

“And also any Paper containing any public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, printed in any Part of the United Kingdom for Sale, and published periodically or in Parts or Numbers at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days between the Publication of any Two such Papers, Parts, or Numbers, where any of the said Papers, Parts, or Numbers respectively shall not exceed Two Sheets of the Dimensions herein-after specified, (exclusive of any Cover or Blank Leaf, or any other Leaf upon which any Advertisement or other Notice shall be printed,) or shall be published for Sale for a less Sum than Sixpence, exclusive of the Duty by this Act imposed thereon: Provided always, that no Quantity of Paper less than a Quantity equal to Twenty-one Inches in Length and Seventeen Inches in Breadth, in whatever Way or Form the same may be made or may be divided into Leaves, or in whatever Way the same may be printed, shall, with reference to any such Paper, Part, or Number as aforesaid, be deemed or taken to be a Sheet of Paper:

“And provided also, that any of the several Papers herein-before described shall be liable to the Duties by this Act imposed thereon, in whatever Way or Form the same may be printed or folded, or divided into Leaves or stitched, and whether the same shall be folded, divided, or stitched, or not.

“EXEMPTIONS.

“Any Paper called ‘Police Gazette, or Hue and Cry,’ published in Great Britain by Authority of the Secretary of State, or in Ireland by the Authority of the Lord Lieutenant.

“Daily Accounts or Bills of Goods imported and exported, or Warrants or Certificates for the Delivery of Goods, and the Weekly Bills of Mortality, and also Papers containing any Lists of Prices Current, or of the State of the Markets, or any Account of the Arrival, Sailing, or other Circumstances relating to Merchant Ships or Vessels, or any other Matter wholly of a Commercial Nature; provided such Bills, Lists, or Accounts do not contain any other Matter than what hath been usually comprised therein.”

The printing of daily newspapers in the metropolis is a distinct branch from that of printing books and jobs, and is governed by different rules and regulations, so as to require a separate account of the process. The routine of business is uniform and regular, without that variety which occurs in a book house: the qualifications requisite for a compositor on a newspaper are, punctuality, quickness in composing, and clean proofs, so that no delay may take place from the deficiency of any one individual.

As the Times newspaper is one of the largest daily papers in Europe, and as it is printed in a smaller type, and contains more matter than any other, it consequently requires and employs more people to prepare it for publication; and as it is generally acknowledged to be one of the best conducted papers for the arrangement of its matter, and the punctuality of its publication, I have selected it to give as a specimen of the manner of printing a daily morning newspaper in London.

The compositors employed to compose this great mass of intelligence day by day, and every day throughout the year, Saturday excepted, there being no publication on Sundays, are seventy-five, who are divided into two classes; viz., the night or news hands, and the advertisement hands. The first class consists of 39, who are divided into full hands, 14; supernumeraries, 10; assistants, 15; to these may be added 10 “outsiders,” who fill the frames of absentees in cases of sickness, or from other causes: they are not considered as belonging to the establishment, inasmuch as they hold no situation, and are consequently dependent upon the workmen. The advertisement department consists of 36 hands.

As it is desirable not to have to distribute letter after copy is taken, the compositors usually put their letter in after all the composing is completed, or take the opportunity when waiting for copy, to be ready for the evening, or else they attend sooner in the afternoon than the usual hour, for that purpose.

The full hands take copy at six o’clock in the evening, precisely, and go on without regard to the old rule of first work and finish, and the day’s work is considered to be completed at the expiration of eleven hours, five o’clock in the morning; if engaged after that time all hands are paid by the hour, the printer never availing himself of the choice of beginning an hour later on account of the lateness of the preceding morning. The full hands are expected to compose two galleys each per night, and all over lines are paid for extra, even though they are composed within the time prescribed by the rules laid down for the guidance of compositors.

The supernumeraries are expected to compose one galley each per night, and all over lines are paid for extra, the same as with the full hands.

The full hands have each three pairs of cases--Nonpareil, Minion, and Bourgeois; and as the most advantageous matter is generally set up in the smaller type, they claim the benefit of it as an equivalent for the labour of putting the forms to the machine.

The supernumeraries and assistants take copy at seven o’clock in the evening, and continue to work till all is composed, and should there be any standing still for want of copy, they are allowed at the rate of a quarter of a galley per hour for all the time they may have lost during the night. The assistants have no stated salary, but are paid by the galley, and share the same advantages as the supernumeraries, no distinction being made in the giving out of the copy.

The compositors in the news department have the privilege of composing a considerable quantity of extra or “back” matter to enable the printer to have at all times a resource in case of accident. This extra copy is given out and divided into half galley shares, and taken in rotation, thus preventing monopoly or favouritism.

As there is an immense quantity of letter in use, the division of which for distribution would occasion loss of time, and frequent disputes, the companionship pay a man to lay up the forms, mark the letter off for each individual, and distribute the useless heads. He is also answerable for the clearance of the boards.

Each compositor has a number attached to his frame, and when he takes copy, his number is placed on the back of the copy, so that each man’s matter is immediately identified, and in case of a foul proof, or an out that will occasion much trouble, it is immediately handed to him who composed it without further inquiry, which prevents exposure and annoyance to the individual. The copy is also marked with progressive numbers, which prevents confusion by enabling the compositor to know with certainty, whom he follows in his composing, and to empty his stick in the proper galley so as to join the preceding matter.

As the matter is composed it is taken, a galley at a time, by the printer, and made up into columns; a proof of the column is then pulled upon the galley by one of the compositors, who all take it in turn; it is then given to the reader; after being attentively read and corrected, it is returned to the compositors to make the corrections, who take it in turn, two and two; the column is divided into four, the first compositor takes the first and third parts, and the second takes the second and fourth parts, and he who is the last in making his corrections, pulls a second proof, which is carefully revised, and when the revise is corrected the matter is ready for the paper. It thus goes on column after column, till the whole paper is composed, when it often occurs that the arrival of foreign intelligence increases the quantity considerably; matter of less immediate interest is, in this instance, taken away, and kept as back matter for a future day, to make room for the latest intelligence.

If the first compositor has six or more lines to compose of copy that he has in hand, he must give it up, and begin to correct immediately; but if he has less than six lines of copy in hand, he finishes it before he commences correcting: this regulation is adopted to prevent any interruption or delay in the progress of getting the paper out.

The full hands take it in turn to correct the revises, lock up the forms, and take them to the machines to be worked off.

The advertisement department is not regulated after the same manner as the news department, there being no distinction of grades, nor any fixed salaries, nor is there any precise time of commencing work, the uncertainty as to the time of advertisements being received at the office rendering it an impossibility to appoint any regular hour for beginning. The compositors are paid by the galley, not according to the scale of prices fixed for morning papers, but more after the scale of evening papers. The method adopted in this part of the establishment in taking copy is the same as in other offices, the first out of copy taking first, and so on, and as the compositors come out of copy their numbers are placed on a slate, which prevents disputes or confusion. The compositor marks his copy by putting his initials at the back of it; so that if any gross error be committed, and remain uncorrected, a wrong number in a reference, for instance, it can immediately be ascertained who composed it, and either the reader or the compositor is held responsible for the advertisement duty, the proof deciding which is to pay the fine for negligence.

The salary of a full hand is 2_l._ 8_s._ per week, but the average earnings are 3_l._ 12_s._ 6_d._; the salary of a supernumerary is 1_l._ 3_s._ per week, and the average earnings are 3_l._; it often happens that much higher bills are written, but the above may be taken as a fair average.

The whole establishment of the Times newspaper, including editors, reporters, compositors, readers, engineer, overseers of the machines, persons to lay on, and to take off, clerks, &c. consists of one hundred and thirty-seven persons.

The following is the number of Stamps issued to four of the principal London morning newspapers in 1838 and 1839, and also the amount of advertisement duty paid by the said papers in each of the years 1837, 1838, and 1839, from official returns.

_Number of Stamps issued._

+------------------------+-----------+-----------+ | | 1838. | 1839. | +------------------------+-----------+-----------+ | The Times | 3,355,000 | 3,650,000 | | Morning Herald | 2,078,000 | 1,925,000 | | Morning Chronicle | 2,200,000 | 2,075,000 | | Morning Post | 797,000 | 875,500 | +------------------------+-----------+-----------+

_Amount of Money paid by each Newspaper for Advertisement Duty._

+------------------------+-------------+-------------+--------------+ | | 1837. | 1838. | 1839. | +------------------------+-------------+-------------+--------------+ | | _£ s. d._| _£ s. d._| _£ s. d._| | The Times | 8,817 16 6 | 9,600 12 0 | 11,238 3 0 | | Morning Herald | 5,217 12 0 | 4,263 0 0 | 4,796 9 6 | | Morning Chronicle | 4,047 3 0 | 4,079 11 0 | 4,619 0 6 | | Morning Post | 2,980 19 0 | 2,713 11 6 | 3,191 9 6 | +------------------------+-------------+-------------+--------------+

_Number of Newspapers published in the United Kingdom. November, 1840._

ENGLAND.

_London._--Daily, 6 morning, 5 evening; twice a week, 3, including London Gazette; three times a week, 4; weekly, Monday, 2; Tuesday, 3; Wednesday, 4; Thursday, 2; Friday, 1; Saturday, 8; Sunday, 27; tenth of every month, 1; first and fifteenth of every month, 1. Total, 67.

_Country._--Bedfordshire, 1; Berkshire, 4; Buckinghamshire, 3; Cambridgeshire, 3; Cheshire, 6; Cornwall, 5; Cumberland, 4; Derbyshire, 4; Devonshire, 12; Dorsetshire, 3; Durham, 5; Essex, 5; Gloucestershire, 8; Hampshire, 4; Herefordshire, 2; Hertfordshire, 2; Kent, 13; Lancashire, 26; Leicestershire, 4; Lincolnshire, 5; Monmouthshire, 2; Norfolk, 2; Northamptonshire, 2; Northumberland, 6; Nottinghamshire, 3; Oxfordshire, 4; Shropshire, 6; Somersetshire, 14; Staffordshire, 5; Suffolk, 5; Surrey, there are no papers printed in this county, but there are 3 circulated by agents; Sussex, 6; Warwickshire, 9; Westmoreland, 2; Wiltshire, 5; Worcestershire, 5; Yorkshire, 28; Berwick-on-Tweed, 2. Total, 228.

_Wales._--9.

SCOTLAND.

_Edinburgh._--Twice a week, 6; three times a week, 2; weekly, 6. Total, 14.

Aberdeen, 4; Ayr, 3; Dumfries, 3; Dundee, 3; Elgin, 1; Fife, 2; Glasgow, 11; Greenock, 2; Inverness, 3; John O’Groat’s Journal, 1; Kelso, 2; Kilmarnock, 1; Montrose, 1; Paisley, 1; Perth, 4; Stirling, 2. Total, 44.

IRELAND.

_Dublin._--Daily, 3; twice a week, 2; three times a week, 6; weekly, 8. Total, 19.

Athlone, 1; Ballyshannon, 1; Belfast, 6; Carlow, 1; Clare, 1; Clonmel, 1; Connaught, 1; Cork, 3; Downpatrick, 1; Drogheda, 2; Enniskillen, 2; Fermanagh, 1; Galway, 1; Kerry, 2; Kilkenny, 2; Leinster, 2; Limerick, 3; Londonderry, 3; Mayo, 2; Munster, 1; Nenagh, 1; Newry, 2; Roscommon, 2; Sligo, 2; Tipperary, 2; Tuam, 1; Ulster, 1; Waterford, 4; Westmeath, 1; Wexford, 2. Total, 55.

BRITISH ISLANDS.

Guernsey, 3; Jersey, 7; Isle of Man, 4. Total, 14.

ABSTRACT.

ENGLAND:-- London 67 Country 228 Wales 9 --- 304

SCOTLAND:-- Edinburgh 14 Other parts of Scotland 44 --- 58

IRELAND:-- Dublin 19 Other parts of Ireland 55 --- 74

BRITISH ISLANDS 14 ---- Total 450

_Newspaper Postage._--3 & 4 Vict. c. 96. “An Act for the Regulation of the Duties of Postage.”

s. 1. “Be it therefore enacted by the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons, in this present Parliament assembled, and by the Authority of the same, That all Letters and Newspapers and other printed Papers, which shall be posted in any Town or Place within the United Kingdom, or shall be brought from Parts beyond the Seas to any Port or Place within the United Kingdom, or shall be sent by the Post between the United Kingdom and Places beyond the Seas, or between any of the other Places herein-after mentioned, or shall pass through the United Kingdom, shall be subject to the several Regulations and Rates herein-after contained.”

s. 12. “And be it enacted, That all Letters posted in any Town or Place within the United Kingdom shall, if written on stamped Paper or enclosed in stamped Covers, or having a Stamp or Stamps affixed thereto, and all printed Votes and Proceedings of the Imperial Parliament, and all Newspapers which shall be liable to Postage under this Act, shall, if posted in any Town or Place within the United Kingdom and enclosed in stamped Covers, or having a Stamp or Stamps affixed thereto, (the Stamp or Stamps in every such Case being affixed or appearing on the Outside, and of the Value or Amount herein-after expressed and specially provided under the Authority of this Act or of the said recited Act, [2 & 3 Vict. c. 52.] and if the Stamp shall not have been used before,) pass by the Post free of Postage, as herein-after mentioned.”

“And on all such printed Votes and Proceedings of Parliament and Newspapers the Stamp or Stamps shall be equal in Value or Amount to the Rates of Postage to which such Votes or Proceedings or Newspapers would have been liable under this Act:

“And that in all Cases in which the same shall be necessary, in order to place on any such Letters, printed Votes or Proceedings of Parliament, and Newspapers, the full Amount of Stamps hereby required as aforesaid, there shall be affixed thereto such a Number of Adhesive Stamps as alone or in Combination with the Stamp on such Letters or Packets, or on the Envelope or Cover thereof, will be equal in Amount to the Rate of Postage to which such Letters, printed Votes or Proceedings of Parliament, and Newspapers would be liable under this Act.

s. 13. “And be it enacted, That in all Cases in which Letters posted in and addressed to Places within the United Kingdom shall be posted without any Stamp thereon, and without the Postage being pre-paid, there shall be charged on such Letters a Postage of Double the Amount to which such Letters would otherwise be liable under this Act; and in all Cases in which printed Votes or Proceedings of Parliament, or Newspapers liable to Postage under this Act, shall be posted without any Stamp thereon, there shall be charged on such Votes and Proceedings or Newspapers the Postage to which the same would be liable under this Act.”

s. 16. “And be it enacted, That in all Cases in which any Votes or Proceedings of Parliament, Newspapers, addressed to Places within the United Kingdom, shall be posted, having thereon or affixed thereto any Stamp or Stamps the Value or Amount of which shall be less than the Rate of Postage to which such Votes or Proceedings or Newspapers would be liable under this Act, there shall be charged on such Votes or Proceedings or Newspapers a Postage equal to the Amount of the Difference between the Value of such Stamp or Stamps and the Postage to which such Votes or Proceedings or Newspapers would be liable as aforesaid.

s. 17. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That it shall in all Cases be optional with the Parties sending any Letters, printed Votes or Proceedings of Parliament, or Newspapers, by the Post, to forward the same free of Postage by means of a proper Stamp or Stamps thereon or affixed thereto in manner herein-before provided, or to forward the same in like Manner as the same might otherwise have been forwarded under this Act; but nevertheless, in case any Letters, printed Votes or Proceedings of Parliament, or Newspapers, addressed to Places out of the United Kingdom, shall have thereon or affixed thereto any Stamp or Stamps being less in Amount or Value than the Rates of Postage to which such Letters, or such Votes or Proceedings, or Newspapers, would be liable under this Act, such Letters, printed Votes or Proceedings of Parliament, or Newspapers, if the Postage thereon be required by the Postmaster General under the Provisions of this Act to be paid when posted, shall not in any Case be forwarded by the Post, but shall, so far as may be practicable, be returned to the Senders thereof through the Dead Letter Office; and if the Postage on such Letters, printed Votes or Proceedings, or Newspapers, be not so required to be paid when posted, the same may be forwarded charged with such Postage as if no Stamp had been thereon or affixed thereto.”

s. 32. “And be it enacted, That the Foreign Postage marked on any Letter or Newspaper, or other printed Paper brought into the United Kingdom, shall in all Courts of Justice and other Places be received as conclusive Evidence of the Amount of Foreign Postage payable in respect of such Letter, Newspaper, or other printed Paper, in addition to the _British_ Postage; and such Foreign Postage shall be recoverable within the United Kingdom and other Her Majesty’s Dominions as Postage due to Her Majesty.”

s. 36. “And for encouraging Masters of Vessels, not being Post Office Packets, to undertake the Conveyance of Letters; be it enacted, That the Postmaster General may allow to Masters of Vessels, on Letters and Newspapers conveyed by them for or on behalf of the Post Office between Places within the United Kingdom, a Sum not exceeding Two Shillings and Sixpence for each and every Number of One hundred of such Letters and Newspapers, and for any less Number in the like Proportion, and may allow to the Masters of Vessels bound from the United Kingdom to the _East Indies_ a Sum not exceeding One Penny for each Letter and One Halfpenny for each Newspaper conveyed by them for or on behalf of the Post Office, and may allow to the Masters of all other Vessels a Sum not exceeding Two-pence for each Letter conveyed by them for or on behalf of the Post Office from the United Kingdom to Places beyond Sea, and may allow to the Masters of all Vessels not exceeding Two-pence for each Letter brought into the United Kingdom, which they shall deliver at the Post Office at the first Port at which they touch or arrive, or with which they communicate, (all which Gratuities may be paid at such Times and Places, and under all such Regulations and Restrictions, as the Postmaster General shall in his Discretion think fit); and every Master of a Vessel outward-bound shall receive on board his Vessel every Post Letter Bag tendered to him for Conveyance, and having received the same shall deliver it, on his Arrival at the Port or Place of his Destination, without Delay; and every Master of a Vessel inward-bound shall cause all Letters on board his Vessel (except those belonging to the Owners of the Vessel, or of the Goods on board, which do not exceed the prescribed Weights,) to be collected and enclosed in some Bag or other Envelope, and to be sealed with his Seal, and to be addressed to any of Her Majesty’s Deputy Postmasters, that they may be in readiness to send on shore by his own Boat, or by the Pilot Boat, or by any other safe or convenient Means, in order that the same may be delivered at the first regular Post Office which can be communicated with, and at the regular Port or Place where the Vessel shall report, shall sign a Declaration in the Presence of the Person authorized by the Postmaster General at such Port or Place, who shall also sign the same.”

s. 42. “And be it enacted, That printed Newspapers may be sent free of Postage, or liable to Postage according to the Regulations and Rates herein-after set forth; (that is to say,)

PRINTED BRITISH NEWSPAPERS,

By the Post, from one Town or Place to another, within the United Kingdom (except by private Ships), free:

By the Post of a Post Town, within the United Kingdom, addressed to a Person within the Limits of that Place or its Suburbs, One Penny each:

Between Places within the United Kingdom by private Ships, One Penny each:

Between the United Kingdom and Her Majesty’s Colonies, as follows:

By Packet Boats to any of Her Majesty’s Colonies and Possessions beyond the Seas, (including the _East Indies_, by Packet Boats from the United Kingdom, _viâ_ _Syria_ or _Egypt_,) free:

By private Ships, One Penny each.

PRINTED COLONIAL NEWSPAPERS,

Brought from the Colonies to the United Kingdom by Packet Boats, (including Newspapers from the _East Indies_, by Her Majesty’s _Mediterranean_ Packet Boats,) whether directed to a Place within the United Kingdom or to any of Her Majesty’s Colonies beyond the Seas, to be forwarded from the United Kingdom by Packet Boats, free:

Brought from the Colonies to the United Kingdom by private Ships, addressed to Places within the United Kingdom, and delivered by the Master at the Post Office, One Penny each:

Sent by Packet Boat through the United Kingdom to a Foreign State, (subject to the Consent of the Lords of the Treasury,) free:

Newspapers between Foreign Countries and the United Kingdom, as follows:

PRINTED BRITISH NEWSPAPERS,

Sent from the United Kingdom to any Foreign Port, either by Packet Boats or private Ships, Two-pence each:

When _British_ Newspapers are allowed to pass by Post in a Foreign Country free, then _British_ Newspapers addressed to such Foreign Country may be transmitted to any Foreign Port by Packet Boats, free:

If transmitted by private Ships, One Penny each.

PRINTED FOREIGN NEWSPAPERS,

Brought into the United Kingdom by Packet Boats or Private Ships, Two-pence each:

If _British_ Newspapers are allowed to pass by Post free in a Foreign Country, Newspapers printed in that Country brought by Packet Boat to the United Kingdom, free:

If brought by private Vessels, One Penny each:

Foreign Newspapers sent by Packet Boat through the United Kingdom to the Colonies (subject to the Consent of the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury), free.

s. 43. “And be it enacted, That although Newspapers may be sent by the Post, and thereupon subject to the Rate of Postage set forth in the above Table, it shall not be compulsory to send them by Post.

s. 44. “And be it enacted, That no printed Paper, whether Newspaper or Votes and Proceedings in Parliament, or of the Colonial Legislature, shall be sent by the Post, either free or at the aforesaid Rates of Postage, unless the following Conditions shall be observed:

First, It shall be sent without a Cover, or in a Cover open at the Sides.

Second, There shall be no Word or Communication printed on the Paper after its Publication, or upon the Cover thereof, nor any Writing or Marks upon it or upon the Cover of it, except the Name and Address of the Person to whom sent.

Third, There shall be no Paper or Thing enclosed in or with any such Paper.

Fourth, The said printed Papers shall be put into the Post Office at such Hours in the Day, and under all such Regulations, as the Postmaster General may appoint, including therein the Payment of Postage on such as are going out of the United Kingdom when put into the Post Office, if the Postmaster General shall so require.

Fifth, All Foreign Newspapers brought into the United Kingdom under this Act are to be printed in the Language of the Country from which they shall have been forwarded, unless the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury shall in any Case direct that any Foreign Newspapers shall be exempted from the Restriction hereby imposed.

s. 45. “And be it enacted, That the Postmaster General may examine any printed Paper or any Packet which shall be sent by the Post, without a Cover or in a Cover open at the Sides, in order to discover whether it is contrary in any respect to the Conditions hereby required to be observed, or to any Regulations which the Postmaster General, with the Consent of the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, may from Time to Time make in respect of any Paper or Packet of such a Description, and also, in the Case of Newspapers, to ascertain in what Language the Newspapers brought into the United Kingdom from any Foreign Country shall be printed and published; and also in order to discover whether the Newspapers printed and published in the United Kingdom (excepting those printed in _Guernsey_, _Jersey_, _Alderney_, _Sark_, or _Man_, which, for the Purposes of this Act, are to be considered as Part of the United Kingdom) are duly stamped; and in case any one of the required Conditions has not been fulfilled, the whole of every such Paper or Packet shall be charged with Treble the Duty of Postage to which it would have been liable as a Letter, except as to Foreign Newspapers not printed in the Language of the Country from which they shall have been forwarded, which shall be charged with full Postage as Letters; and as to every such printed Paper going out of the United Kingdom, the Postmaster General may either detain the Paper or forward the same by the Post, charged with Treble the Duty of Postage to which it would have been liable as a Letter; and in case a Newspaper printed in the United Kingdom (except as aforesaid), and transmitted by the Post under this Act, shall appear not to have been duly stamped, the same shall be stopped and sent to the Commissioners of Stamps and Taxes.

s. 46. “And be it enacted, That in all Cases in which a Question shall arise whether a printed Paper is entitled to the Privilege of a Newspaper or other printed Paper hereby privileged, so far as respects the Transmission thereof by the Post under the Post Office Acts, the Question shall be referred to the Determination of the Postmaster General, whose Decision, with the Concurrence of the Lords of the Treasury, shall be final.

s. 47. “And for providing for the Transmission of Newspapers between the United Kingdom and Foreign Countries free of Postage, when satisfactory Proof shall be laid before the Postmaster General that _British_ Newspapers addressed either to a Person or to a Place within a Foreign Country, and also that Newspapers addressed to a Person or a Place in the United Kingdom from such Foreign Country, are respectively allowed to pass by the Post within that Country free of Postage; be it enacted, That the Postmaster General may, with the Consent of the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, transmit by the Post _British_ Newspapers addressed to a Person or to a Place in such Foreign Country from the United Kingdom, to any Port out of the United Kingdom, other than Her Majesty’s Colonies and Possessions, free from Postage; and he may, with the like Consent, receive from such Foreign Country Foreign Newspapers free from Postage, or he may, with the like Consent, charge for every Newspaper transmitted to or received from a Foreign Country a Rate of Postage which he may consider equivalent to the Rates of Postage payable in that Country on Newspapers either transmitted from or received in that Country, but in all Cases, whether the Newspaper be transmitted free or otherwise, subject to a Sea Postage of One Penny, payable on the Newspaper being put into the Post Office, for every Newspaper delivered at the Post Office to be conveyed by Vessels not being Post Office Packets, and also to a like Postage for every Newspaper received by Vessels not Post Office Packets addressed to a Person or to a Place within the United Kingdom.

s. 48. “And whereas by reason of the Postage which may be charged on Newspapers in Foreign Countries, or from other Circumstances, it may be expedient again to impose the Rates of Two-pence on Newspapers; be it enacted, That the Postmaster General, with the Consent of the Lords of the Treasury, may again charge and demand the said respective Rates of Two-pence on Newspapers received from and sent to any Foreign Country.

s. 49. “And be it enacted, That the Postmaster General, with the Consent of the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, may allow Colonial Newspapers to pass by the Post between Places within any of Her Majesty’s Colonies, or by Packet Boat or private Ship, from one Colony to another Colony, whether through the United Kingdom or not; and also allow Foreign Newspapers to pass through the United Kingdom either to Her Majesty’s Colonies or from one Foreign Country to another Foreign Country, by Packet Boat or private Ship; and also allow _British_ Newspapers to be sent to the Colonies through a Foreign Country, and Colonial Newspapers to be sent through a Foreign Country to the United Kingdom, or through the United Kingdom to a Foreign Country, free of Postage, or subject to such Rates of Postage and under all such Regulations and Restrictions as the Postmaster General, with such Consent as aforesaid, may think fit.

s. 50. “And be it enacted, That every _British_ Newspaper sent by the Post to Places out of the United Kingdom shall in all Cases be put into a Post Office or Receiving Office in the United Kingdom within Seven Days next after the Day on which the same shall be published, the Day of Publication to be ascertained by the Date of such Paper; and in case a Paper shall be put into a Post Office after the Expiration of such Seven Days, the Postmaster General may either detain the Paper, or forward it by Post charged with full Postage as a Letter.

s. 51. “And be it enacted, That in case any Person to whom a printed Newspaper brought into the United Kingdom shall be directed shall have removed from the Place to which it shall be directed, before the Delivery thereof at that Place, it may (provided it shall not have been opened) be re-directed and forwarded by Post to such Person at any other Place within the United Kingdom free of Charge for such extra Conveyance; but if the Newspaper shall have been opened, it shall be charged with the same Rate as if it were a Letter from the Place of Re-direction to the Place at which it shall be ultimately delivered.

s. 52. “And be it enacted, That the Postmaster General may allow the Masters of Vessels, other than Packet Boats, a Sum not exceeding One Penny on every printed Newspaper, Foreign or Colonial, brought into the United Kingdom from a Port or Place out of the United Kingdom, and delivered by them at the Post Office of the Post Town at which they shall touch or arrive, and a Sum not exceeding One Penny on every printed Newspaper conveyed by them for or on behalf of the Post Office from the United Kingdom to any Port or Place out of the same, in respect of which no Gratuity is herein-before authorized to be allowed.”

s. 57. “And be it enacted, That the Postmaster General may at any Time hereafter charge, for the Use of Her Majesty, on all Letters, Newspapers, and other printed Papers sent by the Post, on which the Postage shall not be pre-paid, and which shall not be duly and properly stamped, and also on all Letters sent by the Post without being duly and properly stamped, although the Postage thereon shall be wholly or in part pre-paid, such higher Rates of Postage than would otherwise by Law be payable on such Letters, Newspapers, or other printed Papers as the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury by Warrant under their Hands shall from Time to Time deem expedient, and may also remit any of the Rates of _British_ Postage or Inland Postage for the Time being payable by Law on the Transmission of Post Letters, Newspapers, or other printed Papers, to such Extent as the Lords of the Treasury shall from Time to Time direct.

s. 58. “And whereas Communications may from Time to Time be opened with Foreign Post Offices, which may render an Alteration in the Rates of Postage expedient; be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury from Time to Time, and at any Time after the passing of this Act, by Warrant under their Hands, to alter and fix any of the Rates of _British_ Postage or Inland Postage payable by Law on the Transmission by the Post of Foreign or Colonial Letters or Newspapers, or of any other printed Papers, and to subject the same to Rates of Postage according to the Weight thereof, and a Scale of Weight to be contained in such Warrant, and from Time to Time, by Warrant as aforesaid, to alter or repeal any such altered Rates, and make and establish any new or other Rates in lieu thereof, and from Time to Time, by Warrant as aforesaid, to appoint at what Time the Rates which may be payable are to be paid, and the Power hereby given to alter and fix Rates of Postage shall extend to any Increase or Reduction, or Remission of Postage.

s. 59. “And be it enacted, That the Rates of Postage from Time to Time to become payable under or by virtue of any Warrant of the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, under this Act, shall be charged by and be paid to Her Majesty’s Postmaster General, for the Use of Her Majesty, on all Post Letters, Newspapers, or other printed Papers to which such Warrant shall extend; and that in all Cases in which any Rates of Postage shall be made payable under any such Warrant, every such Warrant shall be published in the _London Gazette_, and shall, within Fourteen Days after making the same, be laid before both Houses of Parliament (if then sitting), or otherwise within Fourteen Days after Parliament shall re-assemble; provided that any Rates made payable by any such Warrant may be demanded and taken immediately after they shall have been so published in the _London Gazette_, although the same shall not then have been laid before Parliament.

s. 60. “And be it enacted, That in all Cases in which the Postage of any unstamped Letter shall not have been paid by the Sender, it shall be paid by the Person to whom the Letter is addressed on the Delivery thereof to him; but if the Letter be refused, or the Party to whom it is addressed shall be dead, or cannot be found, the Writer or Sender shall pay the Postage; and this Enactment shall apply to every Packet, Newspaper and Thing whatsoever chargeable with Postage which shall be transmitted by the Post.

s. 61. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury to make any Reduction or Increase or Alteration they may consider expedient in the Gratuities allowed by this Act to Masters of Vessels for Letters and Newspapers conveyed by them for or on behalf of the Post Office, or delivered by them to the Post Office, and to allow and authorize such Gratuities for the Conveyance of Letters and Newspapers to Masters of Vessels passing to or from or between any of Her Majesty’s Colonies or Possessions beyond the Seas, as they shall think fit, and also to allow and authorize any Gratuities to be paid to Pilots, Seamen, or others on the Letters and Newspapers they may bring to any Post Office from any Vessels.”

s. 71. “And be it enacted, That the following Terms and Expressions, whenever used in this or any other Post Office Act, shall have the several Interpretations herein-after respectively set forth, unless such Interpretations are repugnant to the Subject or inconsistent with the Context of the Provisions in which they may be found; (that is to say,) the Term “_British_ Newspapers” shall mean Newspapers printed and published in the United Kingdom liable to the Stamp Duties and duly stamped, and also Newspapers printed in the Islands of _Guernsey_, _Jersey_, _Alderney_, _Sark_, or _Man_, although not liable to Stamp Duties; and the Term “inward-bound” shall be held to include Vessels bound as well to any Port in the United Kingdom as to any Port in any of her Majesty’s Colonies; and the Term “outward-bound” shall be held to include Vessels bound as well from any Port in the United Kingdom as from any Port in Her Majesty’s Colonies; and that the Term “United Kingdom” shall mean the United Kingdom of _Great Britain_ and _Ireland_, and the Islands of _Man_, _Jersey_, _Guernsey_, _Sark_, and _Alderney_; and that the Term “Her Majesty’s Colonies” shall include every Port and Place within the Territorial Acquisitions now vested in the _East India Company_ in Trust for Her Majesty, the _Cape of Good Hope_, the Island of _Saint Helena_, the _Ionian Islands_, and _Honduras_, as well as Her Majesty’s other Colonies and Possessions beyond the Seas (the Islands of _Man_, _Guernsey_, _Jersey_, _Alderney_ and _Sark_ only excepted); and that the Term “by the Post” shall extend to and include the Transmission of Post Letters as well by any General or Twopenny or Penny or Convention Post as by Packet Boat; and the Term “Post Town” shall include every City, Town, and Place where a Post Office is or shall be established; and that the several other Terms and Expressions used in this Act shall be construed according to the respective Interpretations of the Terms and Expressions contained in the said Act passed in the First Year of the Reign of Her present Majesty, intituled _An Act for consolidating the Laws relative to Offences against the Post Office of the United Kingdom, and for regulating the Judicial Administration of the Post Office Laws_, and for explaining certain Terms and Expressions employed in those Laws, so far as those Interpretations are not repugnant to the Subject or inconsistent with the Context of such Terms and Expressions.”

_Newspapers, Ireland._--4 & 5 Will. 4. c. 71. “Whereas by an Act passed in the Parliament of _Ireland_ in the Thirty-eighth Year of the Reign of King _George_ the Third, intituled _An Act to amend an Act passed in the Twenty-third and Twenty-fourth Years of the Reign of His present Majesty, intituled ‘An Act to secure the Liberty of the Press by preventing the Abuses arising from the Publication of traitorous, seditious, false, and slanderous Libels by Persons unknown_,’ it is amongst other things enacted, that if any Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor, or Printers, Publishers, or Proprietors of any Newspaper, Intelligencer, or Occurrences, or any Paper serving the Purposes of a Newspaper, Intelligencer, or Occurrences, shall have become and be found a Lunatic or _non compos mentis_, or shall become and be found bankrupt, or shall be outlawed for any Crime, or shall be found guilty and receive Judgment for printing or publishing any traitorous, scandalous, false, or seditious Libel, or shall be charged by Indictment or Information with having published a traitorous, scandalous, false, or seditious Libel, and shall not within Six Days after a Copy of such Indictment or Information shall be served upon such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor, or at the House or Place of printing or publishing the Paper in which the Newspaper containing such Libel shall be printed, surrender himself, herself, or themselves to take his, her, or their Trial at the then next Commission of Oyer and Terminer, Quarter Sessions of the Peace, or Assizes for the City or County where he, she, or they shall be indicted as aforesaid, or where such Information as aforesaid is to be tried, every Printer and Publisher so neglecting, shall from thenceforth be disabled to be the Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any Newspaper, Intelligencer, or Occurrences, and the Commissioners of Stamp Duties are thereby required to refuse to deliver to such Person or Persons stamped Paper for the Purpose of printing a Newspaper; and by an Act passed in the Parliament of the United Kingdom of _Great Britain_ and _Ireland_ in the Fifty-fifth Year of the Reign of His said Majesty King _George_ the Third [55 Geo. 3. c. 80.], intituled _An Act to provide for the Collection and Management of Stamp Duties on Pamphlets, Almanacks, and Newspapers in Ireland_, it is also amongst other things enacted, that if any Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any Newspaper in _Ireland_, shall be by due Course of Law outlawed for any Criminal Offence, or receive Judgment for printing or publishing a traitorous or seditious Libel, the said Commissioners of Stamps in _Ireland_ and their Officers respectively are thereby prohibited to sell or deliver to or for the Use of any such Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor so outlawed, or who shall have so received Judgment for such Libel, any stamped Paper for printing any Newspaper; and it is also further enacted, that if any Printer, Publisher, or Proprietor of any Newspaper which shall be at any Time published in _Ireland_ shall have become a Bankrupt or _non compos mentis_, or shall be outlawed for any Crime, or shall receive Judgment for printing or publishing any traitorous or seditious Libel, then and in every such Case such Printer or Printers, Publisher or Publishers, Proprietor or Proprietors respectively, shall no longer be entitled to print or publish such Newspaper, but shall as to any such Right be considered from thenceforth as if he, she, or they never had made such Affidavit as in the said last-recited Act is mentioned: And whereas it is expedient to repeal the said recited Enactments; be it therefore enacted by the King’s most Excellent Majesty, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons, in this present Parliament assembled, and by the Authority of the same, That from and after the passing of this Act so much of the said respective Acts as is herein-before recited shall be and the same is hereby repealed.”

NICHOLS, JOHN. _See_ DONATIONS.

NICK.

A nick is a hollow cast crossways in the shanks of types, to make a distinction readily between different sorts and sizes; and to enable the compositor to perceive quickly the bottom of the letter as it lies in the case, when composing; as nicks are always cast on that side of the shank on which the bottom of the face of the letter is placed.

A great deal of inconvenience frequently arises, owing to the founders casting different founts of types with a similar nick in each. Although this may, at the first sight, appear of little moment, yet it is attended with much trouble: and works are frequently disfigured by it, notwithstanding all the care of the compositor and the reader, as will appear from the following statement.

A printer has cast a fount, we will suppose of Pica, in addition to another he had in the house, and this new Pica is of a different face from his old one; but not having given any particular directions, the founder casts it with a nick precisely the same as the other. The consequence is, when a compositor is distributing head lines, lines of italic, small capitals, or small jobs--in the hurry of business--through inadvertency--or carelessness--he frequently distributes them into the wrong cases, when it is almost impossible for another compositor who has occasion to use these cases next, to detect the error till he sees the proof; unless he is in the habit of reading his lines in the stick, which many are not. He has then a great deal of trouble to change the letters; and, with all the attention that the reader can bestow, a letter of the wrong fount will frequently escape his eye, and disfigure the page.

Even in founts that are next in size to each other; for instance,--Bourgeois and Long Primer, Long Primer and Small Pica, Small Pica and Pica, and Pica and English, head lines, &c., are not unfrequently distributed into wrong cases, where the nick is the same; and always occasion loss of time in correcting the mistakes, and sometimes pass undiscovered.

I would recommend, in furnishing a new office with types, that every fount, commencing with the smallest, should have a different nick from that of the next size: thus Brevier, supposing it to be the smallest, might have three wide nicks, Bourgeois two closer ones, and Long Primer one; Small Pica the same as Brevier, Pica as Bourgeois, English as Long Primer; and here it might stop, for there is difference enough in the sizes above English for the eye to distinguish them readily, without varying the nick.

By going as far as three nicks, which is now generally done, a sufficient variety may be obtained to distinguish one fount from another without hesitation; but I would strongly advise that the nicks should be deep, as it allows the compositor to see quickly how the letters lie in the box, and enables him to pick them up with greater facility, particularly by candlelight.

A single nick may be--low on the shank, in the middle, or nearer the top; two nicks may be close together--at the bottom, in the middle, or at the top, or they may be wide apart; three nicks may be--two at bottom and one at top, two at top and one at bottom, or the three close together, at the bottom, the middle, or the top, or wide apart. Where there are a great number of founts, it would add to the distinguishing mark, if consisting of more than one nick, that one of them should be cast shallow: but where there is only one nick it ought always to be cast deep.

NISKHI. _See_ PERSIAN.

NONPAREIL.

The name of a type, one size larger than Pearl and one smaller than Minion. Moxon spelt the name Nomparel, and the French to this day spell it Nompareille.

NORTHERN LANGUAGES.

For the allowance of the duty on paper used in the printing of books in the Northern languages within the universities of Oxford and Cambridge, the universities of Scotland, and the university of Trinity College, Dublin, _see_ PAPER.

A great deal of information respecting the Northern languages will be found in _Recherches sur les Langues Tartares, par M. Abel Remusat_.

NORTON, WILLIAM. _See_ DONATIONS.

NOTATION, CHEMICAL. _See_ FORMULÆ.

NOTES.

Quotations down the side of a page are called _Notes_.--_M._ At the present day we term these Marginal Notes; and usually mean, when we speak of notes, those at the bottom of a page, although they are sometimes termed Bottom Notes, or Foot Notes, which see.

NOTICE for entering printing press, types, &c., with Clerk of the Peace, _see_ CERTIFICATE.

NUMBER LAID ON. _See_ LAY ON.--_M._

NUMERALS.

The names of numerals are very different, not only in several parts of Asia, but in both North and South America.

“Small stones were used amongst uncivilized nations: hence the words _calculate_ and _calculation_ appear to have been derived from _calculus_, the Latin for a pebble-stone. Alphabetic letters had also a certain numerical value assigned them, and several Greek characters were employed to express particular numbers.

“The combination of Greek numerical characters was not well known to the Latins before the thirteenth century, although Greek numerical characters were frequently used in France and Germany, in episcopal letters, and continued to the eleventh century. But of all the Greek ciphers the Episema ϐαῦ was most in use with the Latins: it gradually assumed the form of _G_ with a tail, for so it appears in a Latin inscription of the year _296_. It is found to have been used in the fifth century in Latin MSS. It was reckoned for _6_, and this value has been evinced by such a number of monumental proofs, that there is no room to give it any other. Some of the learned, with even Mabillon, have been mistaken in estimating it as _5_, but in a posthumous work he acknowledges his error.

“Those authors were led into this error by the medals of the Emperor Justinian having the episema for _5_; but it is a certain fact that the coiners had been mistaken and confounded it with the tailed _U_, for the episema was still in use in the fourth century, and among the Latins was estimated as six, but under a form somewhat different. Whenever it appears in other monuments of the western nations of Europe of that very century, and the following, it is rarely used to express any number except _5_.

“The Etruscans also used their letters for indicating numbers by writing them from right to left, and the ancient Danes copied the example in the application of their letters.

“The Romans, when they borrowed arts and sciences from the Greeks, learned also their method of using alphabetical numeration. This custom however was not very ancient among them. Before writing was yet current with them they made use of nails for reckoning years, and the method of driving those nails became in process of time a ceremony of their religion. The first eight Roman numerals were composed of the I and the V. The Roman ten was composed of the V proper, and the V inverted (Ʌ), which characters served to reckon as far as forty, but when writing became more general, I, V, X, L, C, D, and M, were the only characters appropriated to the indication of numbers. The above seven letters, in their most extensive combination, produce six hundred and sixty-six thousand ranged thus, DCLXVIM. Some however pretend that the Romans were strangers to any higher number than 100,000. The want of ciphers obliged them to double, treble, and multiply their numerical characters four-fold; according as they had occasion to make them express units, tens, hundreds, &c. &c. For the sake of brevity they had recourse to another expedient; by drawing a small line over any of their numeral characters they made them stand for as many thousands as they contained units. Thus a small line over Ī made it 1000, and over X̄ expressed 10,000, &c.

“When the Romans wrote several units following, the first and last were longer than the rest IIIIII: thus _vir_ after those six units, signified _sex-vir_. D stood for 500, and the perpendicular line of this letter was sometimes separated from the body thus (IƆ,) without lessening its value. _M_, whether capital or uncial, expressed 1000. In the uncial form it sometimes assumed that of one of those figures, CIƆ Ɔ, CD, ∞, ო. The cumbent X was also used to signify a similar number.

“As often as a figure of less value appears before a higher number, it denotes that so much must be deducted from the greater number: thus, I before V makes but four, I before X gives only nine, X preceding C produces only 90, and even two XX before C reckons for no more than 80. Such was the general practice with the ancient Romans with respect to their numerical letters, which is still continued in recording accounts in our Exchequer.

“In ancient MSS. 4 is written IIII and not IV, 9 thus VIIII, and not IX, &c. Instead of V five units IIIII were sometimes used in the eighth century. Half was expressed by an S at the end of the figures, CIIS was put 102 and a half. This S sometimes appeared in the form of our 5.

“In some old MSS. those numerical figures LXL are used to express 90. The Roman numeral letters were generally used both in England, France, Italy, and Germany, from the earliest times to the middle of the fifteenth century.

“The ancient people of Spain made use of the same Roman ciphers as we do. The X with the top of the right hand stroke in form of a semi-circle reckoned for 40; it merits the more particular notice as it has misled many of the learned. The Roman ciphers however were continued in use with the Spaniards until the fifteenth century. The Germans used the Roman ciphers for a long time, nearly in the same manner as the French.”

“The points after the Roman ciphers were exceedingly various, and never rightly fixed. It is not known when the ancient custom was first introduced of placing an O at top immediately after the Roman characters, as A^o M^o L^o VI^o &c.”--_Astle._

_Numeral Letters._

Roman. Arabic. Unus, a, um, I. 1. Duo, æ, o, II. 2. Tres, ia, III. 3. Quatuor, IV. 4. Quinque, V. 5. Sex, VI. 6. Septem, VII. 7. Octo, VIII. 8. Novem, IX. 9. Decem, X. 10. Undecim, XI. 11. Duodecim, XII. 12. Tredecim, XIII. 13. Quatuordecim, XIV. 14. Quindecim, XV. 15. Se- sex- decim, XVI. 16. Septemdecim, XVII. 17. Octodecim, XVIII. _or_ XIIX. 18. Novemdecim, } Undeviginti,} XIX. 19. Viginti, XX. 20. Triginta, XXX. 30. Quadraginta, XL. 40. Quinquaginta, L. 50. Sexaginta, LX. 60. Septuaginta, LXX. 70. Octoginta, LXXX. 80. Nonaginta, XC. 90. Centum, C. 100. Ducenti, æ, a, CC. 200. Trecenti, æ, a, CCC. 300. Quadringenti, æ, a, CCCC. 400. Quingenti, æ, a, IƆ. _or_ D. 500. Sexcenti, æ, a, DC. 600. Septingenti, æ, a, DCC. 700. Octingenti, æ, a, DCCC. 800. Nongenti, æ, a, DCCCC. _or_ CM. 900. Mille, M. _or_ CIƆ. 1,000. Duo millia, } Bis mille, } MM. 2,000. Tria millia, } Ter mille, } MMM. 3,000. Quatuor millia, } Quater mille, } MMMM. 4,000. Quinque millia, } Quinquies mille, } IƆ​Ɔ​. _or_ V̄. 5,000. Decem millia, } Decies mille, } CCIƆ​Ɔ​. _or_ X̄. 10,000. Quinquaginta millia, } Quinquagies mille, } IƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​. _or_ L̄. 50,000. Centum millia, } Centies mille, } CCCIƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​. _or_ C̄. 100,000. Quingenta millia, } Quingenties mille, } IƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​Ɔ​. _or_ D̄. 500,000. Decies centena millia, CCCCIƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​Ɔ​, _or_ M̄. 1,000,000.

If the lesser number is placed before the greater, the lesser is to be deducted from the greater; thus IV signifies one less than five, i. e. four; IX, nine; XC, ninety.

If the lesser number be placed after the greater, the lesser is to be added to the greater; thus VI signifies one more than five, i. e. six; XI, eleven; CX, one hundred and ten.

An horizontal stroke over a numeral denotes a thousand: thus V̄ signifies five thousand; L̄, fifty thousand: M̄, a thousand times a thousand, or a million.

I, signifies _one_, because it is the smallest letter.

V, _five_, because it is sometimes used for U, the fifth vowel.

X, _ten_, because it represents two Vs.

L, _fifty_, from its resemblance to the lower half of C.

C, _a hundred_, centum.

IƆ or D, _five hundred_, the half of CIƆ.

M or CIƆ, _a thousand_, from mille. The latter figures joined at the top ო formed the ancient M.--_Latin Vocabulary_, 18_mo._ _Lond. Valpy_, 1823.

NUSTALEEK. _See_ PERSIAN.

NUT BOLTS.

Two bolts that pass through the head: they have square return heads, which clasp the under side of the nut of the spindle to keep it firm in its place.

NUT OF THE SPINDLE. It is also called the BOX, which _see_.

O.

OBELISK,

marked thus †, is used as a reference to notes in the margin, or at the bottom of the page.

In printing it is technically called a _dagger_; and is the second reference used, when more than one occurs in a page.

OCTAVO.

A sheet of paper folded into eight leaves or sixteen pages is termed an octavo or 8vo.

ODD PAGE.

The first, third, fifth, seventh, and all uneven numbered pages, are _Odd Pages_.--_M._

OFF.

A pressman usually says, I am off, meaning he has wrought off his token, his heap, his form.--_M._ It is used also for part of the whole number that is to be worked; as, when a ream, or two reams are worked of a large number, he says, A ream’s off, Two reams off.

OFF CHEEK.

That cheek of the press which is on the opposite side to that at which the pressmen stand to beat and pull; the catch of the bar is fixed to the off cheek.

OFFCUT.

That part of a sheet which, when printed, cuts off, and when folded is inserted in the middle of the other part, which together form a regular and orderly succession of all the pages in the signature.

OIL.

The best oil for presses is neats foot oil, which does not candy nor become glutinous, as almost all other oils do. On this account it is used in the machinery employed in cotton manufactories, where it is necessary to have as little friction as possible.

OLD ENGLISH. _See_ BLACK LETTER.

OPENING OF THE QUOINS.--_M._ _See_ UNLOCK THE FORM.

OPEN MATTER.

Full of breaks and whites.--_M._

OPEN THE FORM.

In laying-up a form to wash it, the compositor, after unlocking the quoins, opens the matter with his fingers so as to suffer the water to penetrate among the letters and wash away the lye and ink.--_M._

OPISTHOGRAPHIC.

The first productions of the press were printed on one side of the paper only; as the art improved among the early printers they impressed both sides: and those early productions, when they are printed on both sides of the paper, are styled Opisthographic.

ORGANIC REMAINS.

Abbreviations of Authors’ Names on Organic Remains.

Bast. Basterot. Goldf. Goldfuss. Beaum. Elie de Beaumont. Jäg. Jäger. Blain. Blainville. Lam. Lamarck. Blum. Blumenbach. Lam^x. Lamouroux. Bobl. Boblaye. Linn. Linnæus. Broc. Brocchi. Lons. Lonsdale. Al. Brong. Alex. Brongniart Mant. Mantell. Ad. Brong. Adolphe Brongniart. Munst. Munster. Brug. Bruguière. Murch. Murchison. Buckl. Buckland. M. de S. Marcel de Serres. Conyb. Conybeare. Nils. Nilsson. Cuv. Cuvier. Park. Parkinson. De C., or De Cau. De Caumont. Phil. Phillips. Defr. Defrance. Raf. Rafinesque. De la B. De la Beche. Rein. Reinecke. Desh. Deshayes. Schlot. Schlotheim. Des M. Des Moulins. Sedg. Sedgwick. Desm. Desmarest. Sow. Sowerby. Desn. Desnoyers. Sternb. Sternberg. Dufr. Dufrénoy. Thir. Thirria. Dum. Dumont. Y. & B. Young and Bird. Fauj. de St F. Faujas de St Fond. Wahl. Wahlenberg. Flem. Fleming. Weav. Weaver.

_De la Beche’s Geological Manual._ 2d. edit. 12mo. 1832.

ORIENTAL LANGUAGES.

For the allowance of the duty on paper used in the printing of books in the Oriental languages within the universities of Oxford and Cambridge, the universities of Scotland, and the university of Trinity College, Dublin, _see_ PAPER.

ORTHOGRAPHY.

The orthography of the English Language is attended with much uncertainty and perplexity. But a considerable part of this inconvenience may be remedied, by attending to the general laws of formation; and, for this end, the reader is presented with a view of such general maxims in spelling primitive and derivative words, as have been almost universally received.

RULE I.--Monosyllables ending with _f_, _l_, or _s_, preceded by a single vowel, double the final consonant; as staff, mill, pass, &c. The only exceptions are, of, if, as, is, has, was, yes, his, this, us, and thus.

RULE II.--Monosyllables ending with any consonant but _f_, _l_, or _s_, and preceded by a single vowel, never double the final consonant; excepting only, add, ebb, butt, egg, odd, err, inn, bunn, purr, and buzz.

RULE III.--Words ending with _y_, preceded by a consonant, form the plural of nouns, the persons of verbs, verbal nouns, past participles, comparatives, and superlatives, by changing _y_ into _i_; as, spy, spies; I carry, thou carriest; he carrieth or carries; carrier, carried; happy, happier, happiest.

The present participle in _ing_, retains the _y_, that _i_ may not be doubled; as, carry, carrying; bury, burying, &c.

But _y_, preceded by a vowel, in such instances as the above, is not changed; as, boy, boys; I cloy, he cloys, cloyed, &c; except in lay, pay, and say; from which are formed, laid, paid, and said; and their compounds, unlaid, unpaid, unsaid, &c.

RULE IV.--Words ending with _y_, preceded by a consonant, upon assuming an additional syllable beginning with a consonant, commonly change _y_ into _i_; as, happy, happily, happiness. But when _y_ is preceded by a vowel, it is very rarely changed in the additional syllable; as, coy, coyly; boy, boyish, boyhood; annoy, annoyed, annoyance; joy, joyless, joyful, &c.

RULE V.--Monosyllables, and words accented on the last syllable, ending with a single consonant preceded by a single vowel, double that consonant, when they take another syllable beginning with a vowel: as, wit, witty; thin, thinnish; to abet, an abettor; to begin, a beginner.

But if a diphthong precedes, or the accent is on the preceding syllable, the consonant remains single: as, to toil, toiling; to offer, an offering; maid, maiden, &c.

RULE VI.--Words ending with any double letter but _l_, and taking _ness_, _less_, _ly_, or _ful_, after them, preserve the letter double: as, harmlessness, carelessness, carelessly, stiffly, successful, distressful, &c. But those words which end with double _l_, and take _ness_, _less_, _ly_, or _ful_, after them, generally omit one _l_, as, fulness, skilless, fully, skilful, &c.

RULE VII.--_Ness_, _less_, _ly_, and _ful_, added to words ending with silent _e_, do not cut it off: as, paleness, guileless, closely, peaceful; except in a few words: as, duly, truly, awful.

RULE VIII.--_Ment_, added to words ending with silent _e_, generally preserves the _e_ from elision: as, abatement, chastisement, incitement, &c. The words judgment, abridgment, acknowledgment, are deviations from the rule.

Like other terminations it changes _y_ into _i_, when preceded by a consonant: as, accompany, accompaniment; merry, merriment.

RULE IX.--_Able_ and _ible_, when incorporated into words ending with silent _e_, almost always cut it off: as, blame, blamable; cure, curable; sense, sensible, &c.; but if _c_ or _g_ soft comes before _e_ in the original word, the _e_ is then preserved in words compounded with _able_: as, change, changeable; peace, peaceable, &c.

RULE X.--When _ing_ or _ish_ is added to words ending with silent _e_, the _e_ is almost universally omitted: as, place, placing; lodge, lodging; slave, slavish; prude, prudish.

RULE XI.--Words taken into composition, often drop those letters which were superfluous in their simples; as, handful, dunghil, withal; also, chilblain, foretel.

The orthography of a great number of English words, is far from being uniform, even amongst writers of distinction. Thus, _honour_ and _honor_, _inquire_ and _enquire_, _negotiate_ and _negociate_, _control_ and _controul_, _expense_ and _expence_, _allege_ and _alledge_, _surprise_ and _surprize_, _abridgment_ and _abridgement_, and many other orthographical variations, are to be met with in the best modern publications. Some authority for deciding differences of this nature appears to be necessary; and where can we find one of equal pretensions with Dr. Johnson’s Dictionary? though a few of his decisions do not appear to be warranted by the principles of etymology and analogy, the stable foundations of his improvements.--“As the weight of truth and reason,” (says Nares in his ‘Elements of Orthoepy,’) “is irresistible, Dr. Johnson’s Dictionary has nearly fixed the external form of our language. Indeed, so convenient is it to have one acknowledged standard to recur to; so much preferable, in matters of this nature, is a trifling degree of irregularity, to a continual change, and fruitless pursuit of unattainable perfection; that it is earnestly to be hoped, that no author will henceforth, on light grounds, be tempted to innovate.”

The plural number of nouns is generally formed by adding _s_ to the singular: as, dove, doves; face, faces; thought, thoughts. But when the substantive singular ends in _x_, _ch_ soft, _sh_, _ss_, or _s_, we add _es_ in the plural: as, box, boxes; church, churches; lash, lashes; kiss, kisses; rebus, rebusses. If the singular ends in _ch_ hard, the plural is formed by adding _s_; as, monarch, monarchs; distich, distichs.

Nouns which end in _o_, have sometimes _es_ added to the plural; as, cargo, echo, hero, negro, manifesto, potato, volcano, wo: and sometimes only _s_; as, folio, grotto, junto, nuncio, portico, punctilio, tyro.

Nouns ending in _f_, or _fe_, are rendered plural by the change of those terminations into _ves_: as, loaf, loaves; half, halves; wife, wives; except grief, relief, reproof, and several others, which form the plural by the addition of _s_. Those which end in _ff_, have the regular plural: as, ruff, ruffs; except, staff, staves.

Nouns which have _y_ in the singular, with no other vowel in the same syllable, change it into _ies_ in the plural: as, beauty, beauties; fly, flies. But the _y_ is not changed, when there is another vowel in the syllable: as, key, keys; delay, delays; attorney, attorneys.

Some nouns become plural by changing the _a_ of the singular into _e_: as, man, men; woman, women; alderman, aldermen. The words, ox and child, form oxen and children: brother, makes either brothers, or brethren. Sometimes the diphthong _oo_ is changed into _ee_ in the plural: as, foot, feet; goose, geese; tooth, teeth. Louse and mouse make lice and mice. Penny makes pence, or pennies, when the coin is meant; die, dice (for play); die, dies (for coining).

The following words, which have been adopted from the Hebrew, Greek, and Latin languages, are thus distinguished with respect to number.

Singular. Plural.

Cherub. Cherubim. Seraph. Seraphim. Antithesis. Antitheses. Diæresis. Diæreses. Ellipsis. Ellipses. Emphasis. Emphases.

Automaton. Automata. Basis. Bases. Crisis. Crises. Criterion. Criteria. Arcanum. Arcana. Calx. Calces. Datum. Data. Effluvium. Effluvia. Encomium. Encomia, _or_ Encomiums. Erratum. Errata. Genius. Genii.* Genus. Genera. Index. Indices, _or_ Indexes.† Hypothesis. Hypotheses. Metamorphosis. Metamorphoses. Phænomenon. Phænomena. Appendix. Appendices, _or_ Appendixes. Lamina. Laminæ. Medium. Media. Magus. Magi. Memorandum. Memoranda, _or_ Memorandums. Radius. Radii. Stamen. Stamina. Stratum. Strata. Vortex. Vortices.

* _Genii_, when denoting aërial spirits: _Geniuses_, when signifying persons of genius.

† _Indexes_, when it signifies pointers, or Tables of contents: _Indices_, when referring to algebraic quantities.--_Murray._

The following observations relate to English and Scotch orthography, temp. Hen. VIII.:--

_A_ is frequently used in Scottish orthography for _o_; as, _aith_ for _oath_, _ane_ for _one_, _twa_ for _two_, _hame_ for _home_, _quha_ for _who_.

_Qu_ is in Scottish commonly substituted for _w_, as, _quha_ for _who_, _quhair_ for _where_, _quhilk_ for _which_.

_U_ is in Scottish usually substituted for the English _oo_, as, _guid_ or _gude_ for _good_, _stude_ for _stood_.

_V_ and _W_, at the commencement of words and syllables, are used indiscriminately, and sometimes also at their termination, as, _foryew_ for _foryeve_; _w_ is in Scottish also substituted for _u_ in the middle of syllables, as, _swt_ for _suit_.

_Y_ is in Scottish almost always used for _th_ (being corrupted from the Anglo-Saxon þ), and its place supplied by _z_.

_Z_ is in Scottish constantly used for _y_, being corrupted from the Anglo-Saxon ȝ.

_Verbs._--The following are some of the most commonly used irregular verbs, having a preterite and participle varying from those in use at the present time:--

To Be--in the second person singular Bes; in the third person Beis, Beth, or Beeth; in the third person plural Arn, Be, Ben, Been, Bene, Byn, or Er; in the third person plural of the preterite Werne.

To Bid--in the preterite Bode; in the participle Bode, Boden.

To Bind--in the preterite Bonde; in the participle Band, Bond, Bounde, Bounden.

To Bite--in the preterite Bote.

To Con or Can, _to be able_--in the third person singular Conith.--Michel can, _to be powerful_.

To Climb--in the preterite Clomb, Clame, Clambe, Clombe, Clomben.

To Cling--in the preterite Clong.

To Ferme (Sc.) _to establish_--in the participle Fermen.

To Fet, to _fetch_--in the preterite Fetten; in the participle Fette.--Ferfett, _farfetched_.

To Flete (Sc.) _to float_--in the preterite Flet.

To Forbede or Forbid--in the preterite Forbod; in the participle Forboden, Forbode, Forbodden.

To Gar or Ger (Sc.) _to cause_--in the preterite and participle Gart, Gert.

To Geve, Gif, or Gyf, _to give_--in the preterite Gaf; in the participle Giffin, Goue, Gouun, or Gyffen.

To Glide--in the preterite Glode.

To Kithe (Sc.) _to prove_--in the preterite Kidde.

Man, Mone, or Moten (Sc.)--_must_.

To Mow, Moue, or May, _to be able_--in the preterite Mot, Mought, Moght, or Mowght; in the future Shall mow or may; subjunctive May mow; To mow in the infinitive.

To Owe--preterite Ought; as “He oweth to pay,” “They owe to come,”--“D. ought him thirty shillings,” “He ought suit,” “Kindness ought to us.”

To Preif or Pryve (Sc.) _to prove_--in the preterite and participle Prewit or Pryved.

To Recet or Receipt (Sc.) _to harbour a criminal_--in the participle Reset, Resettit, or Receipted.

To Rede, _to advise_--in the preterite Radde.

To Reve, Reffe, or Riffe (Sc.) _to rob_--in the preterite Reft; in the participle Reft, Reved, or Revin.

To Tyne, Tyin, Tyn, or Tynte (Sc.) _to lose_--in the participle Tint, Tynt.

To Vys or Wis, _to know_--in the preterite Vyst or Wist.

To Wete, Wite, or Wit, _to know_--in the preterite Wote; in the imperative Wateth, Witeth, _know thou_.

To Will--in the preterite Willed, Woled, Wold, or Wolde; preterpluperfect Had wold; future Shall will.

To Yeve, Yew, or Yeove, _to give_--in the preterite Yaf, Yave; future Shall or will Yeve; active participle Yeving; passive participle Yeven, frequently, and sometimes Yewin, Yoven, Yeoven, Yevin, and Yevyn.

Yede, Yode, went, preterite of A. S. gán _to go_.

To Yield--in the preterite Yald, Yalt, or Yold; in the participle Yelde, Yold, Yolde, Yolden.

_His_, or sometimes _Is_, is used after a masculine substantive as the sign of the genitive case, and occasionally united with the substantive, as, Kinghis. It occurs sometimes, though rarely, after a feminine substantive, as, “The Queen his affairs,” “The Queen is favour;” but _her_ is more commonly used in that case, as, “Elizabeth Holland her house.”

OUT.

A compositor usually says, I am out, meaning he has set out his page, form, or copy.--_M._

When a compositor has omitted a word or words, a line, a sentence, a paragraph, a page or a leaf of copy, which sometimes does happen, each of these omissions is called an Out: thus we say, _An out of a word--of two words--of a line_, &c.

OUTER FORM.

The form that has the first page of the sheet in it. It is usual to work this form the last. _See_ LAY ON.

OUT OF COPY.

A compositor is said to be out of copy when he has composed all that is in his possession, and there is no supply for him to go on with. It is also termed standing still for copy.

OUT OF LETTER.

When a compositor has no letter in his cases, and none to distribute, he is said to be out of letter.

OUT OF REGISTER.

Bad Register.--_M._ When the pages on both sides of a sheet do not print exactly upon each other; or when line does not fall upon line, where they are intended to do so; or folios are not justified in the middle of the line; or when any thing on one side of a sheet does not print exactly on the back of a similar thing on the opposite side, which it is meant to do, it is said to be _Out of Register_, or _Out_, or _It does not Register_, or _It is not in Register_.

OUT-PAGE.

In octavos, twelves, sixteens, every outside page in a sheet is called an _Out-Page_; the rest are called _In-Pages_.--_M._

OUTSIDE QUIRES.

The two quires on the outside of every ream of paper delivered from the maker; they have never more than twenty sheets in each, all of which are either damaged or torn, more or less. These quires are also called _Cassie Quires_, and _Cording Quires_. It is now uncommon to send any outside quires to letter-press printers; the paper sent to them for use being what is termed _Perfect_.

OUTSIDERS. _See_ NEWSPAPERS.

OVERFLOWING CASE. _See_ CASE RUNS OVER.

OVERLAYS.

Pieces of paper pasted on the tympan sheet, or on a sheet between the tympans, to increase the pressure on particular parts of a form, to make the impression more regular, or more perfect. _See_ ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD. FINE PRESSWORK. MAKING READY.

OVERPLUS. _See_ WASTE.

OVERRUN.

If in a proof any matter is marked to be taken out, or to be inserted, in a page, or pages, it will be necessary to take matter from one page to another, to preserve them of a proper length, this is termed overrunning: it may be a few words only in a paragraph, and not extending beyond it; in this case it is termed overrunning a paragraph.

The best method of overrunning matter is to take the lines into a composing stick; the spacing and the justifying of the lines are better preserved by this means, than by spacing out upon the stone in the form, and feeling the ends of the lines with the fingers.

OVERSEER.

The manager or superintendent of a printing office. The duties of an overseer vary according to the size of the establishment, and the part that his principal takes in its management; but, generally speaking, he has the sole conducting of the practical department, receiving his general directions from the principal, and seeing that they are carried into execution in a proper manner. It is requisite, as a matter of course, that he should be intimately and practically acquainted with the business in all its details. It is of importance to the concern where he has the management, that he should blend urbanity with firmness; and show judgment and impartiality in giving out work, so that the business should proceed with regularity, and with satisfaction to all parties.

P.

PAGE CORD.

Small twine with which the pages are tied round, to secure them temporarily till they are imposed. Small net twine is the best, as being stronger and more uniform in thickness than any other cord that I have seen used for the purpose.

PAGE PAPER.

Stout paper cut up to the proper size, on which to place pages, till they are wanted to be imposed.

The wrappers that come round bundles of paper are generally used, for which the compositor applies to the warehouseman, who when he has no wrappers, gives some of the stoutest waste paper that he has; when it is not strong enough single the compositor uses it double. Page papers are cut longer than a page of the work they are for, and should be about an inch and a half broader than the width of the page and turned up to the sides of it, so that when the compositor has occasion to move his pages, he takes hold of both sides with one hand including the sides of the page paper which supports the bottom of the page.

Except the page papers be very stout, it would be running a risk to place large quarto pages on them: in this case it will be better to keep them on slices.

PALE COLOUR.

If there be not Blacking enough in the ink, or the form be beaten with too lean balls, the work will be said to have a _Pale Colour_.--M. The term is now applied only when there is a deficiency of ink, so that the surface of the paper is not completely covered on the impression of the types.

PAMPHLET.

Any work that does not exceed five sheets in octavo is termed a pamphlet, and is paid something extra for at case, as a compensation to the compositor for making up the letter and furniture without having any return of either; the whole being generally put in chase. _See_ SCALE OF PRICES.

PAMPHLETS.

Act 60 Geo. 3. c. 9.--To subject certain Publications to the Duties of Stamps upon Newspapers, and to make other Regulations for restraining the Abuses arising from the Publication of Blasphemous and Seditious Libels.

First recites, that Pamphlets and printed Papers containing Observations upon Public Events and Occurrences, tending to excite Hatred and Contempt of the Government and Constitution of these Realms as by Law established, and also vilifying our Holy Religion, have lately been published in great Numbers, and at very small Prices; and it is expedient that the same should be restrained, and enacts;

s. 1. That all Pamphlets and Papers containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, printed in any Part of the United Kingdom for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days between the Publication of any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers, where any of the said Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers respectively, shall not exceed Two Sheets, or shall be published for Sale for a less Sum than Sixpence, exclusive of the Duty by this Act imposed thereon, shall be deemed and taken to be Newspapers within the true Intent and Meaning of several other Acts of Parliament now in force relating to Newspapers; and be subject to such and the same Duties of Stamps, with such and the same Allowances and Discounts, as Newspapers printed in Great Britain and Ireland respectively now are subject unto under and by virtue of the said recited Acts of Parliament, and shall be printed, published, and distributed under and subject to all such and the like Rules, Regulations, Restrictions, Provisions, Penalties, and Forfeitures, as are contained in the said recited Acts, or either of them.

s. 2. That no Quantity of Paper less than a Quantity equal to Twenty-one Inches in Length and Seventeen Inches in Breadth, in whatever Way or Form the same may be made, or may be divided into Leaves, or in whatever Way the same may be printed, shall be deemed or taken to be a Sheet of Paper within the Meaning and for the Purposes of this Act.

s. 3. That no Cover or Blank Leaf, or any other Leaf upon which any Advertisement or other Notice shall be printed, shall, for the Purposes of this Act, be deemed or taken to be a Part of any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number aforesaid.

s. 4. That all Pamphlets and Papers containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any such Remarks or Observations as aforesaid, printed for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals exceeding Twenty-six Days between any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers, and which said Pamphlets, Papers, Parts or Numbers respectively, shall not exceed Two Sheets, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence, shall be first published on the First Day of every Calendar Month, or within Two Days before or after that Day, and at no other Time; and that if any Person or Persons shall first publish or cause to be published any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number aforesaid, on any other Day or Time, he or they shall forfeit for every such Offence the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 5. That upon every Pamphlet or Paper containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, printed in any Part of the United Kingdom for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days between the Publication of any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts, or Numbers, and upon every Part or Number thereof shall be printed the full Price at which every such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number shall be published for Sale, and also the Day on which the same is first published; and if any Person shall publish any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part or Number, without the said Price and Day being printed thereon, or if any Person shall at any Time within Two Months after the Day of Publication printed thereon as aforesaid sell or expose to sale any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number, or any Portion or Part of such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number, upon which the Price so printed as aforesaid shall be Sixpence, or above that Sum, for a less Price than the Sum of Sixpence, every such Person shall for every such Offence forfeit and pay the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 6. Provided always, That nothing in this Act shall extend or be construed to extend to subject any Person publishing any Pamphlet or Paper to any Penalty for any Allowance in Price made by the Person for whom and on whose Behalf, and for whose Profit, Benefit, or Advantage, the same shall have been first published, to any Bookseller, or Distributor, or other Person to whom the same shall be sold for the Purpose of retailing the same.

s. 7. That all Pamphlets and Papers which are by this Act declared to be subject to the Stamp Duties upon Newspapers, shall be freed and discharged from all the Stamp Duties and Regulations contained in any Act of Parliament relating to Pamphlets.

s. 8. That no Person, from and after Thirty Days after the passing of this Act, shall print or publish for Sale, any Newspaper, or any Pamphlet or other Paper containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, which shall not exceed Two Sheets, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence, until he or she shall have entered into a Recognizance, in the Sum of Three hundred Pounds, if such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or Paper shall be printed in London or within Twenty Miles thereof, and in the Sum of Two hundred Pounds, if such Newspaper, &c. shall be printed elsewhere in the United Kingdom, and his or her Sureties in a like Sum in the Whole, conditioned that such Printer or Publisher shall pay to his Majesty, his Heirs and Successors, every such Fine or Penalty as may at any Time be imposed upon or adjudged against him or her, by reason of any Conviction for printing or publishing any blasphemous or seditious Libel, at any Time after the entering into such Recognizance or executing such Bond; and that every Person who shall print or first publish any such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or other Paper, without having entered into such Recognizance, or executed and delivered such Bond with such Sureties as aforesaid, shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 9. If Sureties pay any Part of the Money for which they are bound, or become Bankrupt, new Recognizance or Bond with Sureties must be given.

s. 10. Provided Sureties may withdraw from Recognizance upon giving Notice, and new Recognizance to be entered into.

s. 11. Bonds not to be subject to Stamp Duty.

s. 12. Lists of Recognizances and Bonds taken, to be transmitted to Commissioners of Stamps in England, Scotland, and Ireland, respectively.

s. 13. And whereas the Printer or Publisher of any Newspaper, and of any Pamphlet and Paper hereby enacted to be deemed and taken to be a Newspaper, will, after the passing of this Act, be bound under and by virtue of the Provisions contained in the said Acts made and passed in the Thirty-eighth and Fifty-fifth Years of his Majesty’s Reign respectively, to deliver to the Commissioners of Stamps in Great Britain and Ireland respectively, or some Distributor of Stamps or other Officer, on the Day on which the same is published, or within a certain Time afterwards, One of the Newspapers, Pamphlets, or Papers so published, signed as in the said Acts is respectively directed: And whereas it is expedient that the same or similar Provisions and Regulations should extend and be applied to all Pamphlets and Papers, whether published periodically or not, and which shall contain any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrence, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, and which shall not exceed Two Sheets as aforesaid, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence; be it therefore enacted, That from and after Ten Days after the passing of this Act, the Printer or Publisher of any Pamphlet or other Paper for Sale, containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or on any Matter in Church or State, shall, upon every Day upon which the same shall be published, or within Six Days after, deliver to the Commissioners of Stamps for Great Britain and Ireland respectively, at their Head Offices, or to some Distributor or Officer to be appointed by them to receive the same, and whom they are hereby required to appoint for that Purpose, one of the Pamphlets or Papers so published upon each such Day, signed by the Printer or Publisher thereof, in his Hand-writing, with his Name and Place of Abode; and the same shall be carefully kept by the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer as aforesaid, in such Manner as the said Commissioners shall direct; and such Printer or Publisher shall be entitled to demand and receive from the Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer, the Amount of the Retail Price of such Pamphlet or Paper so delivered; and in every Case in which the Printer and Publisher of such Pamphlet or Paper shall neglect to deliver One such Pamphlet or Paper in the Manner herein-before directed, such Printer and Publisher shall, for every such Neglect respectively, forfeit and lose the Sum of One hundred Pounds.

s. 14. Provided always, That in case the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer aforesaid, shall refuse to receive or pay for any Copy of such Pamphlet or Paper offered to be delivered to them or him as aforesaid, for or on account of the same not being within the true Intent and Meaning of this Act, such Commissioners, Distributor, or Officer shall, if required so to do, give and deliver to such Printer or Publisher a Certificate in Writing, that a Copy of such Pamphlet or Paper had been by him duly offered to be delivered; and such Printer or Publisher shall thereupon be freed and discharged from any Penalty for not having delivered such Copy as aforesaid.

s. 15. That if any Person shall sell or expose to sale any Pamphlet or other Paper not being duly stamped, if required to be stamped, such Person shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 16. That it shall be lawful for any of his Majesty’s Courts of Record at Westminster or Dublin or of Great Session in Wales, or any Judge thereof respectively, or for any Court of Quarter or General Sessions of the Peace, or for any Justice of the Peace before whom any Person charged with having printed or published any blasphemous, seditious, or malicious Libel, shall be brought for the Purpose of giving Bail upon such Charge, to make it a Part of the Condition of the Recognizance to be entered into by such Person and his or her Bail, that the Person so charged shall be of good Behaviour during the Continuance of such Recognizance.

s. 17. Recovery of Penalties. Provided always, that no larger Amount in the Whole than One hundred Pounds shall be recoverable or recovered before any Justices of the Peace, for any such Penalties incurred in any One Day; any Thing in this Act or any other Acts of Parliament contained to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 18. Two or more Justices to determine Offences, and may mitigate Penalties.

s. 19. Penalty on Persons summoned as Witnesses not appearing, &c.

ss. 20. to 25. Relate to the Forms of Conviction, commencing Actions for Penalties, Management of the Duties, Allowance of Discounts, &c.

s. 26. That nothing in this Act shall extend to Acts of Parliament, Proclamations, Orders of Council, Forms of Prayer and Thanksgiving, and Acts of State, ordered to be printed by his Majesty, his Heirs or Successors, or his or their sufficient and authorised Officer; or to any printed Votes or other Matters by Order of either House of Parliament; or to Books commonly used in the Schools of Great Britain or Ireland, or Books or Papers containing only Matters of Devotion, Piety, or Charity; or Daily Accounts; or Bills of Goods imported and exported; or Warrants or Certificates for the Delivery of Goods; and the Weekly Bills of Mortality; or to Papers containing any Lists of Prices current, or of the State of the Markets, or any Account of the Arrival, Sailing, or other Circumstances relating to Merchant Ships or Vessels; or of any other Matter wholly of a Commercial Nature; provided such Bills, Lists, or Accounts do not contain any other Matter than what hath been usually comprised therein; or to the Printers or Publishers of the foregoing Matters, or any or either of them.

s. 27. That nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be construed to extend to charge with Stamp Duties any Work re-printed and re-published in Parts or Numbers, whether such Work shall be wholly re-printed or shall be re-published in an abridged Form; provided that the Work so re-printed and re-published shall have been first printed and published Two Years at the least previous to such Re-printing and Re-publication, and provided the said Work was not first published in Parts or Numbers.

This act was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. as far as relates to newspapers, advertisements, and stamps. _See_ BLASPHEMOUS LIBELS. NEWSPAPER POSTAGE. PUBLICATIONS, PERIODICAL.

_Pamphlets._ (Ireland.) 43 Geo. 3. c. 21. s. 45. “And, for the better collecting and securing the Duties hereby charged on Pamphlets, be it further enacted, That One printed Copy of every Pamphlet which shall be printed or published within the City of _Dublin_, shall, within the Space of six Days after the printing thereof, be brought to the said Head Office in _Dublin_, and the Title thereof, with the Number of Sheets contained therein, and the Duty hereby charged thereon, shall be registered or entered in a Book, to be there kept for that Purpose; which Duty shall be thereupon paid to the proper Officer or Officers appointed to receive the same, or his or their Deputy or Clerk, who shall thereupon give a Receipt for the same on such printed Copy, to denote the Payment of the Duty hereby charged on such Pamphlet; and that One printed Copy of every such Pamphlet that shall be printed or published in any Place in _Ireland_, not being within the City of _Dublin_, shall, within the Space of fourteen Days after the printing thereof, be brought to some Head Distributor or Collector of the Stamp Duties, who is hereby required forthwith to enter the Title thereof, with the Number of Sheets contained therein, and the Duty hereby charged thereon, in a Book to be by him kept for that Purpose, which Duty shall be thereupon paid to such Distributor or Collector, who shall give a Receipt for the same on such printed Copy.

s. 46. “And be it further enacted, That if any such Pamphlet shall be printed or published as aforesaid, and the Duty hereby charged thereon shall not be duly paid as aforesaid within the respective Times aforesaid, then the Printer or Publisher, and all and every other Person or Persons concerned in and about the printing or publishing of such Pamphlet, shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of One hundred Pounds; and the Author, Printer, and Publisher of such Pamphlet, shall forfeit and lose all Copy Right therein.

s. 47. “And be it further enacted, That on the Trials of Actions, Informations, or Suits, for Recovery of the aforesaid Penalty for Nonpayment of the aforesaid Duty, within the respective Times aforesaid, the Proof of the Payment of the said Duty shall lie upon the Printer or Publisher of such Pamphlet.”

SCHEDULE (D).

“For every Pamphlet or Paper, not exceeding Six Sheets in Octavo, or in a lesser Page, and not exceeding Twelve Sheets in Quarto, or Twenty Sheets in Folio, a Duty after the Rate of Two Shillings for every Sheet of any Kind of Paper contained in one printed Copy or Impression thereof.”

55 Geo. 3. c. 80., which re-enacts these sections, was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. as far as relates to Newspapers, Advertisements, and Stamps.

47 Geo. 3. c 50. sess. 1.

SCHEDULE (B).

“For every Pamphlet or Paper not exceeding Six Sheets in Octavo, or in a lesser Page, and not exceeding Twelve Sheets in Quarto, or Twenty Sheets in Folio, for every Sheet of any Kind of Paper contained in One printed Copy or Impression thereof, a Duty of 2_s._

“The foregoing Duty on Advertisements and Pamphlets does not extend to Advertisements respecting Hospitals, Forms of Prayer and Thanksgiving, printed Votes and Proceedings in Parliament, School Books, or Books of Devotion or Piety.”

56 Geo. 3. c. 56., which re-enacts this Duty, was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. as far as relates to Newspapers, Advertisements, and Stamps.

PAPER. The quality of paper is of great consequence in printing; but it is too frequently overlooked by all parties.

Every pressman of common attention perceives a material difference in the process of bringing off a sharp impression, according to the quality of the paper that he uses. When he meets with a hard-sized harsh paper, bleached with acid, it requires more than common care to make his work look well--to make it good, it frequently defies his utmost abilities--to preserve its first appearance is impossible, as the acid in the paper decomposes the ink.

It is to be regretted, that there is hardly any paper made at the present time but what is more or less bleached with acid, to the deterioration of its quality. The study of the paper maker is to produce stout and viewly paper at a low price; and this he does by using inferior rags bleached by acid; by adding a great proportion of gypsum, in some instances one seventh of its weight, in others one eighth; and frequently of whiting made from lime: he will thus produce a paper weighing sixteen or seventeen pounds a ream, that will feel as stout and look as viewly as an honest-made paper from good rags that will weigh about twenty-two pounds. To the publishers of cheap books, and of ephemeral productions, the price of paper is an important object; but no work of value ought to be printed on such an article, as it cannot be durable, nor will it bear much use, becoming tender with age, and breaking by turning over the leaves.

The origin of this viewly, inferior, perishable paper, was in consequence of the alteration of the duty on paper paid by the maker, from size to weight.

These evils are, however, in a fair way of being rectified. The paper makers of the present day are exerting their abilities to manufacture an article which, with all the beauty and fineness that are held so requisite, should be free from the evils which have of late years accompanied these qualities. Great improvements have already resulted from their endeavours; and one of the foremost in this praiseworthy competition is the house of Messrs. John Dickinson and Co., who have succeeded in manufacturing a paper of great fineness and beauty, and free from the imperfections of which we have had to complain.

The Rev. William Beloe, in his Anecdotes of Literature, &c. speaking of the paper on which books in the infancy of printing were executed, observes,--

“This presents a very fertile subject of discussion. Here, as in ink, two very distinct kinds occur, writing-paper and printing-paper, or rather did then; for the invention of paper made from rags did not precede that of printing more than half a century; and perhaps the first experiments were made on the paper in common use. But here it is worthy of remark, that in this particular fabrick of paper, the Italians far excelled the Germans; for it will appear that the paper used by Sweynheym and Pannartz in the Lactantius, printed at Subiaco, is greatly superior to that of the first printers at Mentz. But it is also a matter of surprise, in how very short a period, and to what a degree of excellence, the manufacture of paper was improved; never, perhaps, for the purposes of printing, to be excelled. Many of the EDITIONES PRINCIPES exhibit specimens of beauty and splendour never surpassed in all the productions of modern times. The earliest specimens of printing, however, were upon vellum; for which there were two reasons. The first was, that it was the object of the first printers to make their books as much as possible to resemble manuscripts; and the anecdote of Fust, and his disposing of his Bibles at Paris, which were considered as manuscripts, has before been related. The next motive of preferring vellum was, that the books were more durable; but from this circumstance, it sometimes happens that early books on paper are more difficult of attainment than on vellum. Yet the Mazarine Bible, which is now usually allowed to be the edition brought to Paris by Fust, is usually on paper. The Durandus, however, is never found but on vellum. It is observable, that the first printed books are distinguished by very ample margins. This, though considered by collectors in modern times as a distinguishing feature of beauty and excellence, was, in the infancy of the art, merely intended for the convenience of writing notes and making observations. Another very copious subject of animadversion is involved in the marks of the paper used in the infancy of printing. As the first printers often omitted to put their names to their works, many have supposed that a careful examination of the paper and paper-marks would ascertain to what printer such books might be ascribed. But this is very delusive.”

The following are the regular sizes of paper, of all descriptions, as they were fixed when the duty was paid to government according to the size. After the alteration in the mode of laying the duty, and it was imposed upon the weight and not upon the size, the makers began to vary the dimensions, so that in fact there is no regularity in them: yet the list will be useful in ascertaining those variations--in knowing what the size of each sort ought to be--and the comparative dimensions when folded into quarto, octavo, duodecimo, &c. for printing; and I have given all the list, although only a small part of it contains what are termed printing papers; yet the whole may be useful as a matter of reference.

+-------------------------+---------------+ | FIRST TABLE. | Inches | | +-------+-------+ | Imperial Writing | 22 | 30¼ | | Super Royal Do. | 19¼ | 27½ | | Royal Do. | 19¼ | 24 | | Medium Do. | 17½ | 22½ | | Demy Do. | 15½ | 20 | | Thick and Thin Post | 15¼ | 19½ | | Small Post | 13½ | 16½ | | Foolscap | 13½ | 16¾ | | Pott | 12½ | 15½ | | Extra Large Post | 16½ | 21 | | | | | | SECOND TABLE. | | | | | | | | Double Atlas | 55 | 31½ | | Demy | 15½ | 20 | | Copy or Bastard | 16 | 20¼ | | Foolscap | 13½ | 16¾ | | Littriss Foolscap | 13½ | 17½ | | Pott | 12½ | 15 | | Grand Eagle, or} | | | | Double Elephant} | 26¾ | 40 | | Columbier | 23½ | 34½ | | Atlas | 26¼ | 34 | | Atlas, Small | 25 | 31 | | Imperial | 22 | 30¼ | | Super Royal | 19¼ | 27½ | | Long Royal | 27½ | 18 | | Royal | 19¼ | 24 | | Demy | 17 | 22 | | Short Demy | 14 | 20¼ | | Crown | 15 | 20 | | Large Fan | 23½ | 20½ | | Small Fan | 22¼ | 13¼ | | Elephant | 23 | 28 | | | | | | THIRD TABLE. | | | | | | | | Double Demy | 26 | 38½ | | Royal Do. | {19½ | 24¼ | | | {20 | 26 | | Inferior Royal | 19½ | 24¼ | | Medium | 18 | 23 | | Demy, Single | 17½ | 22 | | Do. Do. | 19¼ | 21¼ | | Double Crown | 20 | 30 | | Single Crown | 15 | 20 | | Demy Tissue | 17½ | 22 | | Crown Tissue | 15 | 20 | | Double Pott | 17 | 25½ | | | | | | FOURTH TABLE. | | | | Cartridge | 21 | 26 | | Cartridge, Square | 24½ | 25½ | | Cartridge | 19¼ | 24 | | Elephant, Common | 23 | 28 | | Sugar Blue | 21½ | 33 | | Sugar Blue, Small Size | 18¾ | 27 | | Do. Demy Size | 17½ | 22 | | Do. Crown Size | 15 | 20 | | Purple, Royal | 19½ | 24¼ | | Blue Elephant | 23 | 28 | | Blue Royal | 19½ | 24¼ | | Blue Demy | 17 | 22 | | Blue Crown | 15 | 20 | | | | | | FIFTH TABLE. | | | | Royal Hand, Thick | 24 | 19¼ | | Royal Hand | 24 | 19¼ | | Lumber Hand | 23 | 18 | | Double Two Pound | 24 | 16 | | Single Two Pound | 16 | 11 | | Middle Hand, Double | 33 | 21 | | Middle Hand | 22 | 16 | | Small Hand, Double | 32 | 20 | | Small Hand | 19¾ | 16 | | Couples, Pound | 12 | 10 | | Couples, Half Pound | 9 | 7½ | | Imperial Cap | 29 | 22 | | Havon Cap | 24 | 20 | | Bag Cap | 23½ | 19 | | Kentish Cap | 21 | 18 | | Four Pounds | 20 | 16 | | Small Cap | 20 | 15 | | Double Four Pounds | 33 | 20 | | Single Two Pounds | 16 | 12 | | Couples, Pound | 12 | 10 | | Couples, Half Pound | 9 | 7½ | +-------------------------+-------+-------+

The subjoined table shows the dimensions of the leaves of each sort of paper when folded into the various sizes. It will be serviceable to the printer, by enabling him to ascertain easily what kind of paper will cut up to the most advantage for jobs, labels, &c.; and it will be equally serviceable to the bookseller, by enabling him to ascertain what sized paper will be the most economical to print a work on, when the size of the page is fixed, as he will perceive, on referring to it, that a foolscap octavo is 6¾ inches high, and 4⅛ inches broad; and that a royal eighteens is 6⅝ inches high, and 4¼ inches broad; that a post octavo is 7⅝ inches high, and 4⅞ inches broad; and a medium duodecimo is 7⅝ inches high, and 4½ inches broad;--so as to give him the option of saving both in presswork and the price of paper, without the trouble of having to fold various specimens of paper. It will also serve to ascertain the paper on which any book or job is printed.

I have not carried the calculation to a smaller fraction than the eighth of an inch, as that is near enough for all practical purposes, considering the variations in the size of paper; and when the division came to less, I adopted the next number; so that in some cases the parts of a sheet will be a little larger than the dimensions.

_D._ signifies drawing paper; _P._ printing paper; and _W._ writing paper.

+---------------------------+---------------+---------------+ | | Size of | Folio. | | | Sheet. | | | +---------------+-------+-------+ | | Inches. | Long. | Br. | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 55 | 31½ | 31½ | 22½ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._ } | 40 | 26¾ | 26¾ | 20 | | Double Demy. _P._ | 38½ | 26 | 26 | 19¼ | | Columbier. _D._ | 34½ | 23½ | 23½ | 17¼ | | Atlas. _D._ | 34 | 26½ | 26½ | 17 | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 31 | 25 | 25 | 15½ | | Imperial. _D._ | 30½ | 22 | 22 | 15¼ | | Imperial. _W._ | 30¼ | 22 | 22 | 15⅛ | | Double Crown. _P._ | 30 | 20 | 20 | 15 | | Elephant. _D._ | 28 | 23 | 23 | 14 | | Super Royal. _D._ | 27½ | 19¼ | 19¼ | 13¾ | | Super Royal. _W._ | 27½ | 19¼ | 19¼ | 13¾ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 27½ | 18 | 18 | 13¾ | | Royal. _P._ | 26 | 20 | 20 | 13 | | Double Pott. _P._ | 25½ | 17 | 17 | 12¾ | | Royal. _P._ | 24¼ | 19½ | 19½ | 12⅛ | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 24¼ | 19½ | 19½ | 12⅛ | | Royal. _D._ | 24 | 19¼ | 19¼ | 12 | | Royal. _W._ | 24 | 19¼ | 19¼ | 12 | | Medium. _P._ | 23 | 18 | 18 | 11½ | | Medium. _W._ | 22½ | 17½ | 17½ | 11¼ | | Demy. _P._ | 22 | 17½ | 17½ | 11 | | Demy. _D._ | 22 | 17 | 17 | 11 | | Demy. _P._ | 21¼ | 19¼ | 19¼ | 10⅝ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 21 | 16½ | 16½ | 10½ | | Copy, or Bastard. _W._ | 20¼ | 16 | 16 | 10⅛ | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 20¼ | 14 | 14 | 10⅛ | | Demy. _W._ | 20 | 15½ | 15½ | 10 | | Crown. _D._ | 20 | 15 | 15 | 10 | | Single Crown. _P._ | 20 | 15 | 15 | 10 | | Thick and Thin Post. _W._ | 19½ | 15¼ | 15¼ | 9¾ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 17½ | 13½ | 13½ | 8¾ | | Foolscap. _W._ | 16¾ | 13½ | 13½ | 8⅜ | | Foolscap. _D._ | 16¾ | 13¼ | 13¼ | 8⅜ | | Small Post. _W._ | 16½ | 13½ | 13½ | 8¼ | | Pott. _W._ | 15½ | 12½ | 12½ | 7¾ | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+

+---------------------------+---------------+-------+-------+ | | Long Folio. | Quarto. | | +---------------+---------------+ | | Long. | Br. | Long. | Br. | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 55 | 15¾ | 22½ | 15¾ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._ } | 40 | 13⅜ | 20 | 13⅜ | | Double Demy. _P._ | 38½ | 13 | 19¼ | 13 | | Columbier. _D._ | 34½ | 11¾ | 17¼ | 11¾ | | Atlas. _D._ | 34 | 13¼ | 17 | 13¼ | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 31 | 12½ | 15½ | 12½ | | Imperial. _D._ | 30½ | 11 | 15¼ | 11 | | Imperial. _W._ | 30¼ | 11 | 15⅛ | 11 | | Double Crown. _P._ | 30 | 10 | 15 | 10 | | Elephant. _D._ | 28 | 11½ | 14 | 11½ | | Super Royal. _D._ | 27½ | 9⅝ | 13¾ | 9⅝ | | Super Royal. _W._ | 27½ | 9⅝ | 13¾ | 9⅝ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 27½ | 9 | 13¾ | 9 | | Royal. _P._ | 26 | 10 | 13 | 10 | | Double Pott. _P._ | 25½ | 8½ | 12¾ | 8½ | | Royal. _P._ | 24¼ | 9¾ | 12⅛ | 9¾ | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 24¼ | 9¾ | 12⅛ | 9¾ | | Royal. _D._ | 24 | 9⅝ | 12 | 9⅝ | | Royal. _W._ | 24 | 9⅝ | 12 | 9⅝ | | Medium. _P._ | 23 | 9 | 11½ | 9 | | Medium. _W._ | 22½ | 8¾ | 11¼ | 8¾ | | Demy. _P._ | 22 | 8¾ | 11 | 8¾ | | Demy. _D._ | 22 | 8½ | 11 | 8½ | | Demy. _P._ | 21¼ | 9⅝ | 10⅝ | 9⅝ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 21 | 8¼ | 10½ | 8¼ | | Copy, or Bastard. _W._ | 20¼ | 8 | 10⅛ | 8 | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 20¼ | 7 | 10⅛ | 7 | | Demy. _W._ | 20 | 7¾ | 10 | 7¾ | | Crown. _D._ | 20 | 7½ | 10 | 7½ | | Single Crown. _P._ | 20 | 7½ | 10 | 7½ | | Thick and Thin Post. _W._ | 19½ | 7⅝ | 9¾ | 7⅝ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 17½ | 6¾ | 8¾ | 6¾ | | Foolscap. _W._ | 16¾ | 6¾ | 8⅜ | 6¾ | | Foolscap. _D._ | 16¾ | 6⅝ | 8⅜ | 6⅝ | | Small Post. _W._ | 16½ | 6¾ | 8¼ | 6¾ | | Pott. _W._ | 15½ | 6¼ | 7¾ | 6¼ | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+

+------------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+----------+ | | Long 4to. | 6mo. | Octavo. | Long 8vo.| | +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.| +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+----+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 31½ | 13¾ | 18¼ | 15¾ | 15¾ | 13¾ | 22½ | 7⅞ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._} | 26¾ | 10 | 13¼ | 13⅜ | 13⅜ | 10 | 20 | 6⅝ | | Double Demy. _P._ | 26 | 9⅝ | 12¾ | 13 | 13 | 9⅝ | 19¼ | 6½ | | Columbier. _D._ | 23½ | 8⅝ | 11½ | 11¾ | 11¾ | 8⅝ | 17¼ | 5⅞ | | Atlas. _D._ | 26½ | 8½ | 11¼ | 13¼ | 13¼ | 8½ | 17 | 6⅝ | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 25 | 7¾ | 10¼ | 12½ | 12½ | 7¾ | 15½ | 6¼ | | Imperial. _D._ | 22 | 7⅝ | 10⅛ | 11 | 11 | 7⅝ | 15¼ | 5½ | | Imperial. _W._ | 22 | 7½ | 10 | 11 | 11 | 7½ | 15⅛ | 5½ | | Double Crown. _P._ | 20 | 7½ | 10 | 10 | 10 | 7½ | 15 | 5 | | Elephant. _D._ | 23 | 7 | 9¼ | 11½ | 11½ | 7 | 14 | 5¾ | | Super Royal. _D._ | 19¼ | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6⅞ | 13¾ | 4¾ | | Super Royal. _W._ | 19¼ | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6⅞ | 13¾ | 4¾ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 18 | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 9 | 9 | 6⅞ | 13¾ | 4½ | | Royal. _P._ | 20 | 6½ | 8⅝ | 10 | 10 | 6½ | 13 | 5 | | Double Pott. _P._ | 17 | 6⅜ | 8½ | 8½ | 8½ | 6⅜ | 12¾ | 4¼ | | Royal. _P._ | 19½ | 6 | 8 | 9¾ | 9¾ | 6 | 12⅛ | 4⅞ | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 19½ | 6 | 8 | 9¾ | 9¾ | 6 | 12⅛ | 4⅞ | | Royal. _D._ | 19¼ | 6 | 8 | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6 | 12 | 4¾ | | Royal. _W._ | 19¼ | 6 | 8 | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6 | 12 | 4¾ | | Medium. _P._ | 18 | 5¾ | 7⅝ | 9 | 9 | 5¾ | 11½ | 4½ | | Medium. _W._ | 17½ | 5⅝ | 7½ | 8¾ | 8¾ | 5⅝ | 11¼ | 4⅜ | | Demy. _P._ | 17½ | 5½ | 7¼ | 8¾ | 8¾ | 5½ | 11 | 4⅜ | | Demy. _D._ | 17 | 5½ | 7½ | 8½ | 8½ | 5½ | 11 | 4¼ | | Demy. _P._ | 19¼ | 5¼ | 7 | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 5¼ | 10⅝ | 4⅛ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 16½ | 5¼ | 7 | 8¼ | 8¼ | 5¼ | 10½ | 4⅛ | | Copy, or Bastard. _W._ | 16 | 5 | 6¾ | 8 | 8 | 5 | 10⅛ | 4 | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 14 | 5 | 6¾ | 7 | 7 | 5 | 10⅛ | 3½ | | Demy. _W._ | 15½ | 5 | 6⅝ | 7¾ | 7¾ | 5 | 10 | 3⅞ | | Crown. _D._ | 15 | 5 | 6⅝ | 7½ | 7½ | 5 | 10 | 3¾ | | Single Crown. _P._ | 15 | 5 | 6⅝ | 7½ | 7½ | 5 | 10 | 3¾ | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 15¼ | 4⅞ | 6½ | 7⅝ | 7⅝ | 4⅞ | 9¾ | 3¾ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 13½ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 6¾ | 6¾ | 4⅜ | 8¾ | 3⅜ | | Foolscap. _W._ | 13½ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 6¾ | 6¾ | 4⅛ | 8¾ | 3⅜ | | Foolscap. _D._ | 13¼ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 4⅛ | 8⅜ | 3¼ | | Small Post. _W._ | 13½ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 6¾ | 6¾ | 4⅛ | 8¼ | 3⅜ | | Pott. _W._ | 12½ | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 6¼ | 6¼ | 3⅞ | 7¾ | 3⅛ | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+----+

+------------------------+-----------+----------+-----------+-----------+ | | Nines. | 12mo. | Long l2mo.| Squ. l2mo.| | +-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.|Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 18¼ | 10½ | 18¼ | 7⅞ | 15¾ | 9⅛ | 13¾ | 10½ | | Grand Eagle, or }| | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._ }| 13¼ | 8⅞ | 13¼ | 6⅝ | 13⅜ | 6⅝ | 10 | 8⅞ | | Double Demy. _P._ | 12¾ | 8⅝ | 12¾ | 6½ | 13 | 6⅜ | 9⅝ | 8⅝ | | Columbier. _D._ | 11½ | 7¾ | 11½ | 5⅞ | 11¾ | 5¾ | 8⅝ | 7¾ | | Atlas. _D._ | 11¼ | 8¾ | 11¼ | 6⅝ | 13¼ | 5⅝ | 8½ | 8¾ | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 10¼ | 8¼ | 10¼ | 6¼ | 12½ | 5⅛ | 7¾ | 8¼ | | Imperial. _D._ | 10⅛ | 7¼ | 10⅛ | 5½ | 11 | 5 | 7⅝ | 7¼ | | Imperial. _W._ | 10 | 7¼ | 10 | 5½ | 11 | 5 | 7½ | 7¼ | | Double Crown. _P._ | 10 | 6⅝ | 10 | 5 | 10 | 5 | 7½ | 6⅝ | | Elephant. _D._ | 9¼ | 7⅝ | 9¼ | 5¾ | 11½ | 4⅝ | 7 | 7⅝ | | Super Royal. _D._ | 9⅛ | 6⅜ | 9⅛ | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4¼ | 6⅞ | 6⅜ | | Super Royal. _W._ | 9⅛ | 6⅜ | 9⅛ | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4½ | 6⅞ | 6⅜ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 9⅛ | 6 | 9⅛ | 4½ | 9 | 4½ | 6⅞ | 6 | | Royal. _P._ | 8⅝ | 6⅝ | 8⅝ | 5 | 10 | 4¼ | 6½ | 6⅝ | | Double Pott. _P._ | 8½ | 5⅝ | 8½ | 4¼ | 8½ | 4¼ | 6⅜ | 5⅝ | | Royal. _P._ | 8 | 6½ | 8 | 4⅞ | 9¾ | 4 | 6 | 6½ | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 8 | 6½ | 8 | 4⅞ | 9¾ | 4 | 6 | 6½ | | Royal. _D._ | 8 | 6⅜ | 8 | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4 | 6 | 6⅜ | | Royal. _W._ | 8 | 6⅜ | 8 | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4 | 6 | 6⅜ | | Medium. _P._ | 7⅝ | 6 | 7⅝ | 4½ | 9 | 3¾ | 5¾ | 6 | | Medium. _W._ | 7½ | 5¾ | 7½ | 4⅜ | 8¾ | 3¾ | 5⅝ | 5¾ | | Demy. _P._ | 7¼ | 5¾ | 7¼ | 4⅜ | 8¾ | 3⅝ | 5½ | 5¾ | | Demy. _D._ | 7½ | 5⅝ | 7½ | 4¼ | 8½ | 3⅝ | 5½ | 5⅝ | | Demy. _P._ | 7 | 6⅜ | 7 | 4⅞ | 9⅝ | 3½ | 5¼ | 6⅜ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 7 | 5½ | 7 | 4⅛ | 8¼ | 3½ | 5¼ | 5½ | | Copy or Bastard. _W._ | 6¾ | 5¼ | 6¾ | 4 | 8 | 3⅜ | 5 | 5¼ | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 6¾ | 4⅝ | 6¾ | 3½ | 7 | 3⅜ | 5 | 4⅝ | | Demy. _W._ | 6⅝ | 5⅛ | 6⅝ | 3⅞ | 7¾ | 3¼ | 5 | 5⅛ | | Crown. _D._ | 6⅝ | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¾ | 7½ | 3¼ | 5 | 5 | | Single Crown. _P._ | 6⅝ | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¾ | 7½ | 3¼ | 5 | 5 | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 6½ | 5 | 6½ | 3¾ | 7⅝ | 3¼ | 4⅞ | 5 | | Littriss Foolscap. | 5¾ | 4½ | 5¾ | 3⅝ | 6¾ | 2⅞ | 4⅜ | 4½ | | Foolscap. _W._ | 5½ | 4½ | 5½ | 3⅜ | 6¾ | 2¾ | 4⅛ | 4½ | | Foolscap. _D._ | 5½ | 4⅜ | 5½ | 3¼ | 6⅝ | 2¾ | 4⅛ | 4⅜ | | Small Post. _W._ | 5½ | 4½ | 5½ | 3⅜ | 6¾ | 2¾ | 4⅛ | 4½ | | Pott. _W._ | 5⅛ | 4⅛ | 5⅛ | 3⅛ | 6¼ | 2½ | 3⅞ | 4⅛ | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+------------------------+-----------+----------+-----------+-----------+ | | 16mo. | 18mo. | 20mo. | 24mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.|Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 13¾ | 7⅞ | 10½ | 9⅛ | 11 | 7⅞ | 10½ | 6⅞ | | Grand Eagle, or }| | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._ }| 10 | 6⅝ | 8⅞ | 6⅝ | 8 | 6⅝ | 8⅞ | 5 | | Double Demy. _P._ | 9⅝ | 6½ | 8⅝ | 6⅜ | 7⅝ | 6½ | 8⅝ | 4¾ | | Columbier. _D._ | 8⅝ | 5⅞ | 7¾ | 5¾ | 6⅞ | 5⅞ | 7¾ | 4¼ | | Atlas. _D._ | 8½ | 6⅝ | 8¾ | 5⅝ | 6¾ | 6⅝ | 8¾ | 4¼ | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 7¾ | 6¼ | 8¼ | 5⅛ | 6⅛ | 6¼ | 8¼ | 3⅞ | | Imperial. _D._ | 7⅝ | 5½ | 7¼ | 5 | 6 | 5½ | 7¼ | 3¾ | | Imperial. _W._ | 7½ | 5½ | 7¼ | 5 | 6 | 5½ | 7¼ | 3¾ | | Double Crown. _P._ | 7½ | 5 | 6⅝ | 5 | 6 | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¾ | | Elephant. _D._ | 7 | 5¾ | 7⅝ | 4⅝ | 5½ | 5¾ | 7⅝ | 3½ | | Super Royal. _D._ | 6⅞ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4¼ | 5½ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3⅜ | | Super Royal. _W._ | 6⅞ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4¼ | 5½ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3⅜ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 6⅞ | 4½ | 6 | 4½ | 5½ | 4½ | 6 | 3⅜ | | Royal. _P._ | 6½ | 5 | 6⅝ | 4¼ | 5⅛ | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¼ | | Double Pott. _P._ | 6⅜ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 4¼ | 5 | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 3⅛ | | Royal. _P._ | 6 | 4⅞ | 6½ | 4 | 4¾ | 4⅞ | 6½ | 3 | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 6 | 4⅞ | 6½ | 4 | 4¾ | 4⅞ | 6½ | 3 | | Royal. _D._ | 6 | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3 | | Royal. _W._ | 6 | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3 | | Medium. _P._ | 5¾ | 4½ | 6 | 3¾ | 4½ | 4½ | 6 | 2⅞ | | Medium. _W._ | 5⅝ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 3¾ | 4½ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 2¾ | | Demy. _P._ | 5½ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 3⅝ | 4⅜ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 2¾ | | Demy. _D._ | 5½ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 3⅝ | 4⅜ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 2¾ | | Demy. _P._ | 5¼ | 4⅞ | 6⅜ | 3½ | 4¼ | 4⅞ | 6⅜ | 2⅝ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 5¼ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 3½ | 4⅛ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 2⅝ | | Copy, or Bastard. _W._ | 5 | 4 | 5¼ | 3⅜ | 4 | 4 | 5¼ | 2½ | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 5 | 3½ | 4⅝ | 3⅜ | 4 | 3½ | 4⅝ | 2½ | | Demy. _W._ | 5 | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 3¼ | 4 | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 2½ | | Crown. _D._ | 5 | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | 4 | 3¾ | 5 | 2½ | | Single Crown. _P._ | 5 | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | 4 | 3¾ | 5 | 2½ | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 4⅞ | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | 3⅞ | 3¾ | 5 | 2⅜ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 4⅜ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2⅞ | 3½ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2⅛ | | Foolscap. _W._ | 4⅛ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2¾ | 3¼ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2 | | Foolscap. _D._ | 4⅛ | 3¼ | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 3¼ | 3¼ | 4⅜ | 2 | | Small Post. _W._ | 4⅛ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2¾ | 3¼ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2 | | Pott. _W._ | 3⅞ | 3⅛ | 4⅛ | 2½ | 3 | 3⅛ | 4⅛ | 1⅞ | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+------------------------+-----------+----------+-----------+-----------+ | | Long 24. | Squ. 24. | 32mo. | 36mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.|Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 13¾ | 5¼ | 9⅛ | 7⅞ | 7⅞ | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 5¼ | | Grand Eagle, or }| | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._ }| 10 | 4⅜ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 5 | 6⅝ | 4⅜ | | Double Demy. _P._ | 9⅝ | 4¼ | 6⅜ | 6½ | 6½ | 4¾ | 6¾ | 4¼ | | Columbier. _D._ | 8⅝ | 3⅞ | 5¾ | 5⅞ | 5⅞ | 4¼ | 5¾ | 3⅞ | | Atlas. _D._ | 8½ | 4⅜ | 5⅝ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 4⅜ | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 7¾ | 4⅛ | 5⅛ | 6¼ | 6¼ | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 4⅛ | | Imperial. _D._ | 7⅝ | 3⅝ | 5 | 5½ | 5½ | 3¾ | 5 | 3⅝ | | Imperial. _W._ | 7½ | 3⅝ | 5 | 5½ | 5½ | 3¾ | 5 | 3⅝ | | Double Crown. _P._ | 7½ | 3¼ | 5 | 5 | 5 | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | | Elephant. _D._ | 7 | 3¾ | 4⅝ | 5¾ | 5¾ | 3½ | 4⅝ | 3¾ | | Super Royal. _D._ | 6⅞ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3⅜ | 4¼ | 3⅛ | | Super Royal. _W._ | 6⅞ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3⅜ | 4¼ | 3⅛ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 6⅞ | 3 | 4½ | 4½ | 4½ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 3 | | Royal. _P._ | 6½ | 3¼ | 4¼ | 5 | 5 | 3¼ | 4¼ | 3¼ | | Double Pott. _P._ | 6⅜ | 2¾ | 4¼ | 4¼ | 4¼ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 2¾ | | Royal. _P._ | 6 | 3¼ | 4 | 4⅞ | 4⅞ | 3 | 4 | 3¼ | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 6 | 3¼ | 4 | 4⅞ | 4⅞ | 3 | 4 | 3¼ | | Royal. _D._ | 6 | 3⅛ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3 | 4 | 3⅛ | | Royal. _W._ | 6 | 3⅛ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3 | 4 | 3⅛ | | Medium. _P._ | 5¾ | 3 | 3¾ | 4½ | 4½ | 2⅞ | 3¾ | 3 | | Medium. _W._ | 5⅝ | 2⅞ | 3¾ | 4⅜ | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 3¾ | 2⅞ | | Demy. _P._ | 5½ | 2⅞ | 3⅝ | 4⅜ | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 3⅝ | 2⅞ | | Demy. _D._ | 5½ | 2¾ | 3⅝ | 4¼ | 4¼ | 2¾ | 3⅝ | 2¾ | | Demy. _P._ | 5¼ | 3⅛ | 3½ | 4⅞ | 4⅞ | 2⅝ | 3½ | 3⅛ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 5¼ | 2¾ | 3½ | 4⅛ | 4⅛ | 2⅝ | 3½ | 2¾ | | Copy, or Bastard. _W._ | 5 | 2⅝ | 3⅜ | 4 | 4 | 2½ | 3⅜ | 2⅝ | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 5 | 2¼ | 3⅜ | 3½ | 3½ | 2½ | 3⅜ | 2¼ | | Demy. _W._ | 5 | 2½ | 3¼ | 3⅞ | 3⅞ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Crown. _D._ | 5 | 2½ | 3¼ | 3¾ | 3¾ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Single Crown. _P._ | 5 | 2½ | 3¼ | 3¾ | 3¾ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 4⅞ | 2½ | 3¼ | 3¾ | 3¾ | 2⅜ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 4¾ | 2¼ | 2⅞ | 3⅜ | 3⅜ | 2⅛ | 2⅞ | 2¼ | | Foolscap. _W._ | 4⅛ | 2¼ | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 3⅜ | 2 | 2¾ | 2¼ | | Foolscap. _D._ | 4⅛ | 2⅛ | 2⅜ | 3¼ | 3¼ | 2 | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Small Post. _W._ | 4⅛ | 2¼ | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 3⅜ | 2 | 2¾ | 2¼ | | Pott. _W._ | 3⅞ | 2 | 2½ | 3⅛ | 3⅛ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 2 | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+---------------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+ | | 40mo. | 48mo. | 64mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 6⅞ | 6¼ | 9⅛ | 3⅞ | 6⅞ | 3⅞ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._ } | 5 | 5¼ | 6⅝ | 3¼ | 5 | 3¼ | | Double Demy. _P._ | 4¾ | 5⅛ | 6⅜ | 3¼ | 4¾ | 3¼ | | Columbier. _D._ | 4¼ | 4⅝ | 5¾ | 2⅞ | 4¼ | 2⅞ | | Atlas. _D._ | 4¼ | 5¼ | 5⅝ | 3¼ | 4¼ | 3¼ | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 3⅞ | 5 | 5⅛ | 3⅛ | 3⅞ | 3⅛ | | Imperial. _D._ | 3¾ | 4⅜ | 5 | 2¾ | 3¾ | 2¾ | | Imperial. _W._ | 3¾ | 4⅜ | 5 | 2¾ | 3¾ | 2¾ | | Double Crown. _P._ | 3¾ | 4 | 5 | 2½ | 3¾ | 2½ | | Elephant. _D._ | 3½ | 4½ | 4⅝ | 2⅞ | 3½ | 2⅞ | | Super Royal. _D._ | 3⅜ | 3¾ | 4¼ | 2⅜ | 3⅜ | 2⅜ | | |Super Royal. _W._ | 3⅜ | 3¾ | 4¼ | 2⅜ | 3⅜ | 2⅜ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 3⅜ | 3½ | 4½ | 2¼ | 3⅜ | 2¼ | | Royal. _P._ | 3¼ | 4 | 4¼ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Double Pott. _P._ | 3⅛ | 3⅜ | 4¼ | 2⅛ | 3⅛ | 2⅛ | | Royal. _P._ | 3 | 3⅞ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 3 | 3⅞ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Royal. _D._ | 3 | 3¾ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Royal. _W._ | 3 | 3¾ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Medium. _P._ | 2⅞ | 3½ | 3¾ | 2¼ | 2⅞ | 2¼ | | Medium. _W._ | 2¾ | 3½ | 3¾ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Demy. _P._ | 2¾ | 3½ | 3⅝ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Demy. _D._ | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 3⅝ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Demy. _P._ | 2⅝ | 3¾ | 3½ | 2⅜ | 2⅝ | 2⅜ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 2⅝ | 3¼ | 3½ | 2 | 2⅝ | 2 | | Copy, or Bastard. _W._ | 2½ | 3⅛ | 3⅜ | 2 | 2½ | 2 | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 2½ | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 1¾ | 2½ | 1¾ | | Demy. _W._ | 2½ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Crown. _D._ | 2½ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Single Crown. _P._ | 2½ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Thick and Thin Post. _W._ | 2⅜ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2⅜ | 1⅞ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 2⅛ | 2⅝ | 2⅞ | 1⅝ | 2⅛ | 1⅝ | | Foolscap. _W._ | 2 | 2⅝ | 2¾ | 1⅝ | 2 | 1⅝ | | Foolscap. _D._ | 2 | 2⅝ | 2¾ | 1⅝ | 2 | 1⅝ | | Small Post. _W._ | 2 | 2⅝ | 2¾ | 1⅝ | 2 | 1⅝ | | Pott. _W._ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 2½ | 1½ | 1⅞ | 1½ | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+---------------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+ | | 72mo. | 96mo. | 128mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. _D._ | 5¼ | 4½ | 5¼ | 3⅜ | 3⅞ | 3⅜ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. _D._ } | 4⅜ | 3¼ | 4⅜ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Double Demy. _P._ | 4¼ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 2⅜ | 3¼ | 2⅜ | | Columbier. _D._ | 3⅞ | 2⅞ | 3⅞ | 2⅛ | 2⅞ | 2⅛ | | Atlas. _D._ | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 4⅜ | 2⅛ | 3¼ | 2⅛ | | Atlas, Small. _D._ | 4⅛ | 2½ | 4⅛ | 1⅞ | 3⅛ | 1⅞ | | Imperial. _D._ | 3⅝ | 2½ | 3⅝ | 1⅞ | 2¾ | 1⅞ | | Imperial. _W._ | 3⅝ | 2½ | 3⅝ | 1⅞ | 2¾ | 1⅞ | | Double Crown. _P._ | 3¼ | 2½ | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Elephant. _D._ | 3¾ | 2¼ | 3¾ | 1¾ | 2⅞ | 1¾ | | Super Royal. _D._ | 3⅛ | 2¼ | 3⅛ | 1⅝ | 2⅜ | 1⅝ | | Super Royal. _W._ | 3⅛ | 2¼ | 3⅛ | 1⅝ | 2⅜ | 1⅝ | | Royal, Long. _D._ | 3 | 2¼ | 3 | 1⅝ | 2¼ | 1⅝ | | Royal. _P._ | 3¼ | 2⅛ | 3¼ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1⅝ | | Double Pott. _P._ | 2¾ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 1½ | 2⅛ | 1½ | | Royal. _P._ | 3¼ | 2 | 3¼ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Royal, Inferior. _P._ | 3¼ | 2 | 3¼ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Royal. _D._ | 3⅛ | 2 | 3⅛ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Royal. _W._ | 3⅛ | 2 | 3⅛ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Medium. _P._ | 3 | 1⅞ | 3 | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1⅜ | | Medium. _W._ | 2⅞ | 1⅞ | 2⅞ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | | Demy. _P._ | 2⅞ | 1¾ | 2⅞ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | | Demy. _D._ | 2¾ | 1¾ | 2¾ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | | Demy. _P._ | 3⅛ | 1¾ | 3⅛ | 1¼ | 2⅜ | 1¼ | | Extra Large Post. _W._ | 2¾ | 1¾ | 2¾ | 1¼ | 2 | 1¼ | | Copy, or Bastard. _W._ | 2⅝ | 1⅝ | 2⅝ | 1¼ | 2 | 1¼ | | Demy, Short. _D._ | 2¼ | 1⅝ | 2¼ | 1¼ | 1¾ | 1¼ | | Demy. _W._ | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1¼ | 1⅞ | 1¼ | | Crown. _D._ | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1¼ | 1⅞ | 1¼ | | Single Crown. _P._ | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1¼ | 1⅞ | 1¼ | | Thick and Thin Post. _W._ | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1⅛ | 1⅞ | 1⅛ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 2¼ | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Foolscap. _W._ | 2¼ | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Foolscap. _D._ | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Small Post. _W._ | 2¼ | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Pott. _W._ | 2 | 1¼ | 2 | ⅞ | 1½ | ⅞ | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

_See_ FORGERY. INDIA PAPER. PLATE PAPER.

10 Geo. 2. c. 27. s. 4. _Drawbacks._--“And whereas the Drawbacks allowed upon the Exportation of foreign Paper tend to the great Discouragement of the Manufacture of Paper within the Kingdom of _Great Britain_; Be it therefore enacted, by the Authority aforesaid, That from and after the twenty-fourth Day of _June_ One thousand seven hundred and thirty-seven, there shall not be allowed or made on the Re-exportation of any foreign Paper any Drawback or Repayment of any of the Customs or Duties charged and paid on the Importation thereof into this Kingdom, by any Act or Acts of Parliament; any Law, Custom, or Usage to the contrary thereof in anywise notwithstanding.”

2 & 3 Vict. c. 23. “An Act to consolidate and amend the Laws for collecting and securing the Duties of Excise on Paper made in the United Kingdom.

“Whereas the Laws for collecting and securing the Duties of Excise on Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, have become numerous and complicated, and it is expedient to consolidate and amend the same; Be it therefore enacted, by the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons, in this present Parliament assembled, and by the Authority of the same, That there shall be raised, levied, and collected, allowed, granted, and paid, the Duties, Allowances, and Drawbacks of Excise following; (that is to say,)

_Duties._--“On every Pound Weight Avoirdupois of all Paper, Glazed Paper, Sheathing Paper, Button Paper, or by whatsoever Name any Paper may be known, and on all Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board made in the United Kingdom, a Duty of One Penny Halfpenny:

_Allowances._--“For all such Glazed or other Press Papers, made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom, for Clothiers and Hotpressers, as shall be actually and _bonâ fide_ used, employed, and consumed in the pressing Woollen Cloths and Stuffs in the United Kingdom, an Allowance of One Penny Halfpenny the Pound Avoirdupois:

“For all Paper made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom which shall be used in the printing of any Books in the Latin, Greek, Oriental, or Northern Languages within the Universities of _Oxford_ and _Cambridge_, or within the Universities of _Scotland_, or the College of the Holy and Undivided Trinity of Queen _Elizabeth_, _Dublin_, by Permission of the Vice Chancellors, Rectors, or Principals or Provost of the said Universities respectively, or which shall be used in the printing of Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, Books of Common Prayer of the Church of _England_, the Book commonly called or known in _Scotland_ by the Name of ‘The Confession of Faith,’ or the Larger or Shorter Catechism of the Church of _Scotland_, within the Universities of _Oxford_ and _Cambridge_, and _Trinity College, Dublin_, by Permission of the Vice Chancellors or Provost of the same, or by the Queen’s Printers in _England_, _Scotland_, and _Ireland_ respectively, an Allowance of One Penny Halfpenny the Pound Avoirdupois:

“For every Pound Weight Avoirdupois of all Paper, Sheathing Paper, Button Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom, and which shall be duly exported as Merchandize, a Drawback of One Penny Halfpenny:

“For every Pound Weight Avoirdupois of printed Books in perfect and complete Sets, or, if periodical Publications, in perfect Parts or Numbers, and of blank, plain, or ruled Account Books, whether bound or unbound, made of or printed or ruled on Paper made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom, and which shall be exported as Merchandize, a Drawback of One Penny Halfpenny:

“For every Dozen Square Yards of Paper made and charged with Duty, and printed, painted, or stained, in the United Kingdom, and exported as Merchandize, a Drawback of Two-pence.”

_Stamps._--s. 8. “And be it enacted, That the Commissioners of Excise shall and they are hereby required to provide or cause to be provided proper Stamps, with such Marks and Devices thereon as they shall see fit for marking or stamping all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, to denote the Duty being charged thereon, when made and tied up in the Manner herein-after directed, and shall cause such Stamps to be delivered to the Officers of Excise for that Purpose; and it shall be lawful for the said Commissioners of Excise to cause the said Stamps, or the Marks and Devices thereon, to be altered or varied as they shall from Time to Time see fit.

_Labels._--s. 9. “And be it enacted, That the Commissioners of Excise shall and they are hereby required to provide, and from Time to Time to cause to be issued to every Supervisor of Excise in whose District any Paper Mill shall be situated, or in which any Maker of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall carry on his Manufacture, a sufficient Number of Labels, of such Form and Construction and with such Devices thereon as the said Commissioners shall deem fit and proper, to be used in the tying up of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, as herein-after by this Act directed; and every such Paper Maker shall, on his Request in Writing given to the proper Officer of Excise, specifying therein the Number of Labels which such Maker may require, be within Four Days after the Receipt of such Request supplied by such Officer with the Number of Labels required, each Label being signed by the Supervisor of the District for the Time being, and marked by such Supervisor with the Number or Letter or Number and Letter by which the Mill of such Paper Maker is then distinguished in the Books of the Excise; and every such Paper Maker, or his chief Workman or Servant, shall, at the Time of the Delivery of such Labels, give on the Back of the Request Note requiring the same a Receipt in Writing, signed by him, for the said Number of Labels delivered to him by the Officer of Excise; and all such Labels shall at all Times, when demanded by any Supervisor of Excise, or other Officer of Excise of equal or superior Rank, be delivered to the Supervisor or other such Officer demanding the same; and every Paper Maker who shall, by himself or his chief Workman or Servant, refuse to give such Receipt as aforesaid for the Labels delivered to him, or who shall destroy, cancel, or obliterate any such Label, or shall sell or dispose of or use any such Label for any other Purpose than in tying up Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board as herein-after directed, or shall suffer the same to be done, or who shall refuse to produce or deliver to any Supervisor or other such Officer as aforesaid demanding the same any such Label or Labels, or shall not satisfactorily account for any Label which shall be at any Time missing, shall forfeit for every Label so delivered to him, and for which a Receipt shall not be given, or which shall be cancelled, obliterated, or destroyed, sold or disposed of, or improperly used or not produced or accounted for, Ten Pounds.

s. 10. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker shall cause all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board made by him to be made up into Reams or Half Reams or Parcels, and shall also cause every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel to be enclosed in a Wrapper or Wrappers, on or to which Wrappers, or One of them if Two are made use of, One of the Labels herein-before directed to be provided and delivered to Paper Makers shall have been previously firmly and permanently fixed and united with Paste or Glue or other binding Cement, and pressed and dried thereon, and which Label, when such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel is tied up, shall be on the Top thereof, or on such other Part of the Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct; and every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel shall, as soon as made up and enclosed in the Wrapper or Wrappers, be immediately firmly and securely tied up with strong Thread or String; and when and so soon as any Ream or Half Ream or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, shall be tied up in manner aforesaid, the Maker thereof shall write or print, in large and legible Letters, with durable Ink, on the Label affixed on the Top thereof as aforesaid, the Description or Denomination and the Contents of such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, whether Paper, Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, or Button-paper, or Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board; and every Paper Maker who shall neglect or refuse to enclose and tie up any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, in a Wrapper or Wrappers, to which, or to One of which Wrappers, One of such Labels shall have been affixed according to the Directions herein-before given, or immediately to write or print in manner aforesaid the Particulars required to be written or printed on the Label affixed on each Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, shall forfeit Ten Pounds for every Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel not enclosed and tied up according to the Directions aforesaid, or not having written or printed in manner aforesaid on the Label affixed to the Wrapper the Particulars herein-before required to be written or printed thereon, and every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel shall also be forfeited.

s. 11. “And be it enacted, That a Ream of Paper, other than Glazed-paper, Sheathing or Button Paper, shall consist of Twenty Quires, each Quire containing Twenty-four Sheets, or Forty Half Quires, each Half Quire being Twelve Sheets; and a Half Ream of Paper shall consist of Ten Quires, or Twenty Half Quires, save and except the Ream or Half Ream of Paper for printing, which may consist of any Number of Sheets not exceeding Five hundred and sixteen Sheets the Ream, or Two hundred and fifty-eight Sheets the Half Ream, and save and except the outside Quires of any Ream of Paper, which may consist of any Number of Sheets not less than Twenty nor more than Twenty-four; and a Parcel of Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, Button-paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall consist of even Dozens of Sheets of one and the same Denomination or Description, and of equal Dimensions, and not less than Twenty-four nor more than Seventy-two such Sheets in each Parcel; and all Paper, Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, Button-paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board which shall be made up or tied up in any other Quantities than as aforesaid shall be forfeited.

s. 12. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That if from the Size of the Sheets, or from any other Cause, it shall be necessary for any Paper Maker to make and tie up any Paper, other than Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, or Button-paper, in any less Quantities than a Ream or Half Ream, it shall be lawful for such Paper Maker to make and tie up such Paper in Parcels containing a less Number of Sheets than a Ream or Half Ream, provided that he write and specify on the Label attached to the Wrapper of such Parcel the true Number of Sheets of Paper contained therein: Provided always, that no Paper shall be made up into any such Parcel or into any Half Ream weighing less than Twenty Pounds.

s. 13. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for any Paper Maker, before tying up any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board into Reams, Half Reams, or Parcels, to cut the Edges thereof, and also for any Paper Maker to make his Paper into Quires without folding the same, such Quires, when made up into Reams or Half Reams, being separated by a Slip of coloured Paper.

s. 14. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker shall, at the Time when any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board is tied up as herein-before directed, or at or before the Time when the same is or shall be produced to be weighed and charged with Duty by the Officer of Excise, write on the Label on every such Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel respectively the Weight thereof in large and legible Letters, and in Words at Length, joining to the Words expressing the Weight the Letters “lbs.,” or the Word “Pounds,” on pain of forfeiting for every Omission or Neglect the Sum of Ten Pounds, and the Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board.”

s. 17. “And whereas it is expedient to make Provision for Paper being tied up and charged with Duty, and sent out in single Sheets on the Rollers on which the same may be rolled or received from the Machine, without cutting or making the same up into Reams; be it enacted, That every Paper Maker who shall intend so to send out any Paper shall, before using any Roller or Rollers, mark the true Weight of every such Roller in legible Letters or Numbers on the End thereof, and shall continue the same so marked, and shall upon each Occasion of using the same produce every such Roller so marked to the Officer of Excise surveying his Mill, who shall ascertain that such Weight is correctly marked, and shall sign his Name or Initials under such Mark; and every such Paper Maker shall cause all such Paper, as soon as received from the Machine, to be tied up, as herein-before directed, in a Wrapper or Wrappers, on or to which, or One of them, a Label has been firmly and permanently fixed and united, but in such Manner that the End of the Roller having the Weight thereof marked thereon shall be open and visible to the Officer of Excise, and shall write upon such Label all the Particulars herein-before required to be written by the Paper Maker on the Label; and it shall be lawful for the Officer of Excise weighing and charging with Duty any such Paper, and he is hereby empowered and required, to deduct and allow from the Weight thereof the even Pounds (Fractions of a Pound being disregarded) marked on the End of the Roller on which each Parcel of such Paper shall be rolled, and the Remainder shall be taken as the Weight of the Paper on which the Duty shall be charged: Provided always, that no such Deduction or Allowance shall be made in the Case of any Paper which shall be produced to the Officer of Excise in any Parcel not having the End of the Roller open and visible to the Officer of Excise, or rolled on any Roller which shall not have the true Weight legibly and clearly marked on the End thereof as herein-before directed.”

s. 24. “And be enacted, That every Paper Maker who, after any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been so made and tied up, and the Particulars herein-before required written or printed on the Label on the Wrapper thereof, shall, either before or after such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been weighed and charged with Duty by the Officer of Excise, make any false Entry on the Label affixed on the Cover or Wrapper of any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or deface, obliterate, extract, or fraudulently alter any of the Particulars written or printed by such Paper Maker, or by the Officer of Excise, or shall take off, remove, or detach, or cause or permit or suffer to be taken off or removed or detached, any such Label from the Cover or Wrapper of any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, made and tied up under the Directions of this Act, or who shall use any Label, or any Wrapper to which any Label is affixed, to cover or tie up any other Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board than that contained in such Wrapper, with such Label when first tied up, or who shall, after any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been weighed and charged with Duty, open any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, and remove any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board out of the Wrapper or Wrappers in which the same shall have been so weighed and charged, or who shall add any other Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board thereto, or shall in any respect make any Alteration in any such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, shall for every such Label, Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel respectively in respect of which any such Offence shall be committed forfeit Twenty Pounds, and every such Label and Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel, with the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board contained therein, shall also be forfeited.”

s. 26. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker who shall sell, send out, deliver, or remove any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board without the same being tied up in a Wrapper or Wrappers on which, or on the uppermost of which, One of such Labels as is by this Act required shall have been permanently affixed, or not having written or printed on the Label affixed to the Wrapper all the Particulars by this Act required to be written and printed on such Label, shall, in respect of every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel so sold, sent out, delivered, or removed, forfeit Twenty Pounds, and every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel which shall be found in the Possession of any Person not having such Label, with the Particulars aforesaid thereon, shall also be forfeited.

s. 27. “And be it enacted, That if any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall at any Time, on being weighed by any Officer of Excise, either at the Mill where manufactured or elsewhere, be found to weigh under or over the Weight marked, written, or printed on such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel by the Maker thereof as herein-before required, in the Proportion of Five _per Centum_ if the Weight marked on such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel exceed Twenty Pounds, or Ten _per Centum_ if such Weight be Twenty Pounds or less, the same shall be forfeited.”

s. 37. “And be it enacted, That no Stationer or Printer or Paper Stainer, or Maker of Paste-board not a Maker of Paper, shall receive into his Custody or Possession, nor shall any other Person remove or receive from any Mill, any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board which shall not be an entire Ream or Half Ream or Parcel, enclosed in a Wrapper or Wrappers having a Label thereon, with such Particulars as are herein-before required written thereon, together with the Impressions of the Officer’s Stamp denoting the Charge of Duty, on pain of forfeiting One hundred Pounds; and all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board so received, and all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board which shall be found in the Custody or Possession of any Stationer or Printer or Paper Stainer, or Maker of Paste-board not a Maker of Paper, (not being broken Reams, or Parcels for immediate Sale, Use, or Consumption,) without being enclosed in a Wrapper so labelled, and with such Impressions of the Duty Stamp thereon as aforesaid, shall be forfeited, and the Stationer or Printer or Paper Stainer or Maker of Paste-board in whose Possession the same shall be found shall forfeit Fifty Pounds: Provided always, that nothing herein contained shall extend to subject any Stationer to the said first-mentioned Penalty for or by reason of his obtaining or receiving from any other Stationer any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board in less Quantity than a Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel for immediate Use.

s. 38. “And be it enacted, That every Person shall, on opening any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board received into their Possession, immediately write in large Letters in Ink upon the Label attached to the Wrapper the Word “Opened,” or shall across such Label with Ink or otherwise permanently cancel, obliterate, and deface the same, so as to prevent the said Label from being again made use of by any Paper Maker; and every Person who shall not, on opening any such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel as aforesaid, immediately so write on or cross or otherwise cancel, obliterate, or deface such Label, or in whose Possession any such Label, whether attached or not to any Wrapper which shall have been opened, shall be found not so written upon, crossed, or otherwise cancelled, shall forfeit for each such Label Ten Pounds, and every such Label, with any Wrapper to which the same may be attached, shall also be forfeited.

s. 39. “And be it enacted, That every Person who shall restore, return, send, or deliver, or cause or procure, permit or suffer, to be restored, returned, sent, or delivered, to any Paper Maker, or to any Mill, Warehouse, Room, or Place, belonging to any Paper Maker, or to any other Place for the Use of any Paper Maker, any Wrapper or Label which has been before used as a Wrapper or Label in tying up any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or which shall be marked and stamped with the Marks, Stamps, or Impressions directed by this Act to be marked and stamped on the Labels attached to and the Wrappers enclosing any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, and every Paper Maker who shall receive, or shall cause, procure, permit, or suffer to be returned, sent, or delivered to him, or to be kept or deposited at any Mill, Warehouse, Room, or Place belonging to him, or at any other Place for his Use, or who shall have in his Custody or Possession, any Wrapper or Label which has been before used as a Wrapper or Label to any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or in or with which any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board has been removed, carried, or sent out by any Paper Maker, shall forfeit Two hundred Pounds; and every Workman and Servant of any Paper Maker in whose Custody or Possession any such Wrapper or Label shall be found shall also forfeit Fifty Pounds, over and above any Penalty to which the Paper Maker may thereby become subject.

s. 40. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That nothing herein-before contained shall extend or be deemed or construed to extend to render liable to the said Penalty of Two hundred Pounds any Person for or by reason of such Person returning or sending back to any Paper Maker any Wrapper, with the Label thereon, which shall have been opened, containing therein the same identical Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board received by such Person, and by him returned on account of the same being disliked or refused, nor to render liable to the said Penalty any Paper Maker for receiving back the said Label and Wrapper containing such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board.

s. 41. “And be it enacted, That every Stationer or other Person who shall have bought, received, or agreed for any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board respectively which may be forfeited or liable to Seizure under this or any other Act relating to the Revenue of Excise, and who shall discover to and inform any Officer of Excise thereof, so as to cause the Seizure of the same, shall, on the Condemnation of the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board so seized by the Officer, be paid, by Order of the Commissioners of Excise, the Value of all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board which shall be so seized and condemned, and for which such Stationer or other Person shall have actually paid or be liable to pay and shall pay, and such Payment shall be deemed a Part of the Expences attending the Seizure.

s. 42. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker and other Person who shall counterfeit, forge, or imitate, or cause or procure to be counterfeited, forged, or imitated, any Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, or any Figure, Letter, or Part of any Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, directed to be provided and used in pursuance of this Act, or which shall have been provided in pursuance of any other Act in force for securing the Duties on Paper at the passing of this Act; or shall have in his Custody or Possession any such counterfeit, forged, or false Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, or any counterfeit, forged, or false Figure, Letter, or Part of any such Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, knowing the same to be counterfeit, forged, or false; or who shall, upon any Wrapper used or to be used for tying up any Quantity of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or upon any such Label as aforesaid, counterfeit, forge, or imitate, or cause or procure to be counterfeited, forged, or imitated, the Mark or Impression of any such Stamp, Die, or Device, or of any Figure, Letter, Character, or Part of such Stamp, Die, or Device, or shall knowingly have the same in his Custody or Possession; or who shall have in his Custody or Possession, or utter, vend, or sell, any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board with a counterfeited, forged, false, or imitated Mark or Impression of any such Stamp, Die, or Device, or any Figure, Letter, Character, or Part thereof, on the Wrapper of such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or on the Label affixed thereto or thereon, or with any false, counterfeit, or forged Label aforesaid, or any false, counterfeit, or forged Figure, Letter, Character, or Part of such Label as aforesaid, or with any false, counterfeited, or forged Printing or Writing on any such Label, knowing the same or any Part thereof to be counterfeited or forged; or who shall upon any Quantity of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board put or place any Wrapper or Part of any Wrapper, or any Label or Part of any Label, having thereon or therein any false, counterfeit, or forged Writing, Printing, Letter, Figure, Character, Mark, or Impression, knowing the same to be false, counterfeited, and forged; or who shall, upon any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board not taken account of and charged with Duty by the proper Officer of Excise put or place any of the Stamps or Impressions directed by or provided or used in pursuance of this Act or any such other Acts as aforesaid; shall for every such false, counterfeit, or forged Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, or Figure, Letter, Character, or Part of such Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, forfeit and lose the Sum of One thousand Pounds, and for every such Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel respectively the Sum of Five hundred Pounds; and every such false, counterfeited, and forged Stamp, Die, Device, and Label, Figure, Letter, Character, and Part of such Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, and every such false, counterfeit, and forged Impression, and every such Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel respectively, shall be forfeited.

s. 43. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker, Stationer, or other Person who shall alter the distinguishing Letter or Number of any Mill on the Label attached to the Wrapper of any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, save and except in the Case of Paper sent from one Mill to another, or returned to any Mill, under the Provisions herein-before contained, or who shall alter the Weight inserted on any such Label, shall forfeit Twenty Pounds, together with the Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel to which such Label shall be attached.

s. 44. “And be it enacted, That the Allowance of the Duty on Paper used in the printing of Books in the Latin, Greek, Oriental, or Northern Languages within the Universities of _Oxford_ and _Cambridge_, the Universities of _Scotland_, and the University of _Trinity College, Dublin_, shall be made and allowed in manner following; (that is to say,) the chief Manager of the Press in the said Universities respectively shall, Forty-eight Hours before any such Paper shall be begun to be printed, give to the proper Officer of Excise a Notice in Writing of the Intention to print such Paper, specifying the Number of Reams of Paper and the Title of the Book intended to be printed, and of how many Copies the Edition is to consist; and upon the Attendance of the Officer of Excise all such Paper shall be produced to him enclosed in the original Wrappers in which the same was charged with Duty, with the respective Labels thereon, and the several Matters herein-before prescribed to be marked, written, or printed and stamped on such Labels and Wrappers remaining thereon; and such chief Manager of the Press shall provide sufficient Scales and Weights, and shall permit and assist such Officer to use the same, and to ascertain the Weight of such Paper; and within One Month after the whole of such Edition shall have been printed off such chief Manager shall give to the proper Officer of Excise Forty-eight Hours Notice in Writing, specifying a Day and Hour when such Edition will be ready to be produced to him, and thereupon such Officer shall attend and examine and weigh the whole of such Edition unbound and in Sheets, and thereupon give to such chief Manager a Certificate of his having so done, specifying the Name of the Book, the Size thereof, the Number of Copies of which the Edition consists, and the Weight of the Paper on which it is printed; but if such Weight shall exceed the Weight of the Paper taken account of by the Officer previous to the Printing, such last-mentioned Weight shall be inserted in the Certificate, and the Allowance shall be made for no more.

s. 45. “And be it enacted, That the Chief Manager of the Press in the said Universities respectively shall make and subscribe at the Foot or on the Back of such Certificate as aforesaid, before the Vice Chancellor, Principal, or Rector or Provost of the University respectively, a Declaration in Writing setting forth that the whole of the Edition of the Book so printed was and is printed for the University for which the same expresses to be printed, and that no Bookseller or other Person had or hath any Share or Interest therein, or in the Allowance payable in respect of the Paper on which the same was or is printed.

s. 46. “And be it enacted, That the Allowance of the Duty on Paper used in the Universities of _Oxford_ and _Cambridge_, and in the University of _Trinity College, Dublin_, or used by the Queen’s Printers in _England_, _Scotland_, or _Ireland_ respectively, in the printing of Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, Books of Common Prayer of the Church of _England_, the Book commonly known in _Scotland_ by the Name of ‘The Confession of Faith,’ or the Larger or Shorter Catechism of the Church of _Scotland_, shall be made and allowed in manner following; (that is to say,) the chief Manager of the Press of such Universities respectively, or such Queen’s Printers respectively, shall, Forty-eight Hours before any such Paper is begun to be prepared for printing, give to the proper Officer of Excise a Notice in Writing of the Intention to print such Paper, specifying in such Notice the Number of Reams of Paper so intended to be printed, and whether the same is to be printed for Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, Common Prayer Books, Books of Confession of Faith, or the Larger or Shorter Catechism, of what Size the intended Impression or Edition of such Book is to be, and of how many Copies the same is to consist; and all the Paper intended to be used shall, on the Attendance of the Officer of Excise, be produced to him enclosed in the original Wrappers in which the same was charged with Duty, with the respective Labels thereon, and the several Matters herein-before prescribed to be marked, written, or printed and stamped on such Labels and Wrappers remaining thereon; and such chief Managers and Queen’s Printers respectively shall provide good and sufficient Scales and Weights, and shall permit and assist the Officer of Excise to use the same, and to ascertain and take an Account of the true Quantity and Weight of such Paper; and such chief Managers of the Press and such Queen’s Printers respectively shall, within One Month after the whole of such Impression or Edition shall have been printed off and finished, give to the proper Officer of Excise Forty-eight Hours Notice thereof in Writing, specifying a Day and Hour when such Impression or Edition will be ready to be produced to him, and thereupon such Officer of Excise shall attend, and inspect, examine, and weigh the whole of such Edition unbound and in Sheets, and shall thereupon give and deliver to such chief Manager of the Press or Queen’s Printer, as the Case may be, a Certificate in Writing of his having so done, specifying therein the Name of the Book, together with the Size thereof, and the Number of Copies of which such Impression or Edition consists, and the Weight of the Paper on which the same is printed; but if such Weight shall exceed the Weight of the Paper actually produced to and taken account of by the Officer of Excise previous to the printing thereof as aforesaid, then and in such Case such last mentioned Weight shall be inserted in such Certificate, and the Allowance shall be made for no greater Weight than the Weight specified in such Certificate.

s. 47. “And be it enacted, That the chief Manager of the Press in the said Universities respectively shall make and subscribe, at the Foot or on the Back of such Certificate, before the Vice Chancellor or Provost of the University, a Declaration in Writing setting forth that no Drawback or Allowance has been before granted or paid on such Paper, and that the whole of the Edition of such Book so printed is printed for the University for which the same expresses to be printed, and that no Bookseller or other Person had or hath any Share or Interest therein, or in the Allowance payable in respect of the Paper on which the same is printed; and the Queen’s Printers in _England_, _Scotland_, and _Ireland_ respectively, or the acting Patentee in such Office, shall make and subscribe, at the Foot or on the Back of such Certificate, before the Commissioners of Excise, or such Person as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct and appoint to receive the same, a Declaration in Writing setting forth that no Drawback or Allowance has been before claimed or paid for or in respect of the Paper mentioned in such Certificate, or any Part thereof, and that the whole of such Impression or Edition of such Bible, Testament, Psalm Book, Book of Common Prayer, Confession of Faith, or Larger or Shorter Catechism, has been printed by him or them at his or their usual and ordinary Printing House, on his or their own Account, under and by virtue of the exclusive Patent or Privilege belonging to him or them as such Queen’s Printer, and for his or their sole and entire Benefit, Profit, Emolument, and Advantage.

s. 48. “And be it enacted, That on the said Certificates respectively, with such Declaration as aforesaid made and subscribed thereon, being produced to the Commissioners of Excise, the said Commissioners shall and they are hereby required, on being satisfied of the Correctness thereof, to cause Payment of the Amount of the Allowance appearing by such Certificate to be due to be made to the chief Manager of the Press of the said Universities respectively, or to such Person as the Vice Chancellor, Principal, or Rector or Provost of the said Universities respectively shall appoint to receive the same, or to such Queen’s Printer by whom or on whose Behalf such Certificate shall be produced, as the Case may be.

s. 49. “And be it enacted, That no such Allowance shall be granted or paid on any Book in the Latin, Greek, or Oriental or Northern Languages, unless such Book shall be wholly printed in the Latin, Greek, Oriental or Northern Languages, as the Case may be: Provided always, that it shall be lawful for the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, if they shall see fit, to direct such Allowance to be made and granted on any Book partly in the Latin, Greek, or Oriental or Northern Languages, and partly in the English or any other Language.

s. 50. “And be it enacted, That every House, Office, or Place heretofore approved of or which may hereafter be approved of by the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, in which the Queen’s Printers in _England_, _Scotland_, and _Ireland_ respectively shall have printed or may hereafter print, by themselves or their own _bonâ fide_ Agents, and not by others, and for their own sole and undivided Interest, the whole of any Impression or Edition of any Bible, Testament, Psalm Book, Book of Common Prayer, Confession of Faith, or Larger or Shorter Catechism, shall be deemed and taken to be an ordinary and usual Printing House of such Queen’s Printer within the Meaning of this Act for entitling such Queen’s Printer to the Allowances aforesaid.”

s. 52. “And be it enacted, That every Person intending to export any Paper, or any Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, as Merchandize, and to obtain the Drawback thereon, shall give Twelve Hours Notice of his Intention to the Officer of Excise who shall be appointed by the Commissioners of Excise for that Purpose, specifying in such Notice the Time and Place when and where and the Person on whose Account such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, is or are intended to be packed; and such Notice having been given, an Officer of Excise shall attend at the Time and Place specified, and all the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, intended to be exported, shall be produced to him, and in the Case of Paper (except Paper printed, painted, or stained, or out and gilded, as herein-after mentioned), Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, the same shall be produced in the original Wrappers in which the same was charged with Duty, with the Labels, having printed or written, marked and stamped thereon, the several Particulars required by this Act; and such Officer shall examine the same, and shall cancel, obliterate, or destroy every such Label, and the Impressions of the Duty Stamp on each Ream, Half Beam, or Parcel; and such Officer shall weigh and take an Account of all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, as shall be produced to him, or, in the Case of Paper printed, painted, or stained, shall measure and take an Account of the Number of Square Yards thereof; and all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, shall be packed in the Presence of the Officer of Excise, and the Packages containing the same shall be marked with the true Weight thereof in the Presence of such Officer, and shall be secured with such Fastenings, and sealed with such Seals or Marks, by such Officer, as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct; and every such Officer shall make out an Account of the Quantities and Kinds and Weight, or, in the Case of Paper printed, painted, or stained, of the Number of Square Yards, of all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, as shall be produced to him and be packed in his Presence, and shall make a Return thereof to the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as Export Officer, at the Port of Exportation: Provided always, that if the Person giving such Packing Notice shall not begin and proceed to pack up all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, at the Time mentioned therein, such Notice shall be null and void, and a like fresh Notice shall be required before the packing up the same or any Part thereof.

s. 53. “And be it enacted, That if any Person shall put or place any heavy Substance, or other Matter than Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, except the Materials necessarily used in packing the same, in any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package containing Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, packing or packed for Exportation, or shall pack in any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package any other Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, or other Substance or Article, (except as aforesaid,) than the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, produced to the Officer as to be packed and exported, or shall, by any Art, Contrivance, or Device, prevent, hinder, or deceive any Officer of Excise from or in taking a true Account of the Kind or Weight (or, in the Case of Paper printed, painted, or stained, the Measure) of the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, packed or produced to be packed, such Person shall forfeit Two hundred Pounds, and every such Cask, Box, Chest, or Package, with the Contents thereof, shall be forfeited.

s. 54. “And be it enacted, That every Person who shall open any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package containing Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, which shall have been packed for Exportation, or shall wilfully destroy or deface any Seal or Mark of the Officer placed thereon, or damage any of the Fastenings thereof, and every Person who shall cut out, erase, obliterate, alter, or damage any Figure, Letter, or Mark cut, written, painted, branded, or made on any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package containing Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, for Exportation, expressing or denoting the Weight of such Cask, Box, Chest, or Package, or the Weight of the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, therein, or the Number thereof, shall forfeit One hundred Pounds, and every such Cask, Box, Chest, or Package, with the Contents thereof, shall be forfeited, and may be seized by any Officer of Excise or Customs.

s. 55. “And be it enacted, That every Person intending to export any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, on Drawback, shall, by himself or his Agent, give to the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as such, at the Port of Exportation, a Notice in Writing of his Intention to ship such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, Six Hours at least before such Shipment shall be made, in which Notice shall be specified the Number of Packages to be shipped, with the respective Marks and Numbers thereon, and the Quantity, Weight, and Kinds of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, in each Package, with the Amount of the Drawback claimed thereon, and the Value of the same for Home Consumption, and shall also specify the Quay or Place where the Packages are then lying, and from which the same are to be shipped, and the Time of Shipment, with the Name of the Ship and the Master thereof, and the Place or Port to which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, is or are to be exported; and the Person so intending to export such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, shall also, by himself or his Agent, make a Declaration before the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as such as aforesaid, that such Packages, and the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, contained therein, are the same described and set forth in the Account or Certificate of the Packing Officer, and that to the best of his Knowledge and Belief the full Duties of Excise have been charged and secured on such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or on the Paper on which such Books shall have been printed or ruled, and shall also give Bond, with One or more sufficient Surety or Sureties, to be approved of by the Officer appointed by the Commissioners of Excise to take such Bond, in Double the Value of the Drawback, conditioned that such Packages, with the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books therein, shall with all convenient Speed be shipped and exported, and shall not be unpacked in any Port or Harbour of the United Kingdom, nor unloaded, unshipped, or relanded, or put on board any other Ship or Vessel, in any Part of the United Kingdom, Shipwreck or other unavoidable Accident excepted; and such Notice having been given and such Declaration made as aforesaid, and such Security entered into, the Officer of Excise receiving the same shall write his Name upon the said Shipping Notice as a Certificate of the Requisites aforesaid having been complied with, and shall forward and transmit the said Notice, with his Name thereon, to the proper Officer of Customs at the Port whose Duty it may be to attend the shipping of such Goods.

s. 56. “And be it enacted, That all the said Packages, with the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books therein, shall, at the Time specified in the Notice for shipping the same, be produced to the proper Officer of Customs, who shall inspect and examine the same, and, being satisfied that they are the Packages specified in the Shipping Notice, shall see them shipped in his Presence, and certify such Shipment on the Shipping Notice, and return the same to the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as such, and such Export Officer, having received back the said Notice, with the Certificate of Shipment thereon, shall deliver to the Exporter or his Agent a Debenture, in such Form and with such Particulars thereon as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct, for Payment of the Amount of Drawback at the Expiration of Six Weeks from the Time of Shipment.

s. 57. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That no Debenture shall be made out for the Payment of Drawback on any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, exported to _Guernsey_, _Jersey_, _Alderney_, or the _Isle of Man_, until a Certificate shall be produced of the due landing thereof under the Hand of the Chief Officer of Customs of the said Islands respectively.

s. 58. “And be it enacted, That in every Case where any such Notice for shipping any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, on Drawback, shall be given, it shall be lawful for the Officer of Customs to whom the Package or Packages containing such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, shall be produced for Shipment, and for any other Officer of Customs or of Excise, to open all or any of the Packages mentioned in such Notice, and to unpack and examine the Contents thereof; and if the same shall be found correct such Officer shall, at his own Expence, to be allowed him by the Commissioners of Customs or of Excise, as the Case may be, cause the same to be carefully repacked, and the respective Packages again secured and sealed; but if on such Examination any Package, or the Contents thereof, shall be found to vary in any Particular from the Description contained in the Shipping Notice, so that a higher or greater Sum than of right due shall have been claimed, or in case such Discovery had not been made would have, on the Exportation of such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, been deemed payable as Drawback, or Her Majesty in any respect defrauded therein, such Packages, and the Contents thereof, shall be forfeited, and may be seized by any Officer of Excise or Customs, and the Exporter thereof shall forfeit Treble the Value of the Drawback sought to be obtained, or Two hundred Pounds, at the Election of the Commissioners of Excise.

s. 59. “And be it enacted, That no Drawback shall be allowed for or in respect of the Paper of any Books in the Latin, Greek, Oriental, or Northern Languages printed within the Universities of _Oxford_ and _Cambridge_, or the Universities of _Scotland_, or _Trinity College, Dublin_, by Permission of the Vice Chancellors or Principals or Provost of the same respectively, nor for or in respect of any Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, or Books of Common Prayer, Confession of Faith, or Larger or Shorter Catechism, printed in the Universities of _Oxford_ or _Cambridge_, or _Trinity College, Dublin_, or by the Queen’s Printers in _England_, _Scotland_, or _Ireland_ respectively, nor for or in respect of any other printed Books exported by any Person not being a Printer or Bookseller or Stationer, or which have ever been before sold to any Person not using or exercising the Trade or Business of a Printer or Bookseller or Stationer.”

s. 62. “And be it enacted, That every Person who shall produce to any Officer of Excise or Customs to be packed or shipped for Exportation on Drawback any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, not entitled to Drawback under the Provisions of this Act, or who shall pack or ship for Exportation on Drawback any such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, or any Articles, Matters, or Goods, other than the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, produced to the Officer of Excise to be packed, or who shall fraudulently remove, deposit, or conceal any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, with Intent unduly to obtain any Drawback, or any higher Amount of Drawback than he would otherwise be entitled to, shall, over and above all other Penalties which he may thereby incur, forfeit Treble the Amount of the Drawback sought to be obtained, or Two hundred Pounds, at the Election of the Commissioners of Excise, and all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, or Books, or other Articles, Matters, or Goods, shall be forfeited, and may be seized by any Officer of Excise or Customs.

s. 63. “And be it enacted, That if any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall, by Fire or by the sinking, casting away of, or by any inevitable Accident happening to any Vessel or Barge in which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall be transporting or have been transported from any Part of the United Kingdom to any other Part thereof, or on board of which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been put for that Purpose, be wholly lost or destroyed, or so far damaged as to be worthless and only fit to be wholly destroyed, and no longer capable of Use as Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board unless re-manufactured and re-charged with Duty, it shall be lawful for the Maker of such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, being at the Time of such Loss or Damage the Proprietor or Owner thereof, to make Proof of such Loss or Damage, and of the Cause thereof, on the Oath or Oaths of One or more credible Witness or Witnesses, and of the Duty on such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board having been duly charged on and paid by such Maker, and that he was at the Time of such Loss or Damage the Proprietor or Owner thereof, before the Justices of the Peace at the Quarter Sessions for the County, Shire, Division, City, Town, or Place where such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been made and charged with Duty, or at or next adjoining to the Place where such Accident shall have taken place, or shall have been first discovered or made known to such Maker, or before the Commissioners of Excise, or any Three of them, if such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been made or charged with Duty, or such Accident shall have happened or been first discovered or made known to such Maker, within the Limits of the Chief Office of Excise; and such Justices at Quarter Sessions and Commissioners of Excise respectively shall and they are hereby required to examine any Witness or Witnesses thereupon upon Oath (which Oath they are hereby authorized to administer), and upon satisfactory Proof being made before them respectively that such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board had been so wholly lost and destroyed, or so far damaged as aforesaid, by any of the Causes respectively aforesaid, and that the Duties thereon had been duly charged and paid, and that such Maker was the Proprietor or Owner thereof at the Time of such Loss or Damage, to grant a Certificate thereof, and of the Amount of such Duties, under their respective Hands; and upon the Production of such Certificate to the Collector of Excise or other Officer acting as Collector of Excise of the Collection in which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been charged with Duty, such Collector or other Officer shall and he is hereby authorised and required to pay or allow to such Maker, out of any Monies arising from the Duties of Excise in his Hands, so much Money as the Sum specified in such Certificate for such Duties as aforesaid shall amount to.”

s. 65. “And be it enacted, That the Term ‘Paper’ in this Act shall include and be deemed to include, except where otherwise expressed, Glazed Paper, Sheathing Paper, Button Paper, and every Kind of Paper whatsoever, by whatever Denomination known or called, save and except that nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be deemed to extend to authorize the Allowance or Payment of any Drawback on the Exportation of Glazed Paper; and that the Term ‘Paper Maker’ shall, except where otherwise particularly expressed, include and be deemed and taken to include every Maker of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, and several in Partnership as well as one Person, and Females as well as Males; and the Term ‘Paper Mill’ shall, except where otherwise particularly expressed, include and be deemed and taken to include every Mill, House, Premises, Room, or Manufactory in which any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall be made or manufactured.

s. 66. “And be it enacted, That all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, of whatever Materials made, and by whatever Denomination known or called, and however manufactured, whether made by the Materials being reduced to Pulp and moulded or finished by Machinery, or by being pressed or intermixed in a dry State, and made to adhere by Pressure or otherwise, shall be deemed and taken to be Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board within the Meaning of this Act, and shall be charged with Duty accordingly; and the Makers thereof shall be and are hereby declared to be subject and liable to all the Enactments, Rules, Regulations, Fines, Penalties, and Forfeitures of this Act, and of the general Laws for securing the Duties of Excise.

s. 67. “And be it enacted, That from and after the Commencement of this Act the several Acts and Parts of Acts following shall be and the same are hereby repealed; (that is to say,) so much of the Acts 10 Ann. c. 19.; 21 Geo. 3. c. 24.; 24 Geo. 3. sess. 2. c 18.; 34 Geo. 3. c. 20.; 41 Geo. 3. c. 8.; 42 Geo. 3. c. 94.; 54 Geo. 3. c. 106.; 54 Geo. 3. c. 153.; 56 Geo. 3. c. 103.; 56 Geo. 3. c. 78.; 1 Geo. 4. c. 58.; 5 Geo. 4. c. 55.; and 6 & 7 Will 4. c. 52.; as relates to the Duties on Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, and the collecting and securing the same; save and except so far as any of the said recited Acts repeal any former Acts or Parts of Acts, and also save as to any Duties or Arrears of Duties, or any Drawbacks or Allowances, due or owing or payable, or any Penalties, Fines, or Forfeitures incurred, under the said recited Acts or Parts of Acts, or any of them, before the Commencement of this Act, all which said Duties, Drawbacks, and Allowances, Penalties, Fines, and Forfeitures, may be demanded, recovered, and paid, sued for, enforced, and recovered, and condemned, as if this Act had not been passed.

s. 68. “And be it enacted, That this Act shall commence and take effect on the Eleventh Day of _October_ One thousand eight hundred and thirty-nine.”

_Paper_ (Ireland).--4 Geo. 4. c. 72. imposes a Customs Duty on the Importation of Paper into Ireland, not being the Manufacture of Great Britain, _viz._

Duty. £ _s. d._ “Brown Paper made of old Rope or Cordage only, without separating or extracting the Pitch or Tar therefrom, and without any Mixture of other Materials therewith, the lb. 0 0 10

“Paper printed, painted, or stained Paper, or Paper Hangings, or Flock Paper, the Yard square 0 1 7

“Waste Paper, or Paper of any other Sort, not particularly enumerated or described, nor otherwise charged with Duty, the lb. 0 1 7

“The same Duties from the East Indies.

“No Drawback.”

PAPER BENCH.--_M._ _See_ BANK, also HORSE.

PAPER BOARD.

Boards made of deal plank, on which to place paper when wetted for printing. They have two slips of deal nailed to the bottom of each to strengthen them, and to prevent the joining from giving way; these slips are broader and not so thick as those inserted in letter boards. The general sizes are, demy boards, twenty-six inches by twenty-two; royal, thirty inches by twenty-six.

PAPER THE CASE.

Lining the bottom of the boxes in the cases with paper.--_M._ This was formerly done by the compositor; it is now done by the printer’s joiner before the bottom is nailed on.

PAPER UP LETTER.

To wrap the pages up in paper after a work is finished.--_M._

In all book houses, there are bulks appropriated for the letter that is cleared away; so that when it is dry it may be papered up. In small houses this is generally done by the overseer; but in houses with large establishments, there is a person appointed to take care of the letter, furniture, chases, &c. which he keeps locked up, and delivers out as wanted: he also papers up the letter; that is, he wraps up each piece in the waste of some work, which he procures from the warehouse, and on which he writes the name of the type; it also tends to save trouble if he add whether it be open matter, Italic, or figures, as the case may be, as it prevents the necessity of opening the pieces out, when particular kinds only are wanted for distribution.

PAPER STOOL.

A stool with a large square top, on which to lay printed paper after it has been worked off, while the warehouseman is hanging it up to dry. There is a notch cut in the top to admit the fingers, for the greater convenience of moving it about.

PAPER WINDOWS. _See_ ANCIENT CUSTOMS.

PARAGON.

The name of a type, one size larger than Great Primer, and one smaller than Double Pica. Moxon does not enumerate this size in his list. It is equal to two Long Primers. _See_ TYPES.

PARAGRAPH.

A paragraph ¶ denotes the beginning of a new subject, or a sentence not connected with